USER’S MANUALDBK Options

Part 1 of 2

Option Cards and Modules
General Information through DBK34ADBK Option Cards & Modules
457-0911 rev 8.2 (Part 1 of 2)*372413A-01*
372413A-01

Measurement Computing
10 Commerce Way
Norton, MA 02766(508) 946-5100
Fax: (508) 946-9500
info@mccdaq.com

www.mccdaq.com

ii

Warranty Information
Contact Measurement Computing by phone, fax, or e-mail in regard to warranty-related issues:
Phone: (508) 946-5100, fax: (508) 946-9500, e-mail: info@mccdaq.com

Limitation of Liability
Measurement Computing cannot be held liable for any damages resulting from the use or misuse of this product.

Copyright, Trademark, and Licensing Notice
All Measurement Computing documentation, software, and hardware are copyright with all rights reserved. No part ofthis product may be copied, reproduced or transmitted by any mechanical, photographic, electronic, or other method
without Measurement Computing’s prior written consent. IOtech product names are trademarked; other product names, asapplicable, are trademarks of their respective holders. All supplied IOtech software (including miscellaneous support
files, drivers, and sample programs) may only be used on one installation. You may make archival backup copies.

CE Notice
Many Measurement Computing products carry the CE marker indicating they comply with the safety and emissions
standards of the European Community. When applicable these products have a Declaration of Conformity stating which
specifications and operating conditions apply. You can view the Declarations of Conformity at
www.mccdaq.com/legal.aspx (CE Information page).

Warnings, Cautions, Notes, and Tips
Refer all service to qualified personnel. This caution symbol warns of possible personal injury or equipment damage
under noted conditions. Follow all safety standards of professional practice and the recommendations in this manual.
Using this equipment in ways other than described in this manual can present serious safety hazards or cause equipment
damage.
This warning symbol is used in this manual or on the equipment to warn of possible injury or death from electricalshock under noted conditions.

This ESD caution symbol urges proper handling of equipment or components sensitive to damage from electrostatic
discharge. Proper handling guidelines include the use of grounded anti-static mats and wrist straps, ESD-protective bags
and cartons, and related procedures.

This symbol indicates the message is important, but is not of a Warning or Caution category. These notes can be of great
benefit to the user, and should be read.
In this manual, the book symbol always precedes the words “Reference Note.” This type of note identifies the locationof additional information that may prove helpful. References may be made to other chapters or other documentation.
Tips provide advice that may save time during a procedure, or help to clarify an issue. Tips may include additionalreference.

Specifications and Calibration
Specifications are subject to change without notice. Significant changes will be addressed in an addendum or revision to
the manual. As applicable, the hardware is calibrated to published specifications. Periodic hardware calibration is notcovered under the warranty and must be performed by qualified personnel as specified in this manual. Improper
calibration procedures may void the warranty.

CAUTION
Using this equipment in ways other than described in this manual can cause
personal injury or equipment damage. Before setting up and using yourequipment, you should read all documentation that covers your system.
Pay special attention to Warnings and Cautions.
Note:

During software installation, Adobe® PDF versions of user manuals will automaticallyinstall onto your hard drive as a part of product support. The default location is in the
Programs group, which can be accessed from the Windows Desktop. Initial navigation
is as follows:
Start [Desktop “Start” pull-down menu]⇒ Programs⇒ IOtech DaqX Software
You can also access the PDF documents from our website, or directly from the dataacquisition CD. For CD access of documentation, use the <View PDFs> button locatedon the opening screen.
Refer to the PDF documentation for details regarding the hardware and software
associated with your data acquisition system.
A copy of the Adobe Acrobat Reader® is included on your CD. The Reader provides
a means of reading and printing the PDF documents. Note that hardcopy versions of
the manuals can be ordered from the factory.

iv

917594

Part 1 of 2

DBK Options
General Information through DBK34A© 1998 through 2005 by Measurement Computing Corp.

917594*Part 1 of 2, p/n 457-0911

Printed in the United States of America

iiManual Layout

This user’s manual includes several chapters and independent DBK sections. It also includes DBK
Basics, which is a stand alone document.

DBK Basics – Explains what DBKs are and uses tables to identify the various types of DBKs. The
document module includes: tips for setting up a data acquisition system, how to determine system power
requirements, and various power options.

Chapters*
1 – Signal Management. Discusses signal management and signal conditioning, and CE complianceinformation.
2 – System Connections and Pinouts. Provides instructions for connecting a DBK option to a Daq
or LogBook device. Pinouts are included for the P1, P2, and P3 DB37 connectors, as well as the
100-pin P4 connector used by /2000 Series Devices.
3 – DBK Set Up in DaqView. Provides instruction for setting up analog and digital DBKs in
DaqView’s Hardware Configuration screen.
4 – DBK Set Up in LogView. Provides instruction for setting up analog and digital DBKs in
LogView’s Hardware Configuration window.
5 – Troubleshooting. Explains solutions to common noise, wiring, and configuration problems.
Dimensional Drawings
DBK Cards and Modules** – Independent DBK documentation is provided in alphanumeric order on a
DBK by DBK basis. Refer to the Table of Contents for a complete list.
Documentation for discontinued DBKs [listed at the end of the Table of Contents] is not included in the
DBK Options Manual, but can be downloaded or read from our website.
Note: During software installation, Adobe® PDF versions of user manuals will automatically install onto yourhard drive as a part of product support. The default location is in the Programs group, which can beaccessed from the Windows Desktop. Refer to the PDF documentation for details regarding both
hardware and software.
A copy of the Adobe Acrobat Reader® is included on your CD. The Reader provides a means ofreading and printing the PDF documents. Note that hardcopy versions of the manuals can be orderedfrom the factory.
Note that you can access PDF documents directly from the data acquisition CD via the <View PDFs>
button located on the CD’s opening screen.

* The chapters are included in Part 1 of the DBK Options Manual. DBKs up to and including DBK34A ar also
included in Part 1.
** Part 2 of the manual begins with DBK40.

DBK Option Cards & Modules User’s Manual

917094v

Table of Contents
DBK Basics

3 – DBK Set Up in DaqView

Introduction…… DBK Basics-1
How Do DBKs Connect? …… DBK Basics- 2
DBK Identification Tables ….. DBK Basics-9
Tips on Setting up a Data Acquisition
System …… DBK Basics-12
Power Supplies & Connectors …… DBK Basics-14
An Introduction to Power-Related
DBKs …… DBK Basics-15
Power Requirements...... DBK Basics-16
Calculating Your System’s Power
Needs …… DBK Basics-18
Additional Reading ….. DBK Basics-21

Overview …… 3-1
Setting Up Analog DBKs …… 3-5
Setting Up Digital DBKs …… 3-7
Setting Internal Clock Speed to 100 kHz …3-9

4 – DBK Set Up in LogView
Overview …… 4-1
Setting Up Analog DBKs …… 4-4
Setting Up Digital DBKs …… 4-7

5 – Troubleshooting
ESD Handling Notice …… 5-1
Troubleshooting Checklist……5-1
Frequently Asked Questions ……5-3
Customer Assistance……5-6

1 - Signal Management
Signal Modes ...... 1-1

System Noise ...... 1-5

Using DBK Cards and Modules for Signal
Conditioning ...... 1-6
Channel Control and Expansion ...... 1-7
Signal Acquisition ...... 1-9

Dimensional Drawings

Sequencer ...... 1-9
Scan Rate ...... 1-10
Triggering ...... 1-10
Counter/Timer Functions ...... 1-11
Simultaneous Sample and Hold (SSH) ...... 1-11

DBK Documents
DBK1, 16-Connector BNC Adapter Module
DBK2, 4-Channel Voltage Output Card
DBK4, 2-Channel Dynamic Signal Input Card
DBK5, 4-Channel Current Output Card
DBK7, 4-Ch. Frequency-To-Voltage Input Card
DBK8, 8-Channel High-Voltage Input Card
DBK9, 8-Channel RTD Card
DBK10, 3-Slot Expansion Chassis
DBK11A, Screw-Terminal & BNC Option Card
DBK15, Universal Current, Voltage Input Card
DBK16, 2-Channel Strain-Gage Card
DBK17, 4-Channel Simultaneous Sample andHold Card
DBK18, 4-Channel, Low-Pass Filter Card
DBK20 and DBK21, Digital I/O Cards
DBK23, Isolated Digital Input Chassis
DBK24, Isolated Digital Output Chassis
DBK25, 8-Channel Relay Output Card
DBK30A, Rechargeable Battery Module
DBK32A, Auxiliary Power Supply Card
DBK34A, UPS / Battery Module

Two-Point Calibration of a Temperature
Measurement System ...... 1-12

Overview ...... 1-12
An Example of Two-Point Calibration ...... 1-13
Calculation of Scale and Offset ...... 1-14
Implementing the Scale and Offset Constants in
DaqView ...... 1-14
Converting Degrees from Celsius toFahrenheit ...... 1-14
One Known Temperature Environment ...... 1-15
Use of a Temperature Calibrator ...... 1-15

CE Compliance ...... 1-15

CE Standards and Directives ...... 1-16
Safety Conditions ...... 1-16
Emissions/Immunity Conditions ...... 1-17
CE Enhancements for Existing Products ...... 1-17

2 – System Connections and Pinouts
Overview …… 2-1
P1 – DB37 for Analog I/O …… 2-3
P2 – DB37 for Digital I/O …… 2-4
P3 – DB37 for Pulse/Frequency/High-Speed
Digital I/O …… 2-5
P4 to P1, P2, P3 Correlation …… 2-6
Ground Tables – P4 to P1, P2, P3 …… 2-9vi917094

DBK Option Cards & Modules User’s ManualPart 2
Discontinued DBKs
DBK41, 10-Slot Expansion Module
DBK42, 16-Slot 5B Signal Conditioning Module
DBK43A & DBK43B, 8-Channel Strain-Gage Modules
DBK44, 2-Ch. 5B Signal-Conditioning Card
DBK45, 4-Ch. SSH and Low-Pass Filter Card
DBK46, 4-Channel Analog Output Card
DBK48, Multipurpose Isolated SignalConditioning Module (supports up to 16 8B
Modules)
DBK50 and DBK51, Voltage Input Modules
DBK55, 8-Channel Frequency-to-Voltage Input
ModuleDBK60, 3-Slot Expansion Chassis
DBK65, 8-Channel Transducer Interface Module
DBK70, Vehicle Network Interface, Analog
Multiplexer Module (see p/n 1056-0901)
DBK80, 16-Ch. Differential Voltage Input Cardwith Excitation Output
DBK81, 7-Ch. T/C Card
DBK82, 14-Ch. T/C Card
DBK83, 14-Ch. T/C Card, uses external
connection pod
DBK84, 14-Ch. T/C Module
DBK85, 16-Ch. Differential Voltage Module
DBK90, 56-Ch. T/C Module
DBK100 Series, (DBK100/D, 100/T,101)
In-Vehicle Thermocouple Measurement System
DBK200 Series Matrix
DBK200, P4-to-P1 Adapter Board
DBK202, DBK203, DBK204 Series
P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapters
DBK206, P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Board with
Screw Terminals
DBK207 and DBK207/CJC, 16-Channel,
5B Carrier Boards
DBK208, Relay Carrier Board,
Opto-22 Compatible
DBK209, P4 to P1/P2/P3 Mini-Adapter Board
DBK210, 32-Ch. Digital I/O Carrier Board
DBK213, Screw-Terminal & Expansion Module
3-Card Slot, P1/P2/P3/P4 Compatibility
DBK214, 16-Connector BNC Interface Module
P1/P2/P3/P4 Compatibility
DBK215, 16-Connector BNC Connection Modulewith 68-Pin SCSI Adaptability
DBK601 thru DBK609, Termination Panels

DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual

917094

The following DBKs have been discontinued.
However, documentation for them may be reador downloaded from our website.

DBK12 and DBK13, A/I Multiplexer Cards
DBK19, 14-Channel Thermocouple Card
DBK33, Triple-Output Power Supply Card
DBK34, Vehicle UPS Module
DBK40, 18-Connector BNC Analog Interface
DBK52, 14-Ch. Thermocouple Input Module
DBK53 and DBK54, Analog Multiplexing
Modules
DBK201, P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Board
DBK603, Termination Panel, Safety Jacks, SE
DBK605-B, Termination Panel, T/C, B Type, DE
DBK605-R, Termination Panel, T/C, R Type, DE
DBK605-S, Termination Panel, T/C, S Type, DE
DBK605-U, Termination Panel, T/C, U Type, DE
DBK609, Termination Panel, 5-Pin DIN

vii

This page is intentionally blank.

viii

917594

DBK Option Cards & Modules User’s ManualDBK Basics
This “DBK Basics” section of the manual does not apply to DaqBoard/500 Series or DaqBoard/1000
Series boards. Those boards are not intended for use with DBK options; nor will they support such
options.
Introduction…… 1
How Do DBKs Connect to the Data Acquisition Device? …… 2

Connecting DBKs to DaqBook/100/200 Series Devices, ISA-Type DaqBoards, & LogBooks … 2
Connecting DBKs to Daq PC-Cards ……3Connecting DBKs to DaqBoard/2000 Series Boards …… 4
Connecting DBKs to DaqBook/2000 Series Devices …… 5

DBK Identification Tables ….. 9

Analog Output DBKs …… 9
Digital I/O Control DBKs …… 9
Analog Signal Conditioning DBKs …… 9
Expansion and Terminal Panel Connection DBKs …… 10
Power Supply DBKs …… 12

Tips on Setting up a Data Acquisition System …… 12
Power Supplies and Power Connectors ……14
An Introduction to Power-Related DBKs ….. 15Power Requirements …… 16
Calculating Your System’s Power Needs …… 18
Additional Reading ….. 21

CAUTION
Turn off power to all devices connected to the system before connecting cables orsetting configuration jumpers and switches. Electrical shock or damage toequipment can result even under low-voltage conditions.

CAUTION
The discharge of static electricity can damage some electronic components.
Semiconductor devices are especially susceptible to ESD damage. You should
always handle components carefully, and you should never touch connector pins or
circuit components unless you are following ESD guidelines in an appropriate ESD
controlled area. Such guidelines include the use of properly grounded mats andwrist straps, ESD bags and cartons, and related procedures.

Introduction
The term “DBK” typically refers to a card or module that is used to expand or enhance a primary dataacquisition device, such as a DaqBook, DaqBoard, or LogBook. As will be seen in the upcoming DBK
identification tables, DBKs provide a wide variety of data acquisition functions. Depending on the DBKs
used, one or more of the following can be realized:• signal conditioning• analog output• digital I/O• channel expansion• supplying powering to another acquisition device• providing an interface for different connectivity; for example, in a DaqBoard/2000 Series board,converting a P4, 100-pin connector to P1, P2, and P3 37-pin, DB37 connectors.
Daq Systems

886995

DBK Basics, pg. 1

Reference Notes: During software installation, Adobe® PDF versions of user manuals willautomatically install onto your hard drive as a part of product support. The default location
is in the Programs group, which can be accessed from the Windows Desktop. Refer to the
PDF documentation, especially the DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual(p/n 457-0905) for details regarding both hardware and software in relevant to DBKs.
A copy of the Adobe Acrobat Reader® is included on your CD. The Acrobat Reader
provides a means of reading and printing the PDF documents. Note that hardcopy versionsof the manuals can be ordered from the factory.

How Do DBKs Connect to the Data Acquisition Device?
Each DBK connects to the primary data acquisition device; e.g., a DaqBook, DaqBoard, or LogBook,
through one of three 37-pin ports, which are designated as follows:•••

P1 – Analog I/O
P2 – Digital I/O
P3 – Pulse/Frequency/High-Speed Digital I/O

Depending on the primary data acquisition device, connectivity issues differ slightly. This will be madeclear by the figures and accompanying text that follow.

Connecting DBKs to DaqBook/100/200 Series Devices, ISA-Type DaqBoards, & LogBooks
Reference Notes:
o DaqBoard/2000 Series and /2000c Series users, refer to page 4.
o DaqBook/2000 Series users, refer to page 5.
For DaqBook/100 Series and DaqBook/200 Series devices, ISA-Type DaqBoards, and LogBooks, DBK
connections are not made directly to the port, but through a CA-37-x ribbon cable, where “x” indicates thenumber of expansion devices that can be connected. For example, in addition to providing a DB37
connector to interface with the primary data acquisition device, a CA-37-3 cable includes three additional
DB37 connectors. These provide a means of adding three DBKs to one port. Use of a CA-37-16 cable willallow up to 16 DBKs to be added. The CA-37-x cable system is excellent for DaqBooks, LogBooks, andISA-type DaqBoards.

/100 /200 Series

Connecting DBKs to a DaqBook/100 Series or /200 Series Device
pg. 2,DBK Basics

967794

Daq Systems

The previous figure applies to LogBooks, DaqBook/100/200 Series devices, and ISA-type DaqBoards. As
will be seen elsewhere in this document, some devices do not include all three connectors, i.e., P1, P2, andP3.

Connecting DBKs to Daq PC-Cards
The Daq PC-Card is only intended for connections to a P1 connector of a single “passive” DBK card or
module. A passive DBK card or module is one that provides a desired connectivity (such as BNCs or screw
terminals), but performs no signal conditioning.
A CA-134 Interface Cable and a CN-86-F (dual DB37 female adapter) are used to provide the DB37,
P1 connector.

Daq PC-Card Cabling
The CA-134 cable connects to a CN-86-F adapter, which then connects to a single “passive” card or module.
The passive DBKs are:•••

DBK1 – 16 Connector BNC Module
DBK11A – Screw Terminal Option Card
DBK40 – BNC Analog Interface

Reference Note:
For information regarding the passive DBKs (DBK1, DBK11A, and DBK40), refer tothe DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual (p/n 457-0905).

Daq Systems

967794

DBK Basics, pg. 3

Connecting DBKs to DaqBoard/2000 Series Boards
DaqBoard/2000 Series and cPCI DaqBoard/2000 Series boards have 100-pin connectors designated as P4.
The 100 pins correlate to various pins on P1, P2, and P3 DB37 connectors.* Connectivity in the system is asfollows (see figure).
•

Both the DaqBoard/2000 and /2000c Series board connect to a CA-195 cable.
The cable has two, 100-pin, P4 connectors.

•

The CA-195 connects to a DBK200 Series adapter board or adapter module for 100-pin to
37-pin adaptations, e.g., P4-to-P1, P2, P3; but not necessarily all three.*•

The DBK200 Series adapter connects to a CA-37-x ribbon cable, where “x” indicates thenumber of expansion devices that can be connected. For example, in addition to providing a
DB37 connector to interface with the primary data acquisition device, a CA-37-3 cableincludes three additional DB37 connectors. These provide a means of adding three DBKs to
one port. Use of a CA-37-16 cable will allow up to 16 DBKs to be added.

•

The CA-37-x cable connects to expansion DBKs, in accordance with port type. For example,
Analog DBKs to port P1, Digital DBKs to port P2, and passive DBKs to port P3.

Connecting DBKs to a DaqBoard/2000 Series Board* DaqBoard/2003 and cPCI DaqBoard/2003c are exceptions to the above connectivity method. The /2003
board typically connects directly to a DBK205 (P4-to-Screw Terminal Adapter), as discussed in the DBK
Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual (p/n 457-0905).
Note: DaqBook/2000 Series Devices, which are discussed in the following section, can also connect to DBKs via
a P4 connector, as indicated in the above figure.

pg. 4,DBK Basics

967794

Daq Systems

Connecting DBKs to DaqBook/2000 Series Devices
Several products make use of the DaqBook/2000 nomenclature. However, they do not all offer the sameconnection options. Refer to pinouts for the specific devices, as needed.
Product

Connects to DBK Expansions via …

DaqBook/2001 and /2005

37-pin connectors P1, P2, and P3. There is no P4.

DaqBook/2020

37-pin connectors P1 and P2. There is no P3 or P4.

DaqOEM/2001 and /2005

40-pin headers (JP1, JP2, and JP3). There is no P4.

DaqBook/2000A

37-pin connectors P1, P2, P3, and a 100-pin P4 connector.

DaqBook/2000E

37-pin connectors P1, P2, P3, and a 100-pin P4 connector.

DaqBook/2000X

37-pin connectors P1, P2, P3, and a 100-pin P4 connector.

For DaqBook/2000 Series devices, DBK connections can be made to Ports P1, P2, and/or P3 (whenapplicable). For the “AEX” models a 100-pin P4 connector can be used. A discussion of both methods,
follows.
The P4 connector on a DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device shares signal connections with the
P1, P2, and P3 connectors. P4 offers no additional I/O. Connecting a DBK200 Series
Option to P4 via a CA-195 cable distances the P1, P2, P3 connection from the
DaqBook/2000 Series device. It does not provide any new signal I/O. See the following
Caution.

CAUTION
Signal conflicts between a DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device’s P1, P2, P3 connectors and its
P4 connector can result in erroneous readings and possible equipment damage.
Therefore, when connections have been made to P1, P2, and/or P3, use caution when
making connections through P4, and visa versa.
Refer to P1, P2, P3, and P4 pinouts to avoid making duplicate signal connections.

There are two ways to connect a DBK option to a DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device. The first
method is preferable, as it introduces less noise.
Preferred Method – (a) Connect a CA-37-x cable to the appropriate DB37 connector[P1, P2, or P3] on the DaqBook/2000 Series device. (b) Connect thefree end of the cable to the DBK card or module.
Optional Method – (a) Connect a CA-195-x cable to the P4 connector on the
DaqBook/2000 Series device. (b) Connect the free end of the cable
to a DBK200 Series device. (c) Connect the DBK option to the
DBK200 Series device, as applicable.
The primary reason that less noise is seen in the “preferred” method is that a
DaqBook/2000 Series device’s P1 connector pertains only to analog acquisition signals
and the P2 connector pertains only to digital I/O. This provides a strong degree of
isolation between the two signal types. However, in the case of a CA-195-x cableconnected to P4, digital and analog signals co-exist in one cable.

If you need to use the P4 connection method, use of the 8-inch ribbon cable (CA-195-1)
will result in the lowest level of crosstalk [for that method].

Daq Systems

967794

DBK Basics, pg. 5

Connecting DBKs to a DaqBook/2000 Series Device via P1, P2, and/or P3
The DBKs do not connect directly to the port, but through a CA-37-x ribbon cable, where “x” indicates thenumber of expansion devices that can be connected. For example, a CA-37-3 cable includes a 37-pin mating
connector to interface with the DaqBook/2000 Series DB37 connector (P1, P2, P3); it also includes three
additional DB37 connectors. These provide a means of adding three DBKs to one port. Use of a
CA-37-16 cable will allow up to 16 DBKs to be added to one DaqBook/2000 Series device DB37-type port.

DaqBook/2000
Series Device

Connecting DBKs to a DaqBook/2000 Series Device via P1, P2, and P3

The P4 connector on a DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device shares signal connections with the
P1, P2, and P3 connectors. P4 offers no additional I/O. Connecting a DBK200 Series
Option to P4 via a CA-195 cable distances the P1, P2, P3 connection from the
DaqBook/2000 Series device. It does not provide any new signal I/O. See the following
Caution.

CAUTION
Signal conflicts between a DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device’s P1, P2, P3 connectors and its
P4 connector can result in erroneous readings and possible equipment damage.
Therefore, when connections have been made to P1, P2, and/or P3, use caution when
making connections through P4, and visa versa.
The following pinouts indicate the P1, P2, and P3 pins, and their P4 equivalents.
Use the pinouts to avoid making duplicate signal connections.

pg. 6,DBK Basics

967794

Daq Systems

Connecting DBKs to a DaqBook/2000 “AEX” Device via P4
Every DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device has a 100-pin connector designated as P4. The P4 pins correlate tovarious pins on P1, P2, and P3.
The P4 connector on a DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device shares signal connections with the
P1, P2, and P3 connectors. P4 offers no additional I/O. Connecting a DBK200 Series
Option to P4 via a CA-195 cable distances the P1, P2, P3 connection from the
DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device. It does not provide any new signal I/O. See the following
Caution.

CAUTION
Signal conflicts between a DaqBook/2000 AEX device’s P1, P2, P3 connectors and its
P4 connector can result in erroneous readings and possible equipment damage.
Therefore, when connections have been made to P1, P2, and/or P3, use caution when
making connections through P4, and visa versa.
Refer to P1, P2, P3, and P4 pinouts to avoid making duplicate signal connections.
A brief explanation of P4 connectivity for DaqBook/2000 AEX devices follows the illustration.

DaqBook/2000
Series Device

P4

Connecting DBKs to a DaqBook/2000 AEX Device via P4
DaqBook/2001, DaqBook/2005, DaqOEM/2001, DaqOEM/2005, and DaqBook/2020 do
not have a P4 connector. The P4 connection option applies to “AEX” models only.

Daq Systems

967794

DBK Basics, pg. 7

P4 connectivity for DaqBook/2000 “AEX” devices is as follows:•

One end of a CA-195 cable connects to the DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device’s 100-pin P4
connector. Note that the CA-195 cable has two P4 connectors.

•

The other end of the CA-195 cable connects to a DBK200 Series adapter board [or adapter
module] for 100-pin to 37-pin adaptations, e.g., P4-to-P1, P2, P3; but not necessarily all three.

•

The DBK200 Series adapter connects to one or more CA-37-x ribbon cables, where “x”
indicates the number of expansion devices that can be connected. For example, in addition toproviding a DB37 connector to interface with the primary data acquisition device, a CA-37-3
cable includes three additional DB37 connectors. These provide a means of adding three
DBKs to one port. Use of a CA-37-16 cable will allow up to 16 DBKs to be added.

•

The CA-37-x cable connects to expansion DBKs, in accordance with port type. For example,
Analog DBKs to port P1, Digital DBKs to port P2, and passive DBKs to port P3.

There are two ways to connect a DBK option to a DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device. The first
method is preferable, as it introduces less noise.
Preferred Method – (a) Connect a CA-37-x cable to the appropriate DB37 connector[P1, P2, or P3] on the DaqBook/2000 Series device. (b) Connect thefree end of the cable to the DBK card or module.
Optional Method – (a) Connect a CA-195-x cable to the P4 connector on the
DaqBook/2000 Series device. (b) Connect the free end of the cable
to a DBK200 Series device. (c) Connect the DBK option to the
DBK200 Series device, as applicable.
The primary reason that less noise is seen in the “preferred” method is that a
DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device’s P1 connector pertains only to analog acquisition signals
and the P2 connector pertains only to digital I/O. This provides a strong degree of
isolation between the two signal types. However, in the case of a CA-195-x cableconnected to P4, digital and analog signals co-exist in one cable.

If you need to use the P4 connection method, use of the 8-inch ribbon cable (CA-195-1)
will result in the lowest level of crosstalk [for that method].

The CE Cable Kit, p/n CA-209D, may be required for systems that require a P4 cable
length of 3 feet. The CA-209D kit includes a shielded version of the CA-195 cable, twogrounding pigtails, and associated cable clamps. When properly connected, the shieldedcable provides greater immunity to noise. The CE Compliance chapter includes details.

pg. 8,DBK Basics

967794

Daq Systems

DBK Identification Tables
Analog Output DBKs
Analog Output
Product
DBK2
DBK5
DBK46

Name/Description
Voltage Output Card
Current Output Card
Analog Output Card option for designated devices

I/O
4 channels
4 channels
4 channels

Connects To:
P1
P1
Internal
PC Board

I/O
48 channels
48 channels
24 channels
24 channels
8 channels
16 Channels
32 Channels

Connects To:
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2 or P4
P2 or P4, P1 exp.

Digital I/O Control DBKs
Digital I/O / Control
Product
DBK20
DBK21
DBK23
DBK24
DBK25
DBK208
DBK210Notes

Daq Systems

Name/Description
General-Purpose Digital I/O Card (Screw Terminals)
General-Purpose Digital I/O Card (DB37 Connectors)
Optically Isolated Digital-Input Module
Optically Isolated Digital-Output Module
Relay Output Card
Carrier board for Opto-22 Compatible SSR Digital Modules.
Carrier Board for Grayhill 70M-Series Mini-ModulesoP1, P2, and P3 DB37 connectors do not exist on the DaqBoard/2000 Series boards or /2000c
Series boards, but are obtained by using P4 adapters (DBK200 series boards).

o

For DaqBoard/2000 Series devices, unless otherwise noted, the internal clocks should be set to
100 kHz when used with any of the following DBK options: DBK12, DBK13, DBK15, DBK19,
DBK52, DBK53, and DBK54. See specific DBK section for details.

o

DaqBoard/500 Series boards do not support DBK options.

o

DaqBoard/1000 Series boards do not support DBK options.

o

DaqBook/2000 “AEX” devices have P1, P2, and P3 connectors and, in addition a P4 connector.

967794

DBK Basics, pg. 9

Analog Signal Conditioning DBKs
The DBKs that are used for analog signal conditioning attach to transducers and condition their outputs into
analog voltages. An A/D converter, located in the primary acquisition device, measures the analog voltages.
There are many signal-conditioning solutions available (and more are in development). Note that DBK
high-capacity modules require more circuitry than can fit on a compact card.
Analog Signal Conditioning
Product
DBK4
DBK7
DBK8
DBK9
DBK12
DBK13
DBK15
DBK16
DBK17
DBK18
DBK19
DBK42
DBK43A
DBK44
DBK45
DBK48
DBK50
DBK51
DBK52
DBK53
DBK54
DBK55
DBK65
DBK70
DBK80
DBK81
DBK82
DBK83
DBK84
DBK85
DBK90
DBK207
DBK207/CJC

Notes

pg. 10,DBK Basics

Name/Description
Dynamic Signal Input Card
Frequency-to-Voltage Input Card
High-Voltage Input Card
RTD Measurement Card
Low-Gain Analog Multiplexing Card
See note 2
High-Gain Analog Multiplexing Card
See note 2
Universal Current/Voltage Input Card
See note 2
Strain-Gage Measurement Card
Simultaneous Sample & Hold Card
Low-Pass Filter Card
Thermocouple Card
See note 2
5B Isolated Signal-Conditioning Module
Strain-Gage Measurement Module
5B Isolated Signal-Conditioning Card
SSH and Low-Pass Filter Card
8B Isolated Signal-Conditioning Module
Isolated High-Voltage Input Module
Isolated Low-Voltage Input Module
Thermocouple Input Module
See note 2
Low-Gain Analog Multiplexing Module
See note 2
High-Gain Analog Multiplexing Module
See note 2
Frequency to Voltage Module
Channel Transducer Interface Module
Vehicle Network Interface, Analog Multiplexer Module
Differential Voltage Input Card with Excitation Output
Thermocouple Card, High-Accuracy
Thermocouple Card, High-Accuracy
Thermal Couple Card, High-Accuracy; uses Connection Pod
Thermocouple Module, High-Accuracy
Differential Voltage Module
Thermocouple Module, High-Accuracy
Carrier Board for 5B Compatible Analog Input Modules
Carrier Board for 5B Compatible Analog Input Modules.
DBK207/CJC includes cold junction compensation (CJC)

I/O
2 channels
4 channels
8 channels
8 channels
16 channels
16 channels
16 channels
2 channels
4 channels
4 channels
14 channels
16 channels
8 channels
2 channels
4 channels
16 channels
8 channels
8 channels
14 channels
16 channels
16 channels
8 channels
8 channels
16 channels
16 channels
7 channels
14 channels
14 channels
14 channels
16 channels
56 channels
16 channels
16 channels

Connects To:
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1 or P4
P1 or P4o

P1, P2, and P3 DB37 connectors do not exist on the DaqBoard/2000 Series boards or /2000c
Series boards, but are obtained by using P4 adapters (DBK200 series boards).

o

For DaqBoard/2000 Series devices, unless otherwise noted, the internal clocks should be set to
100 kHz when used with any of the following DBK options: DBK12, DBK13, DBK15, DBK19,
DBK52, DBK53, and DBK54. See specific DBK section for details.

o

DaqBoard/500 Series boards do not support DBK options.

o

DaqBoard/1000 Series boards do not support DBK options.

o

DaqBook/2000 “AEX” devices have P1, P2, and P3 connectors and, in addition a P4 connector.

967794

Daq Systems

Expansion and Terminal Panel Connection DBKs
The following DBKs offer provide various expansion and connection options. The stackable 3-slot DBK10
low-profile enclosure can be used for up to three DBKs. If a system has more than 3 DBKs, the 10-slot
DBK41 can be used. Several DBK41s can be daisy-chained to accommodate many DBKs in one system.
Expansion and Connection, General
Product
DBK1
DBK10
DBK11A

Name/Description
16-Connector BNC Adapter Module
3-Slot Expansion Chassis
Screw-Terminal Option Card (DB37-Screw Terminal Block)

DBK40
DBK41
DBK60

BNC Interface
Analog Expansion Enclosure
Expansion Chassis with Termination Panels

I/O
16 connectors
3 cards
Component
sockets
18 connectors
10 cards
3 cards

Connects To:
P1
P1, P2, or P3
P1, P2, or P3

I/O
none
16 connectors
16 connectors
8 differential (16)16 differential

Connects To:
N/A
DBK Card
DBK Card
DBK Card
DBK Card

48 connectors
none
three DB37

DBK Card
N/A
DBK Card

P1
P1
P1 or P2

Termination Panels, Connectivity for DaqBoard/260
Product
DBK601
DBK602
DBK603
DBK604
DBK605

Name/Description
Termination Panel - Blank rear panel
Termination Panel - BNC rear panel
Termination Panel - Safety Jacks, single ended
Termination Panel - Safety Jacks, differential
Termination Panels - Thermocouple, differential panels;
specify type: B, J, K, R, S, or T
Termination Panel – 3 Terminal Blocks; 16 connections per TB
Termination Panel – strain relief clamp
Termination Panel – 3 female DB37 connectors

DBK606
DBK607
DBK608Several signal connection options were developed primarily for use with DaqBoard/2000 Series andcPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series Boards. The DBK200 Series P4-Adapter documentation provides the basic
connection concepts. That information, along with the related DBK subsections should enable you to set up
your desired configuration.
Connection Interface Boards and Modules
Product
DBK200
DBK201
DBK202
DBK203
DBK204
DBK205
DBK206
DBK209
DBK213
DBK214
DBK215

Description
P4-to-P1 Adapter Board
P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Board
P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Board with Screw-Terminals
A module version of DBK202
A module version of DBK202 with an included CE cable kit.
P4-to-TB1 12-slot Screw Terminal Block for DaqBoard/2003.
P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Board with Screw-Terminals
P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Mini-Adapter Board
3 card slots, Screw Terminal & Expansion Module
16-Connector BNC Interface Module, with Screw-Terminals
16-Connector BNC Connection Module with Screw-Terminals;
for use withDaqBoard/500 Series and DaqBoard/1000 Series

Connects To:
P4
P4
P4
P4
P4
P4
P4
P4
P1, P2, P3, P4
P1, P2, P3, P4
SCSI 68

Note 1:P1, P2, and P3 DB37 connectors do not exist on the DaqBoard/2000 Series or /2000c Series boards,
but are obtained by using P4 adapters (DBK200 series). These adapters typically connect to the
DaqBoard/2000 Series [/2000c Series] 100-pin P4 connector via cable.

Note 2:

DBK215 is only for use with DaqBoard/500 Series and DaqBoard/1000 Series. It cannot be used with
DaqBoard/2000 Series devices.

*

Daq Systems

I/O
P1
P1, P2, P3
P1, P2, P3 *P1, P2, P3 *P1, P2, P3 *TB1, 12-slot
P1, P2, P3 *P1, P2, P3 *P1, P2, P3 *P1, P2, P3, BNC *BNC *An asterisk in the I/O column indicates that the associated device includes screw-terminal blocks.

967794

DBK Basics, pg. 11

Power Supply DBKs
Power supply type DBKs are typically used in laboratory, automotive, and field applications. Input power
can come from any +10 to +20 VDC source, or from an AC source by using an appropriately rated AC-toDC adapter. The DBK30A rechargeable power supply can power DBK modules where AC mains are notavailable (the DBK30A outputs 28 V for powering transducers). For a large number of DBK cards, theDBK32A or DBK33 can be installed into an expansion slot. The DBK33 is used when +5 V is required inaddition to ±15 VDC. The DBK34 provides a steady 12 or 24 VDC while working with vehicle electricalsystems that may be turned on or off during testing.
Power Supply
Product
Name/Description
DBK30A
Rechargeable Battery/Excitation Module
DBK32A
Auxiliary Power Supply Card
DBK33
Triple-Output Power Supply Card
DBK34
Vehicle UPS Module
DBK34AUPS Battery ModulePower+12-14, 24-28 VDC (3.4 A-hr @ 14 VDC)
±15 V @ 500 mA±15 V @ 250 mA; +5 V @ 1 A
12/24 VDC (5 A-hr @12 VDC)
12/24 VDC (5 A-hr @12 VDC)

Tips on Setting up a Data Acquisition System
A successful installation involves setting up equipment and setting software parameters. In addition to thismanual, you may need to consult your Daq device or LogBook user’s manual.
DBKs should be configured before connections are made and power is applied. This sequence can prevent
equipment damage and will help ensure proper operation on startup. Many DBKs have on-board jumpers
and/or DIP switches that are used for setting channels and other variables. You will need to refer to theindividual DBK document modules to ensure that the DBKs are properly configured for you application.
Prior to designing or setting up a custom data acquisition system, you should review the following tips.
After reviewing the material you can write out the steps to setup a system that will best meet your specificapplication needs.
1.

The end use of the acquisition data should be used to determine how you set up and program youracquisition system. Prior to creating the system you should understand its layout and know how you aregoing to assign the channels. If you can answer the following questions you are off to a good start. If
not, you need to find the answers.
•
•
•
•
•

pg. 12,

What engineering units, ranges, sampling rates, etc. are best for your data?
Will the data be charted graphically, statistically processed, or exported to other programs?
How will the data be used?
How will the data be saved?
What are the system power requirements? Using several DBKs or transducers that require
excitation current may require an extra power supply, e.g., a DBK32A.

2.

Assign channel numbers.

3.

Plan the location of transducers, cable runs, DBKs, the acquisition device [LogBook or Daq device],and the computer. Label your transducers, cables, and connectors to prevent later confusion.

DBK Basics

967794

Daq Systems

4.

When configuring your LogBook or Daq device(s) consider the following:•

LogBook calibration is typically performed automatically through LogView software;
however, some DBKs may require manual calibration.

•

The DaqBook/100 Series and DaqBook/200 Series devices, and DaqBoards (ISA type)have internal jumpers and switches that you must set manually to match yourapplication.

•

Some DaqBook/100 Series and DaqBook/200 Series models are partially configured insoftware.

•

DaqBook/2000 Series devices have no jumpers or internal switches and are configured
entirely through software.

•

Daq PC-Cards are configured entirely in software.

•

DaqBoard/2000 Series boards are PCI type boards. They have no jumpers or switches andare configured entirely through software.

•cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series boards are compact PCI (cPCI) type boards. They have no
jumpers or switches and are configured entirely through software.

•

You may need to refer to other documentation, such as Quick Starts, Installation Guides,
User’s Manuals, and pertinent DBK document modules.

5.

Perform all hardware configurations before connecting signal and power. Remember toconfigure all the DBK cards and modules for your application. Several jumpers and DIP switches
may need to be set (channel, gain, filters, signal mode, etc).

6.

Setting up channel parameters often requires both hardware and software setup.

7.

Route and connect all signal and power cables while all power is turned OFF.

8.

To minimize electrical noise, route all signal lines away from any RF or high-voltage devices.

9.

Follow your device’s specific installation instructions. For certain devices software should be installedfirst; for others, hardware should be installed prior to software installation.

10. After software is loaded, remember to set the software parameters as needed for your application.
The software must recognize all the hardware in the system. Measurement units and ranges
should be checked to verify that they meet your application requirements.
11. Remember to set all channels to the proper mode for your DBK or other signal source.
12. After your system is up and running, verify proper data acquisition and data storage.
13. Verify system accuracy; adjust ranges or calibrate as needed.
14. Device specific information regarding system setup and expansion can be found in the Daq and
LogBook User’s manuals; and in the applicable DBK document modules of this manual.
15. If you are considering system expansion, review the DBK10, DBK41, and DBK60 document modules.
The best option depends on the number of DBK cards in your system. For just a few cards, use thestackable 3-slot DBK10 low-profile expansion enclosure. For more than six cards, use the 10-slot
DBK41. DBK41s can be daisy-chained to one-another to handle a large number of DBKs.
16. In regard to power management, you should review the DBK30A, DBK32A, and DBK33 document
modules. For portable applications, the compact DBK30A rechargeable power supply can provide
power to the DBK10 or DBK41. The DBK30A also includes a 28 V output for powering 4 to 20 mA
transducers. For applications with many DBK cards (initially or in future expansion), the DBK32A or
DBK33 can be installed into any expansion slot. The DBK32A provides ±15 VDC and the DBK33
provides ±15 VDC and +5 VDC.

Daq Systems

967794

DBK Basics, pg. 13

Power Supplies and Power Connectors
Power supplies convert the raw power they receive into a lower DC voltage and/or current for use by
devices with various power demands. Many of the power supplies that are used to power data acquisition
equipment are of the switching-mode type. These devices provide a regulated output whether the power
supply’s input is, for example, 60 Hz, 120 VAC as in the United States or, 50 Hz, 220 VAC as found inEuropean countries. Small power supplies, that do not switch, consist of simple transformer/rectifiers andfiltered capacitors; and operate over a smaller voltage range.
Some manufacturers improve the power output of their units over time, without changing the model
number. For example, one very popular power supply was previously rated at 15 VDC @ 2.7 amps, yetmore recent versions of the same model number are rated 15 VDC @ 3.3 amps. Read the manufacturer’s
information pertaining to your power supplies so you don’t accidentally overload the supply.
DBKs – The following table indicates the type of power supply that is typically used with certain DBKs.
These DBKs can be powered from a

These DBKs can be powered from a

Switching-Mode Type Power Supply

Transformer/Rectifier Type, Unregulated Power Supply

The switching-mode power supply typicallyreceives power from a 100 to 240 VAC source at 50
Hz to
60 Hz and converts it to the 15 VDC required by the
DBK.

The DBKs in this column use up to15 VDC @900 mA. This transformer/rectifier type power
supply receives power from a 110 to 125 VAC
source, at 60 Hz, and converts it to the 15 VDC
required.

DBK

Description

DBK

Description

DBK32A

Auxiliary Power Supply Card

DBK23

Optically Isolated Digital-Input Module

DBK33

Triple-Output Power Supply Card

DBK24

Optically Isolated Digital-Output Module

DBK42

5B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module

DBK43A

Strain Gage Measurement Module

DBK70

Vehicle Network Interface

DBK50

Isolated High-Voltage Input Module

DBK51

Isolated Low-Voltage Input Module

The DIN5 is the system’s basic power connector (see the following figure). The CA-115 is a 6-in. cablewith a plug (male) DIN5 connector on both ends. The CA-115 is used to connect DBK32As [or DBK33s]
in parallel when they are to be powered by the same power supply.
Power Output Connector

Male connector located on the
power supply cable and on bothends of the CA-115 cable.

Power Input Connector

Female connector located on
the device being powered(DaqBook, DBK32A, DBK33).

(see Notes 1 and 2)

DIN5 Power Connectors

pg. 14,

DBK Basics

DIN5 Power Out
On a DBK34 and DBK34A

Note 1:

DIN5 connectors for LogBook, DBK34, and DBK34A have threaded retaining rings.

Note 2:In regard to the above pinout for the DBK34 and DBK34A Power Out DIN5 connector, the 28 V
pin is only active when the device is in the 28 VDC mode; however, the 14 V pin is active
regardless of the mode selected.

967794

Daq Systems

An Introduction to Power-Related DBKs
The power-related DBK options are the DBK30A, DBK32A, DBK33, DBK34, and DBK34A. From thestandpoint of providing reliable power, these DBKs have proven convenient in laboratory, automotive, andfield applications.
Input power for these devices can come from any 10 to 20 VDC source, or from an AC source via an
appropriate AC-to-DC adapter.
A brief synopsis of the DBK power options follows. Refer to the respective document modules for complete
information.

DBK30A module - provides power at 14 and 28 VDC with a rated capacity of 3.4 A-hr @ 14 VDC.
The DBK30A’s 28 V output will power 4 to 20 mA transducers. The module’s rechargeable power supply canpower DBK modules in situations where AC mains are not available.

Note:

Some transducers (e.g., 2-wire 4-20 mA transmitters, bridge-configured sensors, etc) require an
excitation voltage in order to work properly. The DBK30A supplies 14 and 28 VDC. Consult
transducer documentation before applying power.

DBK32A - provides ±15 VDC @ 500 mA.

DBK33 - provides ±15 VDC @ 250 mA and +5 VDC @ 1000 mA.

The DBK32A and DBK33 power cards attach directly to the P1 analog expansion bus where they supply
power to DBK analog expansion cards. The DBK32A and the DBK33 can be powered from an included AC
adapter, an optional DBK30A battery module, or from a +10 to +20 VDC source such as a car battery.
When installed in a DBK10 three-slot expansion chassis, the DBK32A or DBK33 supplies power
to the analog DBK [that is to receive power] via a CA-37-x cable.
If used with the DBK41 ten-slot expansion enclosure, the DBK32A or DBK33 installs into one of the analog
expansion slots on the DBK41’s backplane. A power card in any DBK41slot (other than the leftmost, whenviewed from the rear) will power the other cards that are connected to the DBK41’s backplane.

CAUTION
If using a DBK32A or a DBK33 with a DaqBook/100 Series, DaqBook/200 Series, or a
DaqBoard [ISA type] device, you must entirely remove the shunt jumpers from JP1.
Failure to do so will result in damage to the 8254 timer chip. Refer to the power card
document modules and to the Daq device Hardware sections of the DaqBook/100 Series
and DaqBook/200 Series, and DaqBoard [ISA] user’s manuals for JP1 locations andconfigurations.

DBK34A module – provides 12 or 24 VDC with a 5.0 or 2.5 A-hr capacity (respectively).
The DBK34A is classified as a UPS / Battery module. The module can be used for in-vehicle testingin scenarios where the vehicle’s electrical system does not affect acquisition device power during
starter-current surge, or power-off.

Daq Systems

967794

DBK Basics, pg. 15

Power Requirements
The improper use of power can cause system damage. The following terms are important in regard tounderstanding your system’s power needs.
•

Supply power for signal conditioning type DBKs comes from a primary acquisition device,
such as a DaqBook/2000 Series device or LogBook, or from a power card or module. If
needed, the DBK32A or DBK33 can provide additional power to meet DBK power demands.
The DBK power supplies work off of low-voltage DC that can come from an AC adapter orfrom a DC source, such as a car battery.

•

Demand for power comes from DBK cards and modules [and in some systems, fromtransducers]. You should use the DBK Power Requirement Worktable to calculate yoursystem’s power needs. After completing the table, compare the total power demand to the
supply power.

•

Distribution of power to most DBKs is via the P1 interface. The DBK41 expansion chassis
has a jumper to isolate +5 VDC power from P1. The P1 Pin designations are as follows:
Pin 1: +5 VDC
Pin 2: -15 VDC
Pin 21: +15 VDC
Pin 7: digital groundPin 28: analog groundPin 29: analog ground

Note: Certain DBK modules have their own internal power supplies and require only 10 VDC to 20 VDC.

LogBook
The LogBook [with no DBKs attached] uses approximately 12 Watts of power. If using battery-power, you
can compute operational endurance from your battery’s watt×hr rating and the following calculation tables.

DaqBoard/2000 Series Boards
DaqBoard/2000 Series and cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series Boards use 3.5 watts of power(700 mA @ 5 VDC) from their host computer. Power consumption can be up to 10 W with external
accessories.
Avoid power cycling the host PC. Wait 10 seconds after powering down the host PC before powering itback on. This will allow any residual voltages to decay enabling the DaqBoard/2000 Series or /2000c Seriesboard to start up in a known good state.

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series, DaqBoard [ISA], and Daq PC-Card
If using power from AC mains (through adapter), you need not worry about Daq device power use. If using
battery-power, you can compute operational endurance from the battery’s watt×hr rating and power tables.
Daq PC-Card and DaqBoard use power from their host PC.
DaqBook/100 and DaqBook/200 Series devices use no power from the PC, but do require DC voltage froman AC-to-DC adapter, or another suitable source. Voltage needs are as follows:•+7 to +20 VDC for DaqBook/100, DaqBook/112, and DaqBook/120•+10 to +24 VDC for DaqBook/216•

9 to +18 VDC for DaqBook/200 and DaqBook/260.

Various AC adapter models support power grids of USA, Europe, Japan, and Asia.

pg. 16,

DBK Basics

967794

Daq Systems

DaqBook/2000 Series Devices
If using power from AC mains (through adapter), you need not worry about Daq device power use. If using
battery-power, you can compute operational endurance from the battery’s watt×hr rating and power tables.
DaqBook/2000 Series devices use no power from the PC, but do require DC voltage from an AC-to-DC
adapter with a supply range of +10 VDC to +30 VDC, or another suitable DC source.
Various AC adapter models support power grids of USA, Europe, Japan, and Asia.

Power Requirements Table
DevicePower Required (Watts)

DaqBook/100

510 mA @ 12 VDC = 6.12 W

DaqBook/112

360 mA @ 12 VDC = 4.32 W

DaqBook/120

510 mA @ 12 VDC = 6.12 W

DaqBook/200

620 mA @ 12 VDC = 7.44 W

DaqBook/216

600 mA @ 12 VDC = 7.2 W

DaqBook/260

620 mA @ 12 VDC = 7.44 W

DaqBook/2001, /2005

1000 mA @ 15 VDC = 15.0 W

DaqBook/2020

1000 mA @ 15 VDC = 15.0 W

DaqOEM/2001, /2005

1000 mA @ 15 VDC = 15.0 W

DaqLab1000 mA @ 15 VDC = 15.0 W

DaqScan1000 mA @ 15 VDC = 15.0 W

DaqBoard/100A

1330 mA @ 5 VDC = 6.65 W

DaqBoard/112A

970 mA @ 5 VDC = 4.85 W

DaqBoard/200A

1700 mA @ 5 VDC = 8.5 W

DaqBoard/216A

1340 mA @ 5 VDC = 6.7 W

DaqBoard/2000 Series board

700 mA @ 5 VDC = 3.5 W(Note 1)cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series board

700 mA @ 5 VDC = 3.5 W(Note 1)

DaqBook/2000A

Under No External Load (0W):

DaqBook/2000X

467mA @ 15VDC = 7 W
Under Full External Load (15W):
1533mA @ 15VDC = 23 W

DaqBook/2000E

Under No External Load (0W):
1133mA @ 15VDC = 17 W
Under Full External Load (15W):
2200mA @ 15VDC = 33 W
Normal Operation:

Daq PC-Card/112B
Daq PC-Card/216B

160 mA @ 5 VDC = 0.8W
Power Down Mode:
40 mA @ 5 VDC = 0.2 W

Note 1: For DaqBoard/2000 Series and /2000c Series boards, consumption can be
up to 10 W with external accessories.

Daq Systems

967794

DBK Basics, pg. 17

Calculating Your System’s Power Needs
Use the chart below and the worktable on the next page to ensure your system will have sufficient power.
If the load (calculated in the worktable) exceeds available power (from the chart at the right), you must
add a power card or a module such as a DBK32A or DBK33.
Available Power Chart — Supply to Expansion Devices
Product
Available Power
LogBook+5 VDC @ 0.10 A from P1-1, P2-18, P2-20, P3-20+15 VDC @ 0.15 A from P1-21+15 VDC @ 0.05 A from P3-19-15 VDC @ 0.15 A from P1-2
-15 VDC @ 0.05 A from P3-37

pg. 18,DBK Basics

DaqBook/100

2100 mW

DaqBook/112

2400 mW

DaqBook/120

2100 mW

DaqBook/200

4000 mW

DaqBook/216

4000 mW

DaqBook/260

4000 mW

DaqBook/2000 AEX

15000 mW; 5V at 1 A; ± 15 V at 500 mA each

DaqBook/2001, /2005

10,000 mW

DaqBook/2020

7,000 mW

DaqOEM/2001, /2005

10,000 mW

DaqLab

10,000 mW

DaqScan

10,000 mW

DaqBoard/100A

3300 mW

DaqBoard/112A

3300 mW

DaqBoard/200A

3000 mW

DaqBoard/216A

3000 mW

DaqBoard/260A

3000 mW

DaqBoard/2000 Series& /2000c Series

5000 mW; 5 V at 1 A; ±15 V at 75 mA each (withexception of DaqBoard/2002 and /2002c)

Daq PC-Card/112B

0 mW

Daq PC-Card/216B

0 mW

967794

Daq Systems

Available Power Chart — Supply to Expansion Devices
Product
Available Power
DBK32
7500 mW
DBK32A

15000 mW

DBK33

7500 mW

DBK34

5 A-hr in 12 V mode; fused at 8 A

DBK34A

5 A-hr in 12 V mode; fused at 8 A

Use the following procedure and table to calculate the required system power.
1.

In the Quantity column (5th), list the number of DBKs of that type in your system.

2.

In the Sub Total column (7th), enter the product of column 5 and column 6 (mW).

3.

Add the Sub Total column, and enter the sum at the bottom right of the table.
This result is your power requirement in mW.

DBK32, DBK32A, and DBK34 cannot supply +5 VDC. In cases that require +5 VDC, if
the +5 VDC requirement exceeds 500 mW from a LogBook or Daq device, then a DBK33
must be used. Note that DBK33 can supply 1000 mW at +5 VDC.

Note:

Daq Systems

The DBK34 has an 8 amp fuse, and has a capacity of 5 A-hr when in the 12V mode,
and a capacity of 2.5 A-hr when in the 24V mode.

967794

DBK Basics, pg. 19

DBK Power Requirement Worktable—Demand
Voltage Reference
Calculation

DBK
Options+15 VDC-15 VDC+5 VDC

Quantity

× mW

DBK1

0

0

0

0

DBK2

18 mA

18 mA

5 mA

565

DBK4

95 mA

80 mA

25 mA

2750

DBK5

2 mA

2 mA

15 mA

135

DBK7

14 mA

8 mA

18 mA

420

DBK8

15 mA

15 mA

<1 mA

455

DBK9

21 mA

16 mA

<1 mA

560

DBK10

0

0

0

0

DBK11A

0

0

0

0

DBK12

15 mA

15 mA

<1 mA

455

DBK13

15 mA

15 mA

<1 mA

455

DBK15

16 mA

16 mA

<1 mA

485

DBK16

37 mA

32 mA

<1 mA

1040

DBK17

30 mA

30 mA

<1 mA

905

DBK18

36 mA

36 mA

<1 mA

1085

DBK19

6 mA

7 mA

<1 mA

200

DBK20

0

0

<10 mA

50

DBK21

0

0

<10 mA50

DBK23***

0

0

<2 mA

10

DBK24***

0

0

<2 mA

10

DBK25

0

0

<2 mA

10

DBK40

0

0

0

0

DBK41

0

0

0

0

DBK42

<1 mA

<1 mA

<1 mA

35

DBK43A***

<1 mA

<1 mA

<1 mA

35

DBK44

<1 mA

<1 mA

60 mA (Note 1)

330

DBK45

52 mA

52 mA

<1 mA

1565

DBK46

20 mA

20 mA

400 mA

2600

DBK48

<1 mA

<1 mA

<1 mA

35

DBK50***

<1 mA

<1 mA

<1 mA

35

DBK51***

<1 mA

<1 mA

<1 mA

35

DBK52

6 mA

7 mA

<1 mA

200

DBK53

15 mA

15 mA

<1 mA

455

DBK54

15 mA

15 mA

<1 mA

455

DBK55

30 mA

20 mA

40 mA

950

DBK60

0

0

0

0

= Sub Total

Total Power Requirement in mW
Note 1: DBK44’s 60 mA value is based on 30 mA for each of two 5B modules. This value will be higher if using
5B module 5B38 (200 mA for each 5B38), or if using 5B39 (170 mA for each 5B39). Refer to the DBK44
document module for more information.
Note 2: DBK2 and DBK5 are not used with LogBook.
***

Three asterisks indicate that the DBK is a module with internal power supply; powered separately.

This table is continued.
pg. 20,DBK Basics

967794

Daq Systems

DBK Power Requirement Worktable—Demand
Voltage Reference
Calculation

DBK
Options+15 VDC-15 VDC+5 VDC

Quantity

× mW

DBK65

25 mA

25 mA

1 mA

755

DBK70***

<1 mA

<1 mA

<1 mA

35

DBK80

25 mA

25 mA

<1 mA

755

DBK81

35 mA

35 mA

<2 mA

1060

DBK82

60 mA

60 mA

<2 mA

1810

DBK83

60 mA

60 mA

<2 mA

1810

DBK84

60 mA

60 mA

<2 mA

1810

DBK85

25 mA

25 mA

1 mA

755

DBK90

40 mA

40 mA

40 mA

1400

DBK20000

00

DBK20100

0

0

DBK20200

0

0

DBK20300

0

0

DBK20400

0

0

DBK20500

0

0DBK20600

0

0DBK207

<1 mA

<1 mA

<1 mA

35

DBK207/CJC

<1 mA

<1 mA

<1 mA

35

DBK208

0

0

6 mA

30

DBK20900

00DBK210

0

0

90 mA

450

DBK21300

00DBK214

0

0

10 mA

50

DBK215

0

0

10 mA

50

= Sub Total

Total Power Requirement in mW
Note 2: DBK207, DBK207/CJC, DBK208, and DBK210 are not used with LogBook.
***
Three asterisks indicate that the DBK is a module with internal power supply; powered separately.

Additional Reading
During software installation, Adobe® PDF versions of user manuals will automatically install onto your hard drive
as a part of product support. The default location is in the Programs group, which can be accessed from theWindows Desktop. Refer to the PDF documentation for details regarding both hardware and software.
A copy of the Adobe Acrobat Reader® is included on your CD. The Reader provides a means of reading andprinting the PDF documents. Note that hardcopy versions of the manuals can be ordered from the factory.

Daq Systems

967794

DBK Basics, pg. 21

pg. 22,

DBK Basics

967794

Daq Systems

Signal Management

1

Signal Modes ...... 1-1

System Noise ...... 1-5

Using DBK Cards and Modules for Signal Conditioning ...... 1-6
Channel Control and Expansion ...... 1-7
Signal Acquisition ...... 1-9
Sequencer ...... 1-9
Scan Rate ...... 1-10
Triggering ...... 1-10
Counter/Timer Functions ...... 1-11
Simultaneous Sample and Hold (SSH) ...... 1-11

Two-Point Calibration of a Temperature Measurement System ...... 1-12
Overview ...... 1-12
An Example of Two-Point Calibration ...... 1-13
Calculation of Scale and Offset ...... 1-14
Implementing the Scale and Offset Constants in DaqView ...... 1-14
Converting Degrees from Celsius to Fahrenheit ...... 1-14
One Known Temperature Environment ...... 1-15
Use of a Temperature Calibrator ...... 1-15

CE Compliance ...... 1-15

CE Standards and Directives ...... 1-16
Safety Conditions ...... 1-16
Emissions/Immunity Conditions ...... 1-17
CE Enhancements for Existing Products ...... 1-17Signal Modes
Input signals come in one of two modes, single-ended or differential. Expansion modules, LogBook, andDaq device default setting use the single-ended mode. Some DBKs use differential inputs for certain kindsof transducers; but DBK output is always single-ended. The following text briefly describes the two signal
modes.
Note: For DaqBook/100, /112, /120, jumper settings determine the signal mode. Single-ended is thefactory-set default. For DaqBoard and Daq PC-Card, choosing between differential and singleended inputs is made by software command.
Single-ended mode refers to a mode, or circuit set-up, in which a voltage is measured between 1 signal line
and common ground voltage (Vcm). The measured voltage may be shared with other channels. The
advantage of a single-ended non-differential mode [over differential mode] is that it provides for a higher
channel count (16 vs 8 channels).
Differential-mode refers to a mode, or circuit set-up, in which a voltage is measured between 2 signallines. The resulting measured differential voltage is used for a single channel. Differential inputs reducesignal errors and the induction of noise from ground current. The following illustration is an example of
how noise is reduced, or canceled-out, when using the differential mode.
In the schematic, voltage signal S2 is subtracted from signal S1, resulting in the output signal shown. Noise
spikes with the same polarity, phase, and magnitude in each input signal cancel out—resulting in a cleandifferential signal (S1 - S2).
In the schematic, signals S1 and S2 are shown in-phase;
however, even if these signals were out of phase, the noise ineach (indicated by jagged lines) would still have the same
magnitude, phase, and polarity. For that reason, they would
still cancel out.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

886995Signal Management

1-1Input Isolation
Three benefits of input isolation are circuit protection, noise reduction, and the rejection of high common
mode voltage.
• Circuit protection. Input isolation separates the signal source from circuits that may be damaged by
the signal. (Voltages higher than about 10 V can distort data or damage chips used in dataacquisition.) High-voltage signals or signals with high-voltage spikes should therefore be isolated.
The protection can also work the other way—to safeguard a sensitive signal conditioner from afailing device elsewhere in the system.
• Noise reduction. Isolation eliminates ground loops for high-gain systems and multi-unit systems thatare grounded together. The chassis for each device can rest at a ground potential slightly different
from the other devices. These irrelevant currents and the spikes they may have picked up by
induction can thus be kept out of the measurement circuit.
• Rejection of high common-mode voltage. There is a limit to the voltage applied to a differential
amplifier between ground and the amplifier inputs. Fortunately, the differential amplifier rejects highcommon-mode voltage signals. High common-mode voltage and noise spikes are rejected (canceledout) in in-phase signals (same amplitude and frequency) that are present in both the high and low
inputs at the same time.
References for Differential Modes
There are three basic types of measurement configuration related to differential mode; these are groundreferenced, shunt-referenced, and floating.
Differential Mode, Ground-Referenced
In ground-referenced configurations, the signal voltage isreferenced to a local common ground. In most cases, the local
ground will be at a different voltage potential from the PC’s
ground.
Differential inputs provide attenuation of the common-mode
noise. When in this mode, the amplifier sees the voltage
differential between the high and low inputs (see figure).
Common-mode noise reduction occurs because noise in thehigh input signal is typically the same as the noise in the low
input signal. Because of this phenomena, the voltage
difference between the 2 signals remains essentially unaffectedby noise spikes, since these spikes appear at the same instantand at the same magnitude in both the high and low input
signals. In other words, the noise spikes cancel each other out.
As noted earlier, even if these signals were out-of-phase, thenoise would still cancel out since the spikes in both signals
would be of the same magnitude and polarity.
Note: In the simple example (shown in the figure), thedifferential between the high and low signals would result in a straight line because the signals areequal in frequency, phase, and magnitude.
Differential Mode, Shunt-Referenced
There are situations in which small voltages need to be measured and the currents flowing in the power
supply common will cause measurement errors. As shown in the figure, using the analog common as thereference point will result in errors. These errors are the result of variations in current flow along thecommon line [(I3 * Z3) + (I3 & I2) * Z2].

1-2Signal Management

886995DBK Option Cards and Modules

Differential Circuit with Shunt-reference
A way around this problem is to use a differential measurement for each shunt, with the instrument
common connected to the supply common. Each input channel will measure the shunt voltage and will
reject any voltage in the common wire (common-mode rejection).
Differential Mode, Floating (Isolated from Ground)
Floating-differential measurements are made when low-level signals must
be measured in the presence of high levels of common-mode noise (e.g., a
non-grounded thermocouple). When the signal source has no directconnection to the system analog common, one must be provided. This canbe done by connecting a resistor between one of the two signal lines;
usually the lower in potential and common. A resistor of 10 to 100 kΩ issatisfactory (less noise with the lower values).

(+)
(-)

T/C

CH0H
CH0L

10 kΩ
Analog
Com.
MUX
BOARD
DBK12/13/15

Floating Differential Circuit

CAUTION
Do not use differential signal hookups with the intent of achieving isolation or circuit
protection. Differential signal hookups do not provide isolation, or any other kind of
circuit protection.
Connecting Differential Amplifiers
Wire connections must be solid. Loose wires will add noise to the circuit. Low grade unshielded cables
will act as antennas, inducing more noise into the system. For this reason, all applications using a
differential amplifier require the use of quality signal cables and connectors. The signal cable used should
be constructed with:
Insulated Outer Jacket
Foil Shield• Insulated outer jacket
Drain Wire
• Twisted signal pairs
Twisted Signal Pair
• Foil shield• Drain wire (copper stranded)
The twisted signal pairs should make use of
low impedance, stranded copper conductors;
and the foil shield should be of the type using
multiple folds.

Stranded Copper
Conductors

Twisted Signal Pair

Shielded Signal Cable

The copper-stranded drain wire should be considered as part of the shield, and should be connected as
described later in this section. Proper use of a quality signal cable will result in a dramatic reduction ofnoise.
The signal circuit must be connected with only one ground from the shield, as indicated in the left side of
the figure below. A mistake, which is often made, is having two grounds (one at each end of the signal
shield). Having two grounds, as shown in the right side of the figure, creates a “ground loop.” The groundloop provides a path for current to circulate, causing the induction of noise that can affect the signal.
DBK Option Cards and Modules

886995Signal Management

1-3

WRONG

CORRECT

High Input Signal

High Input Signal

Differential
Amplifier

ShieldGrounding Wire

ShieldGrounding Wire

Low Input Signal

Differential
AmplifierLow Input Signal

Ground loop caused bycurrent flow.

Potential difference and no pathfor current flow.

No Noise-Inducing Ground Loop

Noise-Inducing Ground Loop

Aside from eliminating noise-inducing ground loops, the use of bias resistors should also be consideredwith isolated signal sources. Bias resistors can be used to provide bias current for the positive and negative(high and low) input signals to the differential amplifier. The impedance value of the bias resistors
depends on the output impedance of the signal source.
High Input Signal

Low Input Signal

Differential
Amplifier

ShieldR1

R2

Grounding Wire
Locate bias resistors (R1 and R2) as close
as possible to the differential amplifier.

A basic rule of thumb is: The value of the bias resistor should be at least 10 times the output impedance ofthe signal source, but less than 1 MΩ.. Bias resistors should be located as close as possible to thedifferential amplifier. Ground only one end of the signal shield.
Unipolar and Bipolar Measurement
Unipolar signals are always zero or positive. Bipolar signals can be negative or positive and typicallyrange from -5 to +5 V (-10 to +10 V for the /2000 Series Devices). Using one or the other depends on thesignal from the transducer and its signal conditioning. If the DBK (or other signal conditioner) outputs abipolar signal, then the LogBook or Daq device should be set to bipolar. If the LogBook or Daq device
sequencer is using the wrong mode for a channel, that channel’s reading may be clipped or in error.
Reading a bipolar signal in unipolar mode misses half the signal, and the half received is not convertedwith optimal resolution.
Note: The different DBKs can use either or both signal modes. Refer to the DBK documentation, andverify that the DBK and the LogBook or Daq device are set to the proper mode for each channel.
12-Bit vs 16-Bit Resolution
An analog-to-digital converter (ADC) converts an analog voltage to a digital number. The digital number
represents the input voltage in discrete steps with finite resolution. The number of bits that represent thedigital number determines ADC resolution. An n-bit ADC has a resolution of 1 part in 2n.
• 12-bit resolution is 1 part in 4096 (in binary powers, 212) and corresponds to 2.44 mV for a 10 V
range.
• 16-bit resolution is 1 part in 65,536 (in binary powers, 216) and corresponds to 0.153 mV in a 10 V
range.
1-4

Signal Management

886995DBK Option Cards and Modules

System Noise
Electrical noise can present problems even with good equipment; thus, controlling noise is imperative.
Some techniques avoid or prevent noise sources from entering the system; other techniques remove noisefrom the signal.
Laboratory and industrial environments often have multiple sources of electrical noise. An AC power line
is a source of 50/60 Hz noise. Heavy equipment (air conditioners, elevators, pumps, etc.) can be a sourceof noise, particularly when turned on and off. Local radio stations are a source of high-frequency noise,and computers and other electronic equipment can create noise in a multitude of frequency ranges. Thus,an absolute noise-free environment for data acquisition is not realistic. Fortunately, noise-reduction
techniques such as averaging, filtering, differential voltage measurement, and shielding are available toreduce noise to an acceptable level.
Note: Additional noise-reduction information is contained in the section, “Signal Modes,” especially in theparagraphs pertaining to connections, signal cables, and ground loops.
Averaging
Averaging is done in software after several samples have been collected. Depending on the nature of thenoise, averaging can reduce noise by the square root of the number of averaged samples. Although
averaging can be effective, it suffers from several drawbacks. Noise in measurements only decreases as
the square root of the number of measurements—reducing RMS noise significantly may require many
samples. Thus, averaging is suited to low-speed applications that can provide many samples.
Note: Only random noise is reduced or eliminated by averaging. Averaging will not reduce or eliminate
any signal that is periodic.
Analog Filtering
A filter is an analog circuit element that attenuates an incoming signal according to its frequency. A lowpass filter attenuates frequencies above the cutoff frequency. Conversely, a high-pass filter attenuatesfrequencies below the cutoff. As frequency increases beyond the cutoff point, the attenuation of a singlepole, low-pass filter increases slowly. Multi-pole filters provide greater attenuation beyond the cutoff
frequency but may introduce phase (time delay) problems that could affect some applications.
Filter circuits can be active or passive:•

Active. The DBK18 Low-Pass Filter Card has an instrumentation amplifier with variable gain andfilter configurations. The DBK18 uses an active 3-pole filter (mostly contained within the UAFF42
ICs) that can be configured as a Butterworth, Bessel, or Chebyshev filter with corner frequencies up
to 50 kHz. Filter properties depend on the values of resistors and capacitors. These components
can be changed by the user.

•

Passive. The DBK11 has a prototype area on the PC board for attaching non-powered components
such as resistors and capacitors. The user chooses component values to produce the desired
properties.

Input and Source Impedance
As shown in the following figure, The input impedance (Ri) combines with the transducer’s source
impedance (Rs) forming a voltage divider. This divider distorts the voltage being read at the analog-todigital converter. The actual voltage read is represented by the equation:
Vread = VT × [Ri / (Ri + Rs)] [ Vt - IbRs)
The low source impedance (Rs) of most signals usuallypresents no problem. Some transducers, such as
piezoelectric types, have high source impedance. Thesetransducer types should be used with a charge-sensitive
amplifier of low output impedance.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

886995Signal Management

1-5Crosstalk
Crosstalk is a type of noise related to source impedance and capacitance, in which signals from one
channel leak into an adjacent channel, resulting in interference or signal distortion. The impact of source
impedance and stray capacitance can be estimated by using the following equation.
T = RC
Where T is the time constant, R is the source impedance, and C is the stray capacitance.
High source (transducer) impedance can be a problem in multiplexed A/D systems like the DBK12,
DBK13, DBK15. When using more than 1 channel, the channel input signals are multiplexed into thecircuit card. The multiplexer samples each signal for only 10 µs and then switches to the next input signal.
A high-impedance input interacts with the multiplexer’s stray capacitance and causes crosstalk andinaccuracies in the A/D sample. In such cases, the source impedance should be less than 1 kΩ. If thesource impedance exceeds this value, sampling problems can be expected.
A solution to high source impedance in relation to multiplexers involves the use of buffers. The term
buffer has several meanings; but in this case, buffer refers to an operational amplifier having high input
impedance but very low output impedance. In the example illustrated, a buffer has reduced the source
impedance from 10 kΩ to effectively 0 kΩ. Placing such a buffer on each channel (between the transducer
and the multiplexer) prevents the multiplexer’s stray capacitance from combining with the high input
impedance (10 kΩ in the example). This use of a buffer also stops transient signals from propagating
backwards from the multiplexer to the transducer.

Using DBK Cards and Modules for Signal Conditioning
The DBK signal-conditioning units are designed for use with Daq devices and LogBooks. Although the
DBK options can be used with ISA or PCI bus-based data acquisition boards from other vendors; they
perform best when used with an acquisition device that can dynamically select channel, gain, and range.
Dynamic channel and gain/range make it possible to have high channel-to-channel scan rates with a varietyof transducers.
DBK output signals can be bipolar, e.g., -5 to +5 V, or unipolar, e.g., 0 to 10 V. The user can select a
range of relevant values to correspond to the lowest signal (e.g., -5 or 0 V) and the highest signal (e.g., 5 or
10 V) signal. This type of range selection guarantees the highest resolution in 12-bit or 16-bit conversion.
DBK modules share the same footprint as the DaqBooks and LogBooks. This dimensional aspect provides
for convenient stacking of modules with each other and with most notebook PCs. Note that most DBK
modules have their own power supply.

1-6

Signal Management

886995DBK Option Cards and Modules

Channel Control and Expansion
In a Daq device or LogBook system, DBK expansion cards and modules can increase the number of analog
input channels from 16 base channels to 256 input channels (16 × 16). The configuration will varydepending on the DBK’s channel capacity; for example, four 4-channel DBKs or two 8-channel DBKs canshare the same base channel. As part of the multiplexing scheme, each DBK card provides a single output
that must be directed to one of the 16 base channels via the DBK’s JP1 jumper setting.
P1

DBK card or module

16
expansion MUXchannels

4

Daq device System
or LogBook System16base MUX
channels

PGA
2

P1

JP1
channelselectjumper2 bits select 1 of 4 gains
4 bits select 1 of 16 inputs

ADC

PGA

4 bits select1 of 16 4
inputs2
2 bits select1 of 4 gains

Sequencer

100 kHz
Clock

Channel Control and Expansion Block Diagram
The above figure shows the functional parts related to channel control and expansion. An explanation of
the diagram follows.
• The sequencer selects the channel and gain by controlling multiplexers (MUX) andprogrammable gain amplifiers (PGA) in either the LogBook or the Daq device and the DBK.
The sequencer uses 4 expansion address lines to provide 16 unique channel addresses for eachbase channel. A 100 kHz clock and user programming of the scan sequence control thesequencer.
Note: /2000 Series Devices allow for selection of 100 kHz, or 200 kHz internal clock speed via software.
• The DBK multiplexer selects 1 of 16 (max) channels as directed by the sequencer. The selectedsignal travels to the PGA, to the channel-selection jumper, then to the Daq device, or LogBook
via P1.
• The Daq device or LogBook multiplexer selects 1 of 16 base channels from P1 input lines as
directed by the sequencer. The selected signal goes to the PGA and then to the A/D converter(A/D).
• The PGAs can vary the gain on a per channel basis as directed by the sequencer. For DBKs
with a PGA, the sequencer can combine the gains of the DBK PGA and the LogBook or Daq
device PGA for a variety of gain settings.
• The P1 interface has a signal line for each of the 16 base channels and control lines for gain
setting (pins 5, 6) and sub-channel selection (pins 3, 4, 22, 23).
• The JP1 channel select jumper in the DBK can be placed on pins for channel 0 throughchannel 15. Until the base channel capacity is filled (16 max), multiple cards can use the sameJP1 channel setting if their DIP switches are set to identify unique sub-channel card numbers.
Note: The channel select header on DBK17 and DBK18 is labeled J1 instead of JP1.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

886995Signal Management

1-7

The following table details how expansion channels are numbered in DaqView and LogView. API
Channels are used in Daq devices by third party programs. Note that API Channels are not used in
LogBook systems.

Channel Numbering
DaqView or LogView
1
Channel0 to 15Signal Source2
Local channels 0 to15

API
Channel0 to 15

0-0 to 0-15

0 to 15 of A/D exp. card 0

16 to 31

1-0 to 1-15

0 to 15 of A/D exp. card 1

32 to 47

2-0 to 2-15

0 to 15 of A/D exp. card 2

48 to 63

3-0 to 3-15

0 to 15 of A/D exp. card 3

64 to 79

4-0 to 4-15

0 to 15 of A/D exp. card 4

80 to 95

5-0 to 5-15

0 to 15 of A/D exp. card 5

96 to 111

6-0 to 6-15

0 to 15 of A/D exp. card 6

112 to 127

7-0 to 7-15

0 to 15 of A/D exp. card 7

128 to 143

8-0 to 8-15

0 to 15 of A/D exp. card 8

144 to 159

9-0 to 9-15

0 to 15 of A/D exp. card 9

160 to 175

10-0 to 10-15

0 to 15 of A/D exp. card 10

176 to 191

11-0 to 11-15

0 to 15 of A/D exp. card 11

192 to 207

12-0 to 12-15

0 to 15 of A/D exp. card 12

208 to 223

13-0 to 13-15

0 to 15 of A/D exp. card 13

224 to 239

14-0 to 14-15

0 to 15 of A/D exp. card 14

240 to 255

15-0 to 15-15

0 to 15 of A/D exp. card 15

256 to 271

High-speed digital I/O(DaqBook/100/200 and
DaqBoard/100A/200A)

272

1

Note: DaqView identifies channels for some DBKs (e.g., DBK4) with a 3-partnumber for local channel, card, and sub-address.

2

Note: In differential mode, only channels 0 to 7 are valid.

In addition to the base channel selection on JP1, many DBKs must be set to the sub-channel (or card)
number by a DIP-switch labeled SW1 or S1. Since DBKs vary in their channel capacity and identification,refer to the respective DBK document modules.
Example. Refer to the above table (the 1-0 to 1-15 row) and to the following figure. To select channel 15
on a DBK card that is connected to base channel 1:a) set the sequencer expansion address to 1111b) set the base address to 0001
c) set JP1 to channel 1d) Depending on the DBK, set the DIP-switch to identify one of
the multiple cards on a single channel.
The corresponding API channel number would be 47; i.e., DaqView Channel 1-15 (see table).
Note that API Channels are not used in LogBook systems.

1-8

Signal Management

886995DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK card or module
CH1

P1

Daq device System
or LogBook System

P1
CH1

MUX

MUX

PGA

2

2

CH15
4
1111

ADC

PGA

4
0001

JP1 channel
select jumper

Sequencer

100 kHz
Clock

Base Address set to 0001
Expansion Address set to 1111

Example Channel Selection

Signal Acquisition
Sequencer
The hardware sequencer performs several functions:••••

Allows each channel to have an independent gain.
Ensures that channels are scanned at exactly 10 µs intervals.
Allows channels to be accessed randomly in the scan rather than “start channel to end channel”.
Provides high-speed access to expansion modules.
External
Multiplexer
ControlGain adjusted analog
input from P1

Analogtrigger-in
comparator

Trigger
selectTrigger
input
Computer output signal
through digital-to-analog
converters

1
2

100 kHzclock

Programmable
Gain Amplifier
×1, ×2, ×4, ×8

Ch
0
1
2
...
15

Main
2
Ga1 Set.
×1 uni×2 uni×8 bi... ...
×4 bi

16 High-Speed
Digital Inputs

4 signals to be used as:
general purpose inputs
or
1 Aux. Counter Gate
1 TTL Trigger Input
2 Gain Select Outputs(for expansion boards)

512-Step Random Access
Channel/Gain Sequencer

Analog input
from P1

Gain Adjust
Polarity setting: bipolar or unipolar

8 DE/16 SE
Analog Input
Multiplexer

Expanded
Ch Ga1 Set.2
16 ×60 bi
17 ×20 bi... ... ...
271 ×40 uni
272 n/a n/aSequencer Reset

Signal fromPC (ISA)Bus interface

Programmablesequencer timebase,
10 µs to 10 hours
Analog input
from P1

The LogBook or Daq device holds the scan information in its internal sequencer. On every timebase“tick”, the sequencer steps through all the programmed channels and sets the gain for each channel (alsothe unipolar/bipolar setting for the /2000 Series Devices). Thus, each sample in a scan is read optimally.
In addition to controlling the LogBook or the Daq device, the sequencer controls the programmablefeatures on expansion cards via the P1 connector.
This architecture ensures that the same 10 µs sampling (5 µs or 10 µs for /2000 Series Devices) exists forexternal channels as well as internal channels.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

886995Signal Management

1-9Scan GroupAll channels within scan group aremeasured at 10 µs/channel.

Time
Scan Period(Immediate to
10 hours)

10 µs

Channel

#2

#4

#7

#2

Gain

x1

x8

x8

x2

Digital
Input

Time
#18

#19

#16

x100

x10

x1000

Scan Rate
Most sampling of analog signals occurs on the timebase of the LogBook or the Daq device clock. The
scan period is the time duration between successive scans. Inversely, the scan rate, or scan frequency isthe number of scans per time interval, usually expressed in scans per second. The channels within the scan
are always sampled at a fixed period of 10 µs (100 kHz rate), or 5 µs (200 kHz rate); or 10 µs for the /2000
Series Devices. Generally, the sampling frequency must be greater than twice the highest signal frequency
of interest to prevent aliasing error.
Note 1: With /2000 Series Devices, either 100 kHz or 200 kHz can be selected to be used as the internal
clock speed. To ensure signal accuracy the 100 kHz speed must be selected when using a
DBK12, DBK13, DBK15, DBK19, DBK53 or DBK54 in conjunction with DaqBoard/2000
Series, or cPCI DaqBoard2000c Series boards.
Note 2: Except in the case of a single-channel scan, the sampling rate per channel can be much slower
than the scan rate.

Triggering
Triggering controls an acquisition cycle. Once the system is armed, a trigger is required to collect the data.
Typically, three data collection parameters are specified: the pre-trigger count, the post-trigger scan count,and the trigger source. The user must determine the triggering requirement based on the nature of themeasurement and the amount of data needed to satisfy the system’s purpose.
Type of Trigger Source
Immediate
Key Hit
External TTL
Channel Value - Rising- Falling
Trigger Event

Pre-Trigger Scan Count
10 µs
70 µs

•

1-10

Post-Trigger Scan CountTime

Scan Period(10 µs to 10 hours)

The pre-trigger scan count specifies the number of scans that are to be collected before the trigger
point. If the pre-trigger scan count is greater than zero, the system will continuously collect data
until the trigger is satisfied. If no pre-trigger scans are required, the system sits idle until the trigger;then, it collects the post-trigger scans before it disarms.

Signal Management

886995DBK Option Cards and Modules

••The post-trigger scan count specifies the number of scans to be collected after the trigger point.
After the trigger, the post-trigger scans will be collected as programmed and then the system will
disarm itself.
The trigger source can be a software command, an external TTL input, etc. An analog input
channel on reaching a specified voltage level can be used to trigger the system. (In this mode, ananalog output channel is used to internally set the analog threshold—making it unavailable for otheruse.)Counter/Timer Functions
Counter/timer circuits are used for counting digital events, timing digital pulses, and generating squarewaves and pulses. Counter/timer functions are available from the P3 interface.

Pin
15
16
17
18
35
36

Counter/Timer Pins on P3
Signal Name
Description
TMR 0 OUT
Timer 0 output
TMR 1 OUT
Timer 1 output
CTR 2 IN
Counter 2 input
CTR 0 IN
Counter 0 input
CTR 3 IN
Counter 3 input
CTR 1 IN
Counter 1 input

The table shows the P3 pinout for the 4 counter and 2 timer channels.
• IN - a digital input that increments the counter and provides a timebase for counter operation.
• OUT - an output of digital square waves and pulses.
The counter channels can act as 4 independent 16-bit up-counters.
The timer channels are driven by an internal timebase of 1 MHz which can be divided by
1 to 65535 to obtain output frequencies from 15 Hz to 1 MHz.

Simultaneous Sample and Hold (SSH)
Some applications require every channel in a scan group to be read at the same instant, as opposed tobeing read with 10 µs between channels. Acquiring multiple readings at the same instant is accomplishedwith Simultaneous Sample and Hold (SSH).

An example of an SSH application is as follows. In the example, a performance analysis of an engine
needs to indicate cylinder pressure and temperature, piston strain and position, valve position, and engine
rpm and vibration—all at the same instant. Simultaneous Sample and Hold (SSH) is a means of obtaining
such instantaneous data on multiple channels while avoiding time-skew problems.
DBK Option Cards and Modules

886995Signal Management

1-11

The previous figure can be used to understand how SSH is used in the DBK17 SSH Card. The process is
as follows:•

Input signals pass through an instrumentation amplifier and into a sample-and-hold stage.

•

When the sample enable line goes high, each channel’s sample-and-hold stage will “freeze”
the current analog value. The values for all channels are separately “latched” within 50 ns ofeach other.

•

The signals are held in a stable condition, while the multiplexer switches through allchannels.

•

The multiplexer sends the signals [one-by-one] to be digitized by the analog-digital converter(ADC) in the primary data acquisition device.

•

The resulting data is a snapshot of conditions at an instant, but the multiplexing and analogto-digital conversion are spread over a longer time interval.

•

The simultaneous sample and hold circuit allows you to gather up to 256 simultaneous
samples using sixty-four DBK17s.

Two-Point Calibration of a Temperature Measurement System
Note: In the following text a temperature measurement system consisting of a DaqBook, a DBK19
thermocouple card, and DaqView is referred to. However, it is important to note that the two-pointcalibration method can be applied to measurement systems that consist of other acquisition devices
and software.

Overview

The graph shows an example for a temperature
measuring system, with temperature expressed indegrees Celsius.
The sensor output is on the horizontal axis and system
response is on the vertical.
The graph illustrates the following bulleted points:

100
90
Measurement System Output (°C)

Two-point calibration makes use of correction constants
to eliminate offset and gain errors in a temperature
measurement system.

80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

Temperature Sensor Output (°C)

• The system has a linear response. Most thermocouple measurement devices have a software
driver, which corrects for the nonlinear output voltage of each thermocouple type. Normally,
there is no provision for linearity adjustment by the user.
• The system has an offset at 0°C, which can be eliminated by introducing an offset correction. Thisis the first point of a two-point correction.
• The system has a gain error at 100°C, which can be eliminated by introducing a gain (slope)correction. This is the second point of a two-point correction.
Suppose you have a temperature measurement system consisting of a DaqBook, a DBK19 thermocouple
card, and DaqView data acquisition software. The DBK19 was shipped with a diskette of calibration
constants. These calibration constants are specific to the DBK19.
1-12Signal Management

886995DBK Option Cards and Modules

Download instructions for loading the constants into DaqView were included with the DBK19. The
constants will improve the accuracy of each DBK19 channel when amplifying the thermocouple's millivolt
output, which is read by the DaqBook.
The temperature measurement system, as well as the thermocouple itself, can still have the following typesof errors:•••

Thermocouple error (departure from performance of an ideal T/C of that type)CJC sensor error (±1°C maximum for the DBK19)
The DaqBook may have small calibration errors

In some applications, it is possible to ignore these sources of errors and still obtain useful results from thetemperature measurement system. However, the only way to optimize the performance of the system is toperform an end-to-end calibration. This is done by applying two different temperatures to the thermocouple
connection: one temperature is close to 0°C and the other is at approximately full scale.
Then observe the two corresponding temperature readings in DaqView, and use this information to derive
the values of “m” and “b” in the line slope equation “mx + b.” In this equation, the value of “m” is usuallycalled the scale, and the value of “b” is usually called the offset. When both the offset and gain correction
values are applied, the system errors are reduced to their lowest level.

An Example of Two-Point Calibration
For illustration, suppose the temperature measurement system consists of a DaqBook/100, DBK19
thermocouple card, and DaqView software. (The following calibration procedure also applies totemperature measurement systems made up of similar products, but the discussion is simplified with a
specific example.) After setting up the DBK19 card in DaqView as described previously, consider one of
the channels on the DBK19, for example, channel 2. Suppose a type T thermocouple connected to thischannel. In DaqView, select a sampling frequency of 1 Hz and an averaging factor of 200 so that thereadings you get are steady and not fluctuating rapidly.
When you look at this channel in DaqView, the default units are in degrees Celsius. With the acquisition“off”, click on the cell in DaqView in the Units column for channel 2. You will see an engineering units
pull-down menu in a dialog box above the spreadsheet area. Click on the down arrow in this dialog box,
and then select the “mx + b” option. You will note that the default values of scale and offset are m=1 and
b=0 for engineering units of degrees C. These values need to be changed to ones that will give moreaccurate temperature readings.
To do this, first place the thermocouple for channel 2 in an environment with a known temperature, forexample an ice bath. Click on the Start All Indicators button in DaqView, and observe the Readings
column for channel 2. Wait until the reading stabilizes, then write down the number in degrees C. Call thisreading the “first actual reading” or RA1, and suppose it is:RA1 = 2.1°C
Since this reading was supposed to be 0°C, call the first correct reading RC1:
RC1 = 0°C
Place the thermocouple for channel 2 in a second known environment. This might be a thermocouple block
calibrator or a fluidized sand bath. In this example, assume that the calibrator has been set to100°C.
Observe the reading in DaqView for channel 2, wait until it stabilizes, then write down this number indegrees Celsius. Call this reading the “second actual reading” or RA2, and suppose it is:RA2 = 104°C
Since the correct second reading was supposed to be 100°C, write down the correct value as:
RC2 = 100°C
Stop the monitoring process in DaqView by clicking on the Stop All Indicators button.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

886995Signal Management

1-13

Calculation of Scale and Offset
Using the above information, calculate the values of scale (m) and offset (b) that will compensate for themeasurement errors (RA1 and RA2). This is possible because the correct and actual readings are related bythe (mx + b) equations:
RC1 = m(RA1) + b
andRC2 = m(RA2) + b
Substituting in the values noted in the above calibration process:
RC1 = m(RA1) + b
0 = m(2.1) + b
RC2 = m(RA2) + b
100 = m(104) + b
Solving for “m” results in:
100 = m(104 -2.1)
m = 100/(104-2.1) = 0.9814.
Substituting this value of “m” to solve for the value of “b”:
0 = 0.9814 (2.1) + b
b = -2.0608.

Implementing the Scale and Offset Constants in DaqView
To implement the scale and offset constants in DaqView, first make sure that the acquisition process isturned off. Then, click on the cell in the Units column for channel 2. The engineering units pull-downmenu above the grid becomes active; click on the down arrow and select the “mx + b” option.
After doing that you have the ability to enter new numbers for m and b. Perform those entries and click on
OK to save them. You can then place the thermocouple back in the ice and fluidized sand baths, observe
the new readings, and note the improvement in their accuracy.
If you want optimum accuracy of all channels in the temperature measurement system, you should performthe two-point calibration process for each channel.

Converting Degrees from Celsius to Fahrenheit
Once you have performed the two-point calibration process and determined the scale and offset values forunits of degrees Celsius, you can use this information to find the corresponding scale and offset values forother temperature units. In the previous example, the calibration process produced the following equation
for “mx + b”, using units of degrees Celsius:
RC (°C) = 0.9814 * RA (°C) - 2.0608
To convert to degrees Fahrenheit, use the relationship:
RC (°F) = 1.8 * RC (°C) + 32
Substituting the latter equation into the former yields:
RC (°F) = 1.8 * [0.9814 * RA (°C) - 2.0608] + 32
RC (°F) = 1.7665 * RA (°C) + 28.29
So the new values of m and b are:m' = 1.7665
b' = 28.29
These are the scale and offset values that you should enter. Note that RA is still in degrees Celsius since theraw reading produced by the data acquisition software is in degrees Celsius.
1-14

Signal Management

886995DBK Option Cards and Modules

One Known Temperature Environment
Suppose that you only have one known temperature environment, such as an ice bath. In this case only one
parameter in the “mx + b” equation can be determined for system calibration. This is called single-pointcalibration. Since this is normally the largest source of error, single-point calibration is used to correct theoffset.
Using the same information as in the first example, and supposing that the only actual reading available iscalled RA:
RA = 2.1°C
Since this reading was supposed to be 0°C, call the correct reading RC:
RC = 0°C
Substituting these values into the mx + b equation results in:
RC = 0 = m (2.1) + b
In a single-point calibration, it is assumed that the value of the scale parameter is completely accurate; thatis, m = 1. Using this information in the above equation results in:
0 = 1(2.1) + b,
b = -2.1
These are the scale (m = 1) and offset (b = -2.1) values that should be entered into DaqView.

Use of a Temperature Calibrator
Occasionally, it is impractical or difficult to get physical temperature references for system calibration. The
temperature region of interest may be far removed from the example temperatures of 0°C and 100°C.
Accurate temperature baths may not be available.
In these cases, you should use a temperature simulation instrument that lets you dial in your thermocouple
type. The simulator should also let you set the two calibration temperatures that are correct for yourapplication. The calibrator then generates milli-volt signals into the DBK19 card (or other temperature
measurement product). These signals correspond to those that would be generated, by the chosen
thermocouple types, at the selected temperatures. A disadvantage of this approach is that thermocouple
errors are not corrected or compensated.
For many applications, where the thermocouple is used at lower temperatures, a single-point calibration is
sufficient. In general, thermocouples have little error at 0°C. The thermocouple error tends to increaselinearly as the temperature increases.

CE Compliance
The European Union (EU) first developed CE standards in 1985. The standards include specifications forsafety and for EMI emissions and immunity. Now, all relevant products sold in Europe must meet thesestandards.
Although CE compliance is not required in the United States, the standards are often adopted by U.S.
companies since they improve product safety, reduce noise, and minimize ESD problems.
In contracted and in-house testing, most LogBook and Daq device products met the required specifications.
Others were redesigned to meet compliance. In some cases, alternate product versions, shield plates, edge
guards, special connectors, and add-on kits were developed. The section entitled CE Enhancements for
Existing Products, which is located at the end of this chapter, includes examples.
CE-compliant products bear the “CE” mark and include a Declaration of Conformity
stating the particular specifications and conditions that apply. Test Records andsupporting documentation that validate compliance are kept on file at the factory.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

886995Signal Management

1-15

CE Standards and Directives
The electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) directives specify two basic requirements:• The device must not interfere with radio or telecommunications.
• The device must be immune from electromagnetic interference from RF transmitters etc.
The standards are published in the Official Journal of European Union under direction of CENELEC(European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization). The specific standards relevant to LogBook
and Daq device equipment are listed on the product’s Declaration of Conformity.
The safety standard that applies to LogBook and Daq device products is EN 61010-1 : 1993 (Safety
Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use, Part 1: General
Requirements). Environmental conditions include the following:• indoor use• altitude up to 2000 m• temperature 5°C to 40°C (41°F to 104°F)• maximum relative humidity 80% for temperatures up to 31°C (87.8°F) decreasing linearly
to 50% relative humidity at 40°C (104°F)• mains supply voltage fluctuations not to exceed ±10% of the nominal voltage• other supply voltage fluctuations as stated by the manufacturer• transient overvoltage according to installation categories (overvoltage categories) I, II and III.
For mains supply, the minimum and normal category is II.
• pollution degree Ior II in accordance with IEC 664.
For clarification, terms used in some Declarations of Conformity include:•

pollution degree: any addition of foreign matter, solid, liquid or gaseous (ionized gases) thatmay produce a reduction of dielectric strength or surface resistivity. A pollution degree I has
no influence on safety and implies: the equipment is at operating temperature with noncondensing humidity conditions; no conductive particles are permitted in the atmosphere;warm-up time is sufficient to avert any condensation or frost; no hazardous voltages areapplied until completion of the warm-up period. Pollution degree II implies the expectationof occasional condensation.

•

overvoltage (installation) category: classification with limits for transient over-voltage,
dependent on the nominal line voltage to earth. Category I implies signals without hightransient values. Category II applies to typical mains power lines with some transients.

Safety Conditions
Users must comply with all relevant safety conditions listed in the Declarations of Conformity and in theuser documentation. This manual, LogBook, and Daq device hardware use the following Warning andCaution symbols:(If you see these symbols on a product, carefully read the related information and be alert to the possibilityof personal injury).
This warning symbol is used in this manual or on the equipment to warn of possible
injury or death from electrical shock under noted conditions.

This warning/caution symbol is used to warn of possible personal injury or
equipment damage under noted conditions.
LogBook and Daq device products contain no user-serviceable parts; refer all service to qualified
personnel.

1-16Signal Management

886995DBK Option Cards and Modules

The specific safety conditions for CE compliance vary by product; but general safety conditions
include:•The operator must observe all safety cautions and operating conditions specified in the
documentation for all hardware used.

•

The host computer and all connected equipment must be CE compliant.

•

All power must be off to the device and externally connected equipment before internal access tothe device is permitted.

•

Isolation voltage ratings: do not exceed documented voltage limits for power and signal inputs.
All wire insulation and terminal blocks in the system must be rated for the isolation voltage in use.
Voltages above 30 Vrms or ±60 VDC must not be applied if any condensation has formed on thedevice.

•Current and power use must not exceed specifications. Do not defeat fuses or other over-current
protection.

Emissions/Immunity Conditions
The specific immunity conditions for CE compliance vary by product; but general immunity conditions
include:• Cables must be shielded, braid-type with metal-shelled connectors. Input terminal connections areto be made with shielded wire. The shield should be connected to the chassis ground with the
hardware provided.
•

The host computer must be properly grounded.

•

In low-level analog applications, some inaccuracy is to be expected when I/O leads are exposed to
RF fields or transients over 3 or 10 V/m as noted on the Declaration of Conformity.

CE Enhancements for Existing ProductsThis section of describes three CE enhancements.
•••

DBK41/CE
Edge Guards for the DBK5, DBK8, and DBK44
BNC Connectors for CE compliance

Edge Guards for DBK5, DBK8, and DBK44
A plastic barrier attached to the end of a DBK card helps prevent access to leads, and to live circuits.
The edge guards attach to DBKs (see figure below) that are mounted in a DBK41/CE, with EMI shieldplates. The access slot allows insulated wires to pass through the barrier.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

886995Signal Management

1-17

DBK41/CE
The DBK41/CE includes 3 variations of EMI shield plates that attach to the DBK41 enclosure. Besides
acting as an electrical safety barrier, these shields reduce electromagnetic interference (EMI).
Note: The CE kit is included with the DBK41/CE. It can be purchased as an optional accessory for use
with DBK41.

BNC Connectors for CE Compliance
Exposed BNC connectors can receive static charges, which can enter the board’s circuitry, resulting in
ESD damage. To comply with CE standards, BNC connectors must be shielded from high-voltage sources
such as static charges.

Some points:

1-18

Signal Management•

Cable and connector requirements are stated in the product’s Declaration of Conformity.
These are typically special coaxial cables with insulated end-connectors and rubber O-rings,
for example, cable kit p/n 418-0800.

•

PVC dust caps (p/n CN-96) must cover all unused BNC connectors.

•

Properly installed connectors and dust caps will cover the entire surface of the BNC, i.e., no
BNC metal will be exposed.

886995DBK Option Cards and Modules

System Connections and Pinouts

2

Overview …… 2-1
P1 – DB37 Connector for Analog I/O …… 2-3
P2 – DB37 Connector for Digital I/O …… 2-4
P3 – DB37 Connector for Pulse/Frequency/High-Speed Digital I/O …… 2-5
P4 to P1, P2, P3 Correlation …… 2-6
Ground Tables – P4 to P1, P2, P3 Correlation …… 2-9

Overview
Primary data acquisition devices such as DaqBooks and DaqBoards are designed to accommodate a wide
variety of applications. The number of possible system configurations that can be made via the use of DBK
options is staggering.
LogBooks can also be enhanced and expanded with the use of optional DBK cards and modules. In
addition, LogBook systems can incorporate various options that do not fall within the DBK product line.
These LBK options are detailed in the LogBook User’s Manual, p/n 461-0901.
This chapter consists of three pinouts, one or more of which will apply to each specific DBK option. In
many cases the use of a particular pin will vary, depending on the primary data acquisition device being
used. For this reason it is important to look at the pinout of the primary device in its associated user’s
manual. Another reason to look at a specific user’s manual is that you may find additional information, forexample: correlation of a 37-pin connector’s pins to those found on a P4 100-pin connector. In addition,
DB37 connectors for some products are achieved by connecting a cable to an onboard header. Those
headers are not detailed in this DBK Options Manual.

Reference Note: If you plan to use an expansion chassis (e.g., a DBK10, DBK41, orDBK60) for
your data acquisition system, refer to the respective DBK section of this manual for productdetails.

Reference Note: For additional information regarding the primary data acquisition devices, their
pinouts and associated software programs, refer to the user’s manual associated with that device.

Reference Note: You must set up your software to accommodate particular DBKs in yoursystem.
ooo

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Chapter 3 pertains to DBK Setup in DaqView.
Chapter 4 pertains to DBK Setup in LogView.
Refer to separate documentation for DaqCOM, API, DASYlab,
and LabVIEW as applicable.

877095

System Connections & Pinouts

2-1

CAUTION
Do not confuse connectors. Ensure that you only connect P1 I/Os to P1,P2 I/Os to P2, and P3 I/Os to P3. Improper connection may result in equipment
damage.

CAUTION
Turn off power to all devices connected to the system before connecting cables orsetting configuration jumpers and switches. Electrical shock or damage toequipment can result even under low-voltage conditions.

CAUTION
The discharge of static electricity can damage some electronic components.
Semiconductor devices are especially susceptible to ESD damage. You should
always handle components carefully, and you should never touch connector pins or
circuit components unless you are following ESD guidelines in an appropriate ESD
controlled area. Such guidelines include the use of properly grounded mats andwrist straps, ESD bags and cartons, and related procedures.

2-2 System Connections & Pinouts

877095DBK Option Cards and Modules

P1

Analog I/OThis is a general P1 pinout for use with DBK cards. It is not to be confused with the more detailed pinouts found in
the “device-specific” user’s manuals. In regard to pinouts for devices not depicted in the following table refer tothe applicable user’s manual.
DaqBook/2000 Series &DaqBoard/2000 Series Devices
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

Signal Type
+5 VDC Power-15 VDC Power
Digital Out Bit 3 / Ch SelectDigital Out Bit 1 / Ch SelectDigital In Bit 1 / Gain SelectDigital In Bit 0 / Gain SelectDGND (Digital Ground)
Negative Reference; -5 VDC
Positive Reference; +5 VDC-- Not Connected --Differential
Single-Ended
Ch 7 LO IN
Ch 15 HI IN
Ch 6 LO IN
Ch 14 HI IN
Ch 5 LO IN
Ch 13 HI IN
Ch 4 LO IN
Ch 12 HI IN
Ch 3 LO IN
Ch 11 HI IN
Ch 2 LO IN
Ch 10 HI IN
Ch 1 LO IN
Ch 9 HI IN
Ch 0 LO IN
Ch 8 HI IN
SGND (Signal Ground)
ADC Pacer Clock, Output / Input+15 VDC Power
Digital Out Bit 2 / Ch SelectDigital Out Bit 0 / Ch Select-- Not Connected --Digital In / External TTL Trigger In
Digital Out / SSH (Note 2)-- Not Connected --AGND (Analog Ground)
AGND (Analog Ground)CH 7 HI IN
CH 6 HI IN
Single-Ended or
CH 5 HI IN
Differential
CH 4 HI IN
CH 3 HI IN
CH 2 HI IN
CH 1 HI IN
CH 0 HI IN

DaqBook/100 Series, /200 Series
DaqBoard/100 Series, /200 Series
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

Signal Type
+5 VDC PowerCTR 0 Out / -15VDC power
Digital Out Bit 3 / Ch SelectDigital Out Bit 1 / Ch SelectDigital In Bit 3 / Gain SelectDigital In Bit 1 / Gain SelectDGND (Digital Ground)
Negative Reference; -5 VDC
DAC Output Channel 0
DAC Ref. In Ch 0 (must invert)
Differential
Single-Ended
Ch 7 LO IN
Ch 15 HI IN
Ch 6 LO IN
Ch 14 HI IN
Ch 5 LO IN
Ch 13 HI IN
Ch 4 LO IN
Ch 12 HI IN
Ch 3 LO IN
Ch 11 HI IN
Ch 2 LO IN
Ch 10 HI IN
Ch 1 LO IN
Ch 9 HI IN
Ch 0 LO IN
Ch 8 HI IN
AGND (Analog Ground)
CTR 2 Output (8254 chip)
CTR 0 Clock In / +15 VDC Power
Digital Out Bit 2 / Ch SelectDigital Out Bit 0 / Ch SelectDigital Input Bit 2 / CTR 0 Gate
Digital Input Bit 0 / Trigger 0
DAC ref. Ch 1 / SSH (Note 2)
DAC Output to Channel 1
AGND (Analog Ground)
AGND (Analog Ground)CH 7 HI IN
CH 6 HI IN
Single-Ended or
CH 5 HI IN
Differential
CH 4 HI IN
CH 3 HI IN
CH 2 HI IN
CH 1 HI IN
CH 0 HI IN

LogBook
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

Signal Type
+5 VDC Power-15 VDC Power
Channel Select Bit 3
Channel Select Bit 1
Gain Select Bit 1
Gain Select Bit 0
DGND (Digital Ground)
Negative Reference; -5 VDC
Positive Reference; +5 VDC-- Not Connected --Differential
Single-Ended
Ch 7 LO IN
Ch 15 HI IN
Ch 6 LO IN
Ch 14 HI IN
Ch 5 LO IN
Ch 13 HI IN
Ch 4 LO IN
Ch 12 HI IN
Ch 3 LO IN
Ch 11 HI IN
Ch 2 LO IN
Ch 10 HI IN
Ch 1 LO IN
Ch 9 HI IN
Ch 0 LO IN
Ch 8 HI IN
AGND (Analog Ground)
Pacer Clock, Output / Input+15 VDC Power
Channel Select Bit 2
Channel Select Bit 0
Digital Input Bit 1External TTL Trigger Input
SSH (Simultaneous Sample & Hold)
Calibration Output (+24 V @ 0.01 A)
AGND (Analog Ground)
AGND (Analog Ground)CH 7 HI IN
CH 6 HI IN
Single-Ended or
CH 5 HI IN
Differential
CH 4 HI IN
CH 3 HI IN
CH 2 HI IN
CH 1 HI IN
CH 0 HI IN

Notes:(1) Daq PC Card users: With exception of pins 11 through 18, and 30 through 37, users of the Daq PC Cardshould not refer to this pinout; instead, refer to the Daq PC Card user’s manual.
(2) SSH is “Simultaneous Sample and Hold.”(3) Software configuration commands determine P1 digital I/O pin functions.
(4) Refer to the user’s manual of the applicable primary data acquisition device for more additional information.
(5) For devices that have 100-pin P4 connectors DBK200 Series adapters can be used to obtain one or more DB37
connectors designated as P1, P2, and P3.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

877095

System Connections & Pinouts

2-3

P2

Digital I/O

DaqBook/2000 Series &DaqBoard/2000 Series Devices
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

Signal Type-- Not Connected --- Not Connected --Port B Digital I/O
B7
Port B Bit 7
B6Port B Bit 6
B5Port B Bit 5
B4Port B Bit 4
B3Port B Bit 3
B2
Port B Bit 2
B1
Port B Bit 1
B0
Port B Bit 0
DGND (Digital Ground)-- Not Connected --DGND (Digital Ground)-- Not Connected --DGND (Digital Ground)-- Not Connected --DGND (Digital Ground)+5 VDC Supply
DGND (Digital Ground)+5 VDC Supply
DGND (Digital Ground)
Port C Digital Input / Output
C7
Port C Bit 7
C6Port C Bit 6
C5Port C Bit 5
C4Port C Bit 4
C3
Port C Bit 3
C2
Port C Bit 2
C1
Port C Bit 1
C0
Port C Bit 0
Port A Digital Input / Output
A7
Port A Bit 7
A6Port A Bit 6
A5Port A Bit 5
A4Port A Bit 4
A3
Port A Bit 3
A2
Port A Bit 2
A1
Port A Bit 1
A0
Port A Bit 0

DaqBook/100 Series, /200 Series
DaqBoard/100 Series, /200 Series
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

Signal TypeInterrupt Line Input (Note 1)
Interrupt Line Enable (Note 1)
Port B Digital I/O
B7
Port B Bit 7
B6Port B Bit 6
B5Port B Bit 5
B4Port B Bit 4
B3Port B Bit 3
B2
Port B Bit 2
B1
Port B Bit 1
B0
Port B Bit 0
DGND (Digital Ground)-- Not Connected --DGND (Digital Ground)-- Not Connected --DGND (Digital Ground)-- Not Connected --DGND (Digital Ground)+5 VDC Supply
DGND (Digital Ground)+5 VDC Supply
DGND (Digital Ground)
Port C Digital Input / Output
C7
Port C Bit 7
C6Port C Bit 6
C5Port C Bit 5
C4Port C Bit 4
C3
Port C Bit 3
C2
Port C Bit 2
C1
Port C Bit 1
C0
Port C Bit 0
Port A Digital Input / Output
A7
Port A Bit 7
A6Port A Bit 6
A5Port A Bit 5
A4Port A Bit 4
A3
Port A Bit 3
A2
Port A Bit 2
A1
Port A Bit 1
A0
Port A Bit 0

LogBook
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

Signal TypeInterrupt Line Input (Note 1)
Interrupt Line Enable (Note 1)
Port B Digital I/O
B7
Port B Bit 7
B6Port B Bit 6
B5Port B Bit 5
B4Port B Bit 4
B3Port B Bit 3
B2
Port B Bit 2
B1
Port B Bit 1
B0
Port B Bit 0
DGND (Digital Ground)-- Not Connected --DGND (Digital Ground)-- Not Connected --DGND (Digital Ground)-- Not Connected --DGND (Digital Ground)+5 VDC Supply
DGND (Digital Ground)+5 VDC Supply
DGND (Digital Ground)
Port C Digital Input / Output
C7
Port C Bit 7
C6Port C Bit 6
C5Port C Bit 5
C4Port C Bit 4
C3
Port C Bit 3
C2
Port C Bit 2
C1
Port C Bit 1
C0
Port C Bit 0
Port A Digital Input / Output
A7
Port A Bit 7
A6Port A Bit 6
A5Port A Bit 5
A4Port A Bit 4
A3
Port A Bit 3
A2
Port A Bit 2
A1
Port A Bit 1
A0
Port A Bit 0

Notes:(1) There are no user functions for accessing Interrupt Line Input or Interrupt Line Enable.
(2) No local lines are available when digital expansion lines are used.
(3) For devices that have 100-pin P4 connectors DBK200 Series adapters can be used to obtain one or more DB37
connectors designated as P1, P2, and P3.

P2 expansion cables must be kept short for proper operation.
Do not exceed 14” per attached DBK card.

2-4 System Connections & Pinouts

877095DBK Option Cards and Modules

P3

Pulse/Frequency/High-Speed Digital I/O

This is a general P3 pinout for use with DBK cards. It is not to be confused with the more detailed pinouts
found in the primary “device-specific” manuals. In regard to pinouts for devices not depicted in the following
table refer to the applicable user’s manual.

DaqBook/2000 Series &DaqBoard/2000 Series Devices
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

Signal TypeDGND (Digital Ground)
DGND (Digital Ground)High-Speed Low Byte Channels
Digital 7
Digital I/O Bit 7
Digital 6
Digital I/O Bit 6
Digital 5
Digital I/O Bit 5
Digital 4
Digital I/O Bit 4
Digital 3
Digital I/O Bit 3
Digital 2
Digital I/O Bit 2
Digital 1
Digital I/O Bit 1
Digital 0
Digital I/O Bit 0
DGND (Digital Ground)
Expansion 2 – reserved
Expansion 3 – reserved
Expansion 4 – reserved
Timer 0 Output
Timer 1 Output
Counter 2 Input
Counter 0 Input+15 VDC Supply+5 VDC Supply
DAC Pacer Clock Input or Output
High-Speed High Byte Channels
Digital 15 Digital I/O Bit 15
Digital 14 Digital I/O Bit 14
Digital 13 Digital I/O Bit 13
Digital 12 Digital I/O Bit 12
Digital 11 Digital I/O Bit 11
Digital 10 Digital I/O Bit 10
Digital 9
Digital I/O Bit 9Digital 8
Digital I/O Bit 8
AGND (Analog Ground)
DAC3
Analog Out
Note 3
DAC2
Analog Out
Note 3
DAC1
Analog Out
Note 3
DAC0
Analog Out
Note 3
Counter 3 Input
Counter 1 Input-15 VDC Supply

DaqBook/100 Series, /200 Series
DaqBoard/100 Series, /200 Series
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

Signal TypeInterrupt Line Input
Interrupt Line Enable
High-Speed Low Byte Channels
SDI 7
Digital I/O Bit 7
SDI 6
Digital I/O Bit 6
SDI 5
Digital I/O Bit 5
SDI 4
Digital I/O Bit 4
SDI 3
Digital I/O Bit 3
SDI 2
Digital I/O Bit 2
SDI 1
Digital I/O Bit 1
SDI 0
Digital I/O Bit 0
DGND (Digital Ground)
CTR 5 Gate
9513 chip
CTR 5 In9513 chip
CTR 4 Gate
9513 chip
CTR 4 In9513 chip
CTR 3 Gate
9513 chip
CTR 3 In9513 chip
CTR 2 Gate
9513 chip
CTR 2 In9513 chip+5 VDC Supply
D in Strobe -- Not Connected -High-Speed High Byte Channels
SDI 15 Digital I/O Bit 15
SDI 14 Digital I/O Bit 14
SDI 13 Digital I/O Bit 13
SDI 12 Digital I/O Bit 12
SDI 11 Digital I/O Bit 11
SDI 10 Digital I/O Bit 10
SDI 9
Digital I/O Bit 9
SDI 8
Digital I/O Bit 8
OSC (Frequency Out)
9513 chip
CTR 5 Out
9513 chip
CTR 4 Out
9513 chip
CTR 3 Out
9513 chip
CTR 2 Out
9513 chip
CTR 1 Out
9513 chip
CTR 1 In9513 chip
CTR 1 Gate
9513 chip

LogBook
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

Signal TypeInterrupt Line Input
Interrupt Line Enable
High-Speed Low Byte Channels
HSD 7
Digital I/O Bit 7
HSD 6
Digital I/O Bit 6
HSD 5
Digital I/O Bit 5
HSD 4
Digital I/O Bit 4
HSD 3
Digital I/O Bit 3
HSD 2
Digital I/O Bit 2
HSD 1
Digital I/O Bit 1
HSD 0
Digital I/O Bit 0
DGND (Digital Ground)
C/D – Command Data Note 1
WR – Write Strobe
Note 1
RD – Read Strobe
Note 1
TMR 0 Out, Timer 0 Output
TMR 1 Out, Timer 1 Output
CNT 2 In, Counter 2 Input
CNT 0 In, Counter 0 Input+15 VDC Supply+5 VDC Supply-- Not Connected -High-Speed High Byte Channels
HSD 15
Digital I/O Bit 15
HSD 14
Digital I/O Bit 14
HSD 13
Digital I/O Bit 13
HSD 12
Digital I/O Bit 12
HSD 11
Digital I/O Bit 11
HSD 10Digital I/O Bit 10
HSD 9Digital I/O Bit 9
HSD 8
Digital I/O Bit 8
AGND (Analog Ground)
AOUT 0 / Scan
AOUT1 / Trigger
AOUT2 / Clock
AOUT3 / Digital Out
Counter 3 Input
Counter 1 Input-15 VDC Supply

Notes:(1) LogBook P3 pin 12, 13, and 14 functions are not user accessible.
(2) For DBK202, DBK203, and DBK204, the 37-pin P3 connector is obtained by connecting a CA-60 cable to an onboard
40-pin header.
(3) Consult your user’s manual in regard to DAC analog output availability for your specific device. For example:
DaqBook/2020 connects to DACs via BNC connectors and DaqBook/2005 has no DACs.
(4) For devices that have 100-pin P4 connectors DBK200 Series adapters can be used to obtain one or more DB37
connectors designated as P1, P2, and P3.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

877095

System Connections & Pinouts

2-5

P4 to P1, P2, and P3 Correlation
The following table lists the correlation between the P4 I/O lines and their respective P1, P2 and P3 pinlocations on the DBK200 Series boards. Ground correlation is provided in a subsequent table.

P4 PinSignalType

Description

P1, P2, P3 Correlation

A1

+5VDC

Power

Expansion +5 Volts

B1

+5VDC

Power

Expansion +5 Volts

A2

Port A bit 7

Dig I/O

B2

Port A bit 6

Dig I/O

A3

Port A bit 5

Dig I/O

B3

Port A bit 4

Dig I/O

A4

Port A bit 3

Dig I/O

B4

Port A bit 2

Dig I/O

A5

Port A bit 1

Dig I/O

B5

Port A bit 0

Dig I/O

A6

Port C bit 7

Dig I/O

B6

Port C bit 6

Dig I/O

A7

Port C bit 5

Dig I/O

B7

Port C bit 4

Dig I/O

A8

Port C bit 3

Dig I/O

B8

Port C bit 2

Dig I/O

A9

Port C bit 1

Dig I/O

B9

Port C bit 0

Dig I/O

A10
B10GroundPort B bit 7

Dig I/ODig I/O

A11

Port B bit 6

Dig I/O

B11

Port B bit 5

Dig I/O

A12

Port B bit 4

Dig I/O

B12

Port B bit 3

Dig I/OP2 Digital Port A, bit 7 -orP2 expansion Data bit 15
P2 Digital Port A, bit 6 -orP2 expansion Data bit 14
P2 Digital Port A, bit 5 -orP2 expansion Data bit 13
P2 Digital Port A, bit 4 -orP2 expansion Data bit 12
P2 Digital Port A, bit 3 -orP2 expansion Data bit 11
P2 Digital Port A, bit 2 -orP2 expansion Data bit 10
P2 Digital Port A, bit 1 -orP2 expansion Data bit 9
P2 Digital Port A, bit 0 -orP2 expansion Data bit 8
P2 Digital Port C, bit 7 -orP2 expansion Data bit 7
P2 Digital Port C, bit 6 -orP2 expansion Data bit 6
P2 Digital Port C, bit 5 -orP2 expansion Data bit 5
P2 Digital Port C, bit 4 -orP2 expansion Data bit 4
P2 Digital Port C, bit 3 -orP2 expansion Data bit 3
P2 Digital Port C, bit 2 -orP2 expansion Data bit 2
P2 Digital Port C, bit 1 -orP2 expansion Data bit 1
P2 Digital Port C, bit 0 -orP2 expansion Data bit 0
Digital Common
P2 Digital Port B, bit 7 -orP2 expansion address bit 0
P2 Digital Port B, bit 6 -orP2 expansion address bit 1
P2 Digital Port B, bit 5 -orP2 expansion address bit 2
P2 Digital Port B, bit 4 -orP2 expansion address bit 2
P2 Digital Port B, bit 3 -orP2 expansion address bit 3P1 pin 1P2 pin 18, 20
P3 pin 20
P1 pin 1P2 pin 18, 20
P3 pin 20
P2 pin 30
P2 pin 31
P2 pin 32
P2 pin 33
P2 pin 34
P2 pin 35
P2 pin 36
P2 pin 37
P2 pin 22
P2 pin 23
P2 pin 24
P2 pin 25
P2 pin 26
P2 pin 27
P2 pin 28
P2 pin 29
See Ground Tables
P2 pin 3P2 pin 4P2 pin 5P2 pin 6
P2 pin 7

This table is continued.
2-6 System Connections & Pinouts

877095DBK Option Cards and Modules

P4 Pin

SignalType

Description

P1, P2, P3 Correlation

A13

Port B bit 2

Dig I/O

P2 pin 8

B13

Port B bit 1

Dig I/O

A14

Port B bit 0

Dig I/O

B14
A15
B15
A16
B16
A17
B17
A18
B18
A19
B19
A20
B20
A21
B21
A22
B22
A23
B23
A24
B24
A25
B25
A26

Ground
P3 Dig bit 14
P3 Dig bit 15
P3 Dig bit 12
P3 Dig bit 13
P3 Dig bit 10
P3 Dig bit 11
P3 Dig bit 8
P3 Dig bit 9
P3 Dig bit 6
P3 Dig bit 7
P3 Dig bit 4
P3 Dig bit 5
P3 Dig bit 2P3 Dig bit 3
P3 Dig bit 0
P3 Dig bit 1
GroundXCKGroundTimer 0Timer 1
GroundDAC Pacer

Dig I/ODig I/ODig I/ODig I/ODig I/ODig I/ODig I/ODig I/ODig I/ODig I/ODig I/ODig I/ODig I/ODig I/ODig I/ODig I/ODig I/ODig I/ODig I/ODig I/ODig OUTDig OUTDig I/ODig I/O

B26

ADC Pacer

Dig I/O

A27
B27
A28
B28
A29
B29
A30
B30
A31
B31
A32
B32
A33
B33
A34
B34

TTL Trigger
GroundCounter 3
Counter 2
Counter 1
Counter 0
CD ACKSDI
GroundXI/O Gain 1
XI/O Gain 0
XI/O Address 3
XI/O Address 2
XI/O Address 1
XI/O Address 0
External SSH

Dig INDig I/ODig INDig INDig INDig INDig INDig IN
AnalogDig OUTDig OUTDig OUTDig OUTDig OUTDig OUTDig OUT

A35
B35
A36
B36

GroundPositive Ref
Negative Ref
Analog In Ch15

AnalogAnalogAnalogAnalog

A37

Analog In Ch7

Analog

B37
A38

GroundAnalog In Ch14

AnalogAnalog

B38

Analog In Ch6

Analog

A39

GroundAnalogP2 Digital Port B, bit 2 -orP2 expansion RESET
P2 Digital Port B, bit 1 -orP2 expansion WRITE
P2 Digital Port B, bit 0 -orP2 expansion READ
Digital Common
P3 Digital Port bit 14
P3 Digital Port bit 15
P3 Digital Port bit 12
P3 Digital Port bit 13
P3 Digital Port bit 10
P3 Digital Port bit 11
P3 Digital Port bit 8
P3 Digital Port bit 9
P3 Digital Port bit 6
P3 Digital Port bit 7
P3 Digital Port bit 4
P3 Digital Port bit 5
P3 Digital Port bit 2P3 Digital Port bit 3
P3 Digital Port bit 0
P3 Digital Port bit 1
Digital Common
Reserved
Digital Common
P3 Timer 0 Output
P3 Timer 1 Output
Digital Common
External DAC Pacer Clock Input /Internal DAC Pacer Output
External ADC Pacer Clock Input /Internal ADC Pacer Output
External TTL Trigger Input
Digital Common
P3 Counter 3 Input
P3 Counter 2 Input
P3 Counter 1 Input
P3 Counter 0 Input
Reserved
Reserved
Analog Signal Common
Analog Expansion Gain Select bit 1
Analog Expansion Gain Select bit 0
Analog Exp. Address Select bit 3
Analog Exp. Address Select bit 2
Analog Exp. Address Select bit 1
Analog Exp. Address Select bit 0
Analog Expansion Simultaneous
Sample/Hold Signal
Analog Signal Common
Analog +5 Volt Reference
Analog -5 Volt Reference
Analog Input Chan 15 (SE)
Analog Input Chan 7L (DIF)
Analog Input Chan 7 (SE)
Analog Input Chan 7H (DIF)
Analog Signal Common
Analog Input Chan 14 (SE)
Analog Input Chan 6L (DIF)
Analog Input Chan 6 (SE)
Analog Input Chan 6H (DIF)
Analog Signal Common

P2 pin 9P2 pin 10
See Ground Tables
P3 pin 23
P3 pin 22
P3 pin 25
P3 pin 24
P3 pin 27
P3 pin 26
P3 pin 29
P3 pin 28
P3 pin 4P3 pin 3P3 pin 6P3 pin 5P3 pin 8P3 pin 7
P3 pin 10
P3 pin 9
See Ground Tables
No Connection
See Ground Tables
P3 pin 15
P3 pin 16
See Ground Tables
P3 pin 21
P1 pin 20
P1 pin 25
See Ground Tables
P3 pin 35
P3 pin 17
P3 pin 36
P3 pin 18
No Connection
No Connection
See Ground Tables
P1 pin 5
P1 pin 6
P1 pin 3
P1 pin 22
P1 pin 4
P1 pin 23
P1 pin 26
See Ground Tables
P1 pin 9
P1 pin 8
P1 pin 11
P1 pin 30
See Ground Tables
P1 pin 12
P1 pin 31
See Ground Tables

This table is continued.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

877095

System Connections & Pinouts

2-7

P4 Pin

SignalType

Description

P1, P2, P3 Correlation

B39

Analog In Ch13

AnalogP1 pin 13

A40

Analog In Ch5

Analog

B40
A41

GroundAnalog In Ch12

AnalogAnalog

B41

Analog In Ch

AnalogA42
B42GroundAnalog In Ch11

AnalogAnalog

A43

Analog In Ch3

Analog

B43
A44

GroundAnalog In Ch10

AnalogAnalog

B44

Analog In Ch2

AnalogA45
B45

Signal Ground
Analog In Ch9

AnalogAnalog

A46

Analog In Ch1

Analog

B46
A47

GroundAnalog In Ch8

AnalogAnalog

B47

Analog In Ch0

Analog

A48-15VDCPower

Analog Input Chan 13 (SE)
Analog Input Chan 5L (DIF)
Analog Input Chan 5 (SE)
Analog Input Chan 5H (DIF)
Analog Signal Common
Analog Input Chan 12 (SE)
Analog Input Chan 4L (DIF)
Analog Input Chan 4 (SE)
Analog Input Chan 4H (DIF)
Analog Signal Common
Analog Input Chan 11 (SE)
Analog Input Chan 3L (DIF)
Analog Input Chan 3 (SE)
Analog Input Chan 3H (DIF)
Analog Signal Common
Analog Input Chan 10 (SE)
Analog Input Chan 2L (DIF)
Analog Input Chan 2 (SE)
Analog Input Chan 2H (DIF)
Sense Common (SGND)
Analog Input Chan 9 (SE)
Analog Input Chan 1L (DIF)
Analog Input Chan 1 (SE)
Analog Input Chan 1H (DIF)
Analog Signal Common
Analog Input Chan 8 (SE)
Analog Input Chan 0L (DIF)
Analog Input Chan 0 (SE)
Analog Input Chan 0H (DIF)
Expansion -15 Volts

B48+15VDCPower

Expansion +15 Volts

A49
B49 *
A50
B50 *

DAC 0
DAC 2
DAC 1
DAC 3

AnalogAnalogAnalogAnalog

DAC 0 Output
DAC 2 Output
DAC 1 Output
DAC 3 Output

P1 pin 32
See Ground Tables
P1 pin 14
P1 pin 33
See Ground Tables
P1 pin 15
P1 pin 34
See Ground Tables
P1 pin 16
P1 pin 35
P1-19
P1 pin 17
P1 pin 36
See Ground Tables
P1 pin 18
P1 pin 37
P1 pin 2P3 pin 37
P1 pin 21
P3 pin 19
P3 pin 34
P3 pin 32
P3 pin 33
P3 pin 31* DAC 2 and DAC 3 (from P4 pins B49 and B50, respectively) only apply to DaqBoard/2001, /2003 /2004
and the equivalent cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series Boards.

2-8 System Connections & Pinouts

877095DBK Option Cards and Modules

Ground Tables – P4 to P1, P2, and P3 Ground Correlation

Digital Common (DGND)
P4 Pin

DBK200

DBK201

DBK202
DBK203
DBK204

DBK206

DBK207

DBK208

DBK209A10---------------------

P1-7--------------

P1-7

B14-------

P2-11

P2-11

P2-11

-------

P2-11

P2-11

A23

P2-13

P2-13

P2-13

P2-13

P2-13

A24

P2-15

P2-15

P2-15

P2-15

P2-15

B25

P2-17

P2-17

P2-17

P2-17

P2-17

B27

P2-19

P2-19

P2-19

P2-19

P2-19

P2-21

P2-21

P2-21

P2-21

P2-21

-------

P3-1

P3-1

-------

P3-1-------

P3-2

P3-2

P3-2

P3-11

P3-11

P3-11

P3-11

-------

P3-30

P3-30

P3-30

--------------

P1

P2

P3

Analog Common (AGND)
P4 Pin

DBK200

DBK201

DBK202
DBK203
DBK204

DBK206

DBK207

DBK208

DBK209

A31

P1-7

P1-7

P1-7

-------

P1-7--------------

A35

P1-28

P1-28

P1-28

P1-28

P1-28

B37

P1-29

P1-29

P1-29

P1-29

P1-29

A39

-------------------------------------------------

B40-------

P3-30-----------------------------------

P1-28

P1

P1-29

A42

P2
P3

B43
B46

DBK Option Cards and Modules

877095

System Connections & Pinouts

2-9

2-10 System Connections & Pinouts

877095DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK Setup in DaqView

3

Overview…… 3-1
Setting up Analog DBKs …… 3-4
Setting up Digital DBKs …… 3-6
Setting Internal Clock Speed to 100 kHz …. 3-8

Overview
Most DBK card and module options provide for channel expansion and signal conditioning; however,some serve as power supplies, and others are no more than interfaces that allow the user to meet desiredconnection needs, for example, the use of BNC connectors.
For proper operation with DaqBook or DaqBoard systems, most of the DBK options must be configured,both physically on the DBK, and in the data acquisition application.
All DBK configuration-related parameters can be found in the DaqView’s Configure System Hardware
screen. “Analog Input” type DBKs will be under the P1 section of the screen, “Digital Input” DBKs will
be under the P2 section, and analog and digital outputs [if applicable] will be under P3.
The following table, in addition to providing a brief description of DBK options, can be used to quickly
identify whether the DBK option is of the P1-Analog or of the P2-Digital type. DBKs that require nosoftware setup in DaqView are shown in a shaded row and display the comment “No configuration
in DaqView.”
DBK Reference for DaqView Users
DBK

Description

TypeInterface

Comment

DBK1

16-Connector BNC Adapter Module

DBK24-Channel Voltage Output Card

P1-ANALOG

No configuration in DaqView.
Must enter S1 setting in H/W Config.

DBK4

2-Channel Dynamic Signal Input Card

P1-ANALOG

Must enter S1 setting in H/W Config.

DBK5

4-Channel Current Output Card

P1-ANALOG

Must enter S1 setting in H/W Config.

DBK7

4-Channel, Frequency-to-Voltage Input Card

P1-ANALOG

Must enter S1 setting in H/W Config.

DBK88-Channel High-Voltage Input Card

P1-ANALOG

Must enter JP16 setting in H/W Conf.

DBK9

8-Channel RTD Card

P1-ANALOG

Must enter JP4 setting in H/W Conf.

DBK10

3-Slot Expansion Chassis

Expansion

No configuration in DaqView.

DBK11A

Screw-Terminal Option & BNC Option Card

InterfaceMust select “Direct Signal Conn.”

DBK12

Low Gain A/I Multiplexer Card

P1-ANALOG

DBK13High Gain A/I Multiplexer Card

P1-ANALOG

DBK15

Universal Current, Voltage Input Card

P1-ANALOG

DBK16

2-Channel Strain-Gage Card

P1-ANALOG

Must enter S1 setting in H/W Config.

DBK17

4-Channel Simultaneous Sample & Hold Card

P1-ANALOG

Must enter SW6 setting in H/W Conf.

DBK18

4-Channel Low-Pass Filter Card

P1-ANALOG

Must enter SW6 setting in H/W Conf.

DBK19

14-Channel Thermocouple Card

P1-ANALOG

Must select T/C Type in DaqView’s
Channel Setup Window. See Note 1.

DBK20

Digital I/O Card, with screw terminals

P2-DIGITAL

Digital I/O (Note 2)

DBK21

Digital I/O Card, with DB37 male connectors

P2-DIGITAL

Digital I/O (Note 2)

DBK23

Isolated Digital Input Chassis

P2-DIGITAL

Digital I/O (Note 2)

DBK24

Isolated Digital Output Chassis

P2-DIGITAL

Digital I/O (Note 2)

DBK25

8-Channel Relay Output Card

P2-DIGITAL

Digital I/O (Note 2)

DBK30A

Rechargeable Battery Module

Power

No configuration in DaqView.

DBK32A

Auxiliary Power Supply CardPower

No configuration in DaqView.

For these three DBKs: In DaqView’s
Acquisition Setup tab select 100 kHz
as the Internal Clock speed.

Note 1: If using a DBK19 with a /2000 Series Device, you should select 100 kHz as the Internal Clock speed in
DaqView’s Acquisition Setup tab.
Note 2: After the DBK option is selected in Hardware Configuration, the Digital I/O settings are made in
DaqView’s Digital I/O Window.

DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual

968194

DBK Setup in DaqView

3-1

DBK Reference for DaqView Users
DBK

Description

Type

Comment

DBK33

Triple-Output Power Supply CardPower

No configuration in DaqView.

DBK34

Vehicle UPS Module

Power

No configuration in DaqView.

DBK34AUPS / Battery Module

Power

No configuration in DaqView.

DBK40

18-Connector BNC Analog Interface

Interface

No configuration in DaqView.

DBK41

10-Slot Expansion Module

Expansion

No configuration in DaqView.

DBK42

16-Slot 5B Signal Conditioning Module

P1-ANALOG

5B Module selection, see Note 3.

DBK43A

8-Channel Strain-Gage Module

P1-ANALOG

Must enter J2 setting in H/W Config.

DBK44

2-Channel 5B Signal-Conditioning Card

P1-ANALOG

5B Module selection, see Note 3.

DBK45

4-Channel SSH and Low-Pass Filter Card

P1-ANALOG

Must enter SW6 setting in H/W Config.

DBK46

4-Channel Analog Output Card

4 DAC

No configuration in DaqView.

DBK48

16-Slot 8B Signal Conditioning Module

P1-ANALOG

8B Module selection, see Note 3.

DBK50

8-Channel High-Voltage Input Module

P1-ANALOG

Must enter JP1C setting in H/W Config.

DBK51

8-Channel Low-Voltage Input Module

P1-ANALOG

Must enter JP1C setting in H/W Config.

DBK52

14-Channel Thermocouple Input Module

P1-ANALOG

DBK53

16-Ch. Low-Gain Multiplexing Module

P1-ANALOG

DBK54

16-Ch. High-Gain Multiplexing Module

P1-ANALOG

For these three DBKs: In DaqView’s
Acquisition Setup tab select 100 kHz as
the Internal Clock speed.

DBK558-Ch. Frequency to Voltage Input Module

P1-ANALOG

Must enter S1 setting in H/W Config.

DBK60

3-Slot Expansion Chassis

Expansion

No configuration in DaqView.

DBK65

8-Ch. Transducer Interface Module

P1-ANALOG

Must enter S1 setting in H/W Config.

DBK70

P1-ANALOG

Refer to the DBK70 User’s Manual

P1-ANALOG

No configuration in DaqView.

DBK81

Vehicle Network Interface Mux. Module
16-Ch. Differential Voltage Input Card with
Excitation Output
7-Channel T/C Card, High-Accuracy

DBK82

14-Channel T/C Card, High-Accuracy

P1-ANALOG

DBK83

P1-ANALOG

DBK84

14-Ch. T/C Card, High-Accuracy; uses
Connection Pod
14-Ch. T/C Module, High-Accuracy

DBK85

16-Ch. Differential Voltage Module

P1-ANALOG

No configuration in DaqView.

DBK90

56-Ch. T/C Module, High-Accuracy

P1-ANALOG

Must select the Thermocouple Type in
DaqView’s Channel Setup Window.

DBK200P4-to-P1 Adapter Card

Interface

No configuration in DaqView.

DBK201P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Board

Interface

No configuration in DaqView.

DBK202

P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Board, with
Screw Terminals & Locators for RC Filter

Interface

No configuration in DaqView.

DBK203P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Chassis, with
Screw Terminals & Locators for RC Filter

Interface

No configuration in DaqView.

DBK204

DBK203 with a CA-209 CE Cable Kit

Interface

No configuration in DaqView.

DBK204c

DBK203 with a CA-209c CE Cable Kit

Interface

No configuration in DaqView.

DBK205

P4 to 12-Slot Screw Terminal Adapter

Interface

No configuration in DaqView.

DBK206

P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Board,
with Screw Terminals

Interface

No configuration in DaqView.

DBK20716-Channel, 5B Carrier Board

P1-ANALOG

5B Module selection, see Note 3.

DBK207/CJC

DBK207 with Cold Junction Compensation

P1-ANALOG

5B Module selection, see Note 3.

DBK80

P1-ANALOG
Must select the Thermocouple Type in
DaqView’s Channel Setup Window.

P1-ANALOG

Note 3: After selecting the DBK option in the Hardware Configuration window, 5B [or 8B] Module

selection is made in the DaqView main window, on the Channel Setup tab (for Analog and Scanned
Digital Inputs). Clicking on the Units column brings up the 5B [or 8B] Module selection function.

3-2

DBK Setup in DaqView

968194

DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s ManualDBK Reference for DaqView Users
DBK

Description

DBK208

Relay Carrier Board, Opto-22 Compatible

Type
P2-DIGITAL

Must enter S1, JP-0, and JP-1 settings
in the H/W Configuration window.

DBK209

P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Mini-Adapter Board

DBK210Grayhill 70M-Series Mini-Module Carrier
Board.

DBK213Screw-Terminal & Exp. Card Module

Interface

No configuration in DaqView.

DBK21416-Connector BNC Interface Module

Interface

No configuration in DaqView.

DBK21516-Connector BNC Connection Module

Interface

No configuration in DaqView.

DBK601
thru
DBK609Rear Panels for use with DaqBoard/260,
DBK60, and LogBook/360.

Connector
Panels

No configuration in DaqView.

TM

DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual

968194

Interface

Comment

P2-DIGITAL

No configuration in DaqView.
Must enter S1 settings and set the banks
for Input or Output in the H/W
Configuration window.

DBK Setup in DaqView

3-3

Setting Up Analog DBKs
If you have not already done so, review the applicable individual DBK section to ensure that the DBK
option is physically set as desired. Note that certain DBKs do not require configuration.
Understand your DBK’s physical configuration before attempting to set the device in
DaqView’s Hardware Configuration window. For example, if you were configuring a
DBK45 in DaqView, you would need to know the physical setup of rotary switch SW6
to properly set the address. To expedite the configuration, it is a good idea to have theidentity and setting information ready for each DIP-switch, rotary switch, and jumper,
as applicable.
Reference Note:
If you need to go beyond the basic software setup information that follows, refer to the
DaqView documentation. Note that you can access PDF versions of documents from thedata acquisition CD by using the <View PDFs> button on the CD’s intro page.

Complete the following steps to set up analog DBKs in DaqView.
1.

From DaqView’s main screen, pull down the Device menu, and select “Configure Hardware
Settings.”

Selecting Configure Hardware Settings from the Device Pull-down Menu
The Configure System Hardware screen appears, showing the channel assignments.

Configure System Hardware Screen

3-4

DBK Setup in DaqView

968194

DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual

The DBKs typically have a channel address set physically on the device, by either aswitch or a header. The channel designated in software must agree with the hardware
setting. Thus, in step 2 below, Channel 0 will only be used to select a specific DBK whenthat DBK is physically set for Channel 0. Refer to the specific DBK section for more
information, if needed.
2.

Under Analog I/O Option Cards External Connection, select the expansion down-arrow for the
chosen Daq Device channel, for example, P1 Channel 0. A “drop-down” will list the available
analog DBK options.
An alternative to using the expansion down-arrow to access the external connection dropdown list, is to click within the text box. For example, in the following figure, after clicking
on P1 Channel 0’s “Direct Signal Connection” text, the drop-down list appeared.

Configure System Hardware Screen Showing Analog I/O Option Cards,
External Connection, P1 Channel Pull-down List for Channel 0
3.

Select the applicable DBK card from the drop-down list.
If the card has jumper or switch setups that need to be set in DaqView, a related window will appear.
Three extracted examples follow: (a) Switch Settings: S1 Sub Address, (b) Switch Settings: SW6(rotary), and (c) Shunt Settings: JP16 (3-pin shunt).

Examples from Setup Windows
4.

Set the software DIP-switch settings, shunt-settings, and so forth to match the hardware settings on theactual DBK(s).

5.

When all the channels and sub-addresses are set correctly, select OK to return to the DaqView main
screen.

6.

From DaqView, complete the channel setup, acquisition setup, and data destination setup for each of
the new DBKs.
Reference Note:
If needed, refer to the DaqView documentation for more information. Note that you canaccess PDF versions of documents from the data acquisition CD by using the <View
PDFs> button on the CD’s intro page.

This completes the software setup for analog DBK options.

DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual

968194

DBK Setup in DaqView

3-5

Setting Up Digital DBKs
If you have not already done so, review the applicable DBK section to ensure that the DBK option is
physically set as desired. Note that certain DBKs do not require hardware or software configuration.
Reference Note:
If you need to go beyond the basic software setup information that follows, refer to the
DaqView documentation. Note that you can access PDF versions of documents from thedata acquisition CD by using the <View PDFs> button on the CD’s intro page.

Complete the following steps to set up digital DBKs in DaqView.
1.

From DaqView’s main screen, pull down the Device menu, and select “Configure Hardware
Settings.”

Selecting Configure Hardware Settings from the Device Pull-down Menu
The Configure System Hardware screen appears, showing the channel assignments.

Configure System Hardware Screen

3-6

DBK Setup in DaqView

968194

DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s ManualDBKs typically have a channel address set on the device, by either a switch or a header.
The channel designated in software must agree with the hardware setting. Thus, in step 2
below, Channel 0 will only be used to select a specific DBK when that DBK is physically set
for Channel 0. Refer to the specific DBK section for more information, if needed.
2.

Under Digital Option Cards, select the expansion down-arrow for the chosen Daq Device
channel, for example, P2 Channel 0. A “drop-down” will list the available digital DBK
options.
An alternative to using the expansion down-arrow to access the external connection drop-down
list, is to click within the text box. For example, in the following figure, after clicking on P2
Channel 5’s “None,” a drop-down list will appear, like the one shown for Channel 0.

Configure System Hardware Screen Showing Digital Option Cards,
External Connection, P2 Channel Pull-down List for Channel 0
3. Select the applicable digital DBK card.
If the card has jumpers or switches, a related window will appear. Two examples follow. The first isfor DIP-switch and jumper settings for a DBK208. The other is for a DBK25 DIP-switch.

Examples from Setup Windows (These vary according to the DBK)
4.

If applicable, set the software DIP-switch and other settings (such as jumpers) to match the
hardware settings on the actual DBK(s).

5.

After all the settings are confirmed correct, select OK to return to the DaqView main screen.

6.

From DaqView, complete the channel setup, acquisition setup, and data destination setup foreach of the new DBKs.
Reference Note:
If needed, refer to the DaqView documentation for more information. Note that you canaccess PDF versions of documents from the data acquisition CD by using the <View
PDFs> button on the CD’s intro page.

This completes the software setup for digital DBK options.
DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual

968194

DBK Setup in DaqView

3-7

Setting Internal Clock Speed to 100 kHz
This section applies to DaqView users who are using one or more of the following DBK options inconjunction with a DaqBook/2000 Series Device, DaqBoard/2000, DaqBoard/2001, DaqBoard/2005 or acompact PCI counterpart of these boards; i.e., cPCI DaqBoard/2000c, cPCI DaqBoard/2001c, and cPCI
DaqBoard/2005c.
DBKs impacted at the time of this writing are: DBK12, DBK13, DBK15, DBK19, DBK52, DBK53, andDBK54.
Note: In DaqView’s Configure Systems Hardware window, after selecting DBK12, DBK13, DBK15,
DBK19, DBK52, DBK53, or DBK54 a message box should prompt you to select an internal clock
speed of 100 kHz.

A Message Box Regarding Specific DBKs and the 100 kHz Internal Clock Speed Setting

To select an “Internal Clock Speed” of 100 kHz:1.

Select the Acquisition Setup tab on DaqView’s main window.

2.

On the lower left corner of the window, under Scan Configuration,
click the Preferences button.
The Advanced Options window will appear (following figure).
Note: The Advanced Options box can also be accessed from theWindows pull-down menu.
3.

Under “Internal Clock Speed,”
select 100 kHz.

4.

Click the OK button to return to
DaqView’s main window.

The internal clock is now set for
100 kHz.

3-8

DBK Setup in DaqView

968194

DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s ManualDBK Setup in LogView

4

Overview …… 4-1
Setting up Analog DBKs …… 4-4
Setting up Digital DBKs …… 4-7

Overview
Most DBK card and module options provide for channel expansion and signal conditioning; however,some serve as power supplies, and others are no more than interfaces that allow the user to meet desiredconnection needs, for example, the use of BNC connectors.
For proper operation with LogBook systems, most of the DBK options must be configured, both physicallyon the DBK, and in the LogView program. All DBK configuration-related parameters can be found in the
program’s LogBook Hardware Configuration Window, sometimes referred to as a hardware tree. “Analog
Input” type DBKs will be under the P1 branch of the tree, “Digital Input” DBKs will be under the P2
branch, and analog and digital outputs [if applicable] will be under P3.
The following table, in addition to providing a brief description of DBK options, can be used to quickly
identify whether the DBK option is of the P1-Analog or of the P2-Digital type. DBKs that require nosoftware setup in LogView, or do not apply to LogBook systems are shown in a shaded row and have acomment regarding the status of “no configuration” or “not used with LogBook.”
DBK Reference for LogView Users
DBK

Description

Type

Comment

Interface

No configuration in LogView.

DBK1

16-Connector BNC Adapter Module

DBK24-Channel Voltage Output Card

P1-ANALOG

DBK4

2-Channel Dynamic Signal Input Card

P1-ANALOG

Set the Filter Mode to “On” or “Bypass.”

DBK5

4-Channel Current Output Card

P1-ANALOG

Not used with LogBook.

DBK7

4-Ch. Frequency-to-Voltage Input Card

P1-ANALOG(Note 1)

DBK8

8-Channel High-Voltage Input Card

P1-ANALOG

Select Input Voltage Range.

DBK98-Channel RTD Card

P1-ANALOG

Select the RTD Type (resistance).

DBK10

3-Slot Expansion Chassis

Expansion

No configuration in LogView.

DBK11A

Screw-Terminal & BNC Option Card

Interface

DBK12

Low Gain A/I Multiplexer Card

P1-ANALOG(Note 1)

DBK13High Gain A/I Multiplexer Card

P1-ANALOG(Note 1)

DBK15

Universal Current, Voltage Input Card

P1-ANALOG

Set RA and RB resistor settings.

DBK16

2-Channel Strain-Gage Card

P1-ANALOG(Note 1)

DBK17

4-Ch Simultaneous Sample & Hold Card

P1-ANALOGEnter Gain Resistor (RG) information.

DBK18

4-Channel Low-Pass Filter Card

P1-ANALOGEnter Gain Resistor (RG) information.

DBK19

14-Channel Thermocouple Card

P1-ANALOG

Select Thermocouple Type (J, K, T, E, etc.)

DBK20

Digital I/O Card, with screw terminals

P2-DIGITAL

Select Mode & Control Resolution (Note 2).

DBK21

Digital I/O Card, with DB37 maleconnectors

P2-DIGITAL

Select Mode & Control Resolution (Note 2).

DBK23

Isolated Digital Input Chassis

P2-DIGITAL

Select Control Resolution (Note 2).

DBK24

Isolated Digital Output Chassis

P2-DIGITAL

Select Control Resolution (Note 2)

DBK25

8-Channel Relay Output Card

P2-DIGITAL

Select Control Resolution (Note 2)

DBK30A

Rechargeable Battery Module

Power

No configuration in LogView.

DBK32A

Auxiliary Power Supply CardPower

No configuration in LogView.

Not used with LogBook.

No configuration in LogView.

Note 1: The “note 1” comment indicates that LogView’s Hardware/Configuration window is used to select the DBK; but
does not provide any other configuration options for that specific DBK.
Note 2: For the P2-DIGITAL type DBKs, Mode permits selection of “Input” or “Output.” The modes for DBK23, DBK24,
and DBK25 are pre-set. Control Resolution permits selection of “Individual Bits” or “Single Port of Bits.”

DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual

987693

DBK Setup in LogView

4-1

DBK Reference for LogView Users
DBK

Description

Type

Comment

DBK33

Triple-Output Power Supply CardPower

No configuration in LogView.

DBK34

Vehicle UPS Module

Power

No configuration in LogView.

DBK34AUPS / Battery Module

Power

No configuration in LogView.

DBK40

18-Connector BNC Analog Interface

Interface

No configuration in LogView.

DBK41

10-Slot Expansion Module

Expansion

No configuration in LogView.

DBK42

16-Slot 5B Signal Conditioning Module

P1-ANALOG

Select 5B Modules.

DBK43A

8-Channel Strain-Gage Module

P1-ANALOG

Can set CAL/NORM switch.

DBK44

2-Channel 5B Signal-Conditioning Card

P1-ANALOG

Select 5B Modules.

DBK45

4-Ch. SSH and Low-Pass Filter Card

P1-ANALOGEnter Gain Resistor (RG) information.

DBK46

4-Channel Analog Output Card

DBK48

16-Slot 8B Signal Conditioning Module

4 DAC
P1-ANALOG

Not used with LogBook.
*** See Special Case Table, page 4-3 ***DBK50

8-Channel High-Voltage Input Module

P1-ANALOG(Note 1)

DBK51

8-Channel Low-Voltage Input Module

P1-ANALOG(Note 1)

DBK52

14-Channel Thermocouple Input Module

P1-ANALOG

Select Thermocouple Type (J, K, T, E, etc.)

DBK53

16-Ch. Low-Gain Multiplexing Module

P1-ANALOG(Note 1)

DBK54

16-Ch. High-Gain Multiplexing Module

P1-ANALOG(Note 1)

DBK55

8-Ch. Frequency to Voltage Input Module

P1-ANALOG*** See Special Case Table, page 4-3 ***DBK60

3-Slot Expansion Chassis

Expansion

No configuration in LogView.

DBK65

8-Ch. Transducer Interface Module

P1-ANALOG*** See Special Case Table, page 4-3 ***DBK70

Vehicle Network Interface Mux. Module

P1-ANALOG

Refer to the DBK70 User’s Manual

DBK80

16-Ch. Differential Voltage Input Cardwith Excitation Output

P1-ANALOG

No configuration in LogView.

DBK81

7-Channel T/C Card, High-Accuracy

P1-ANALOG

Select Thermocouple Type (J, K, T, E, etc.)

DBK82

14-Channel T/C Card, High-Accuracy

P1-ANALOG

Select Thermocouple Type (J, K, T, E, etc.)

DBK83

14-Ch. T/C Card, High-Accuracy; uses
Connection Pod

P1-ANALOG

Select Thermocouple Type (J, K, T, E, etc.)

DBK84

14-Ch. T/C Module, High-Accuracy

P1-ANALOG

Select Thermocouple Type (J, K, T, E, etc.)

DBK85

16-Ch. Differential Voltage Module

P1-ANALOG*** See Special Case Table, page 4-3 ***DBK90

56-Ch. T/C Module, High-Accuracy

P1-ANALOG

Not used with LogBook.

DBK100

DBK100 Series; In-Vehicle T/C
Measurement System

P1-ANALOG

Not used with LogBook.

DBK200P4-to-P1 Adapter Card

Interface

Not used with LogBook.

DBK201P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Board

Interface

Not used with LogBook.

DBK202

P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Board, withTerminals & Locators for RC Filter

Interface

Not used with LogBook.

DBK203P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Chassis, withTerminals & Locators for RC Filter

Interface

Not used with LogBook.

DBK204

DBK203 with a CA-209 CE Cable Kit

Interface

Not used with LogBook.

DBK204c

DBK203 with a CA-209c CE Cable Kit

Interface

Not used with LogBook.

DBK205

P4 to 12-Slot Screw Terminal Adapter

Interface

Not used with LogBook.

DBK206

P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Board,
with Screw Terminals

Interface

Not used with LogBook.

Note 1: The “note 1” comment indicates that LogView’s Hardware/Configuration window is used to select the DBK; but
does not provide any other configuration options for that specific DBK.

4-2

DBK Setup in LogView

987693

DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s ManualDBK Reference for LogView Users
DBK

Description

Type

DBK207
DBK207/CJC
DBK208
DBK209
DBK21016-Channel, 5B Carrier Board
DBK207 with Cold Junction
Compensation
Relay Carrier Board, Opto-22 Compatible
P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Mini-Adapter Board
TM
Grayhill 70M-Series Mini-Module
Carrier Board.
Screw-Terminal & Exp. Card Module
16-Connector BNC Interface Module
16-Connector BNC Connection Module

P1-ANALOG
P1-ANALOG

Not used with LogBook.
Not used with LogBook.

P2-DIGITALInterfaceP2-DIGITAL

Not used with LogBook.
Not used with LogBook.
Not used with LogBook.

Interface
Interface
Interface

Not used with LogBook.
Not used with LogBook.
Not used with LogBook.

Rear Panels for use with DaqBoard/260,
DBK60, and LogBook/360.

Connector
Panels

No configuration in LogView.

DBK213
DBK214
DBK215
DBK601
thru
DBK609Comment

SPECIAL CASES – DBK Recognition in LogView for DBK48, 55, 65, and 85
LogView does not include the means to directly select the following DBK options. However, these DBKs will
still function fine with LogBook and LogView. To do so we get the system to recognize these devices byselecting a different, but related DBK option.

DBK48

16-Slot 8B Signal Conditioning Module

To use a DBK48 and its 8B modules with LogBook: Select DBK42 in LogView. This will recognize the
DBK48, but will identify it as a DBK42. For each 8B module, select the 5B module that exhibits the samemeasurement ranges; three examples follow:
For SC-8B30-01 select SC-5B30-01 as both have an Input Range of ±10 mV; and an Output Range of ±5V.
For SC-8B34-02 select SC-5B34-02 as both are Type 100 Ohm Pt; with an Input Range of 0°C to +100°C.
For SC-8B47-T-07 select SC-5B47-T-07 as both are a Type T Thermocouple, with an Input Range of 0°C to +200°C.

DBK55

8-Ch. Frequency to Voltage Input Module

A single DBK55 has the functionality of two DBK7 cards. When using a DBK55 with LogBook, select
DBK7 in LogView. This will recognize the DBK55, but will identify it as a DBK7. Next do one of thefollowing, as applicable:(a) If the DBK55 is set to the L sub-address, Select DBK7 (0) and DBK7 (1)(b) If the DBK55 is set to the H sub-address, Select DBK7 (2) and DBK7 (3)DBK65

8-Ch. Transducer Interface Module

To use a DBK65 with LogBook: First select DBK80 in LogView. This will recognize the DBK65, but will
identify it as a DBK80 (which has eight additional channels). Next do one of the following as applicable:(a) If the DBK65 is set to the L sub-address, use channels 0 through 7; and ignore the displayedunused channels (8 through 15).
(b) If the DBK65 is set to the H sub-address, use channels 8 through 15; and ignore the displayedunused channels (0 through 7).

DBK85

16-Ch. Differential Voltage Module

To use a DBK85 with LogBook, select DBK80. This will recognize the DBK85, but will identify it as a
DBK80.

DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual

987693

DBK Setup in LogView

4-3

Setting-up Analog DBKs
If you have not already done so, review the applicable DBK section to ensure that the DBK option is
physically set as desired. Note that certain DBKs do not require hardware or software configuration.
Understand your DBK’s physical configuration before attempting to set the device in
LogView’s Hardware Configuration window. For example, if you were configuring a
DBK4 in LogView, you would need to know the physical setup of jumpers JP7 and JP8
in order to properly set the Filter Mode for each channel.
Reference Note:
The LogBook User’s Manual (p/n 461-0901) contains a detailed description of LogView,
and should be referred to if you need to go beyond the basic setup information that follows.

Complete the following steps to set up analog DBKs in LogView.

1.

Open the LogBook Hardware Configuration Window by clicking the Hardware Configuration
button in LogView’s toolbar. A window similar to the following should appear.

Selecting P1, Analog IO, and a Mode of Single-Ended
2.

Select P1, Analog IO and verify that its mode is set to Single-Ended. See preceding figure.
The DBKs typically have a channel address set physically on the device, by either aswitch or a header. The channel designated in software must agree with the hardware
setting. Thus, in step 3 below, Channel 0 will only be used to select a specific DBK whenthat DBK is physically set for Channel 0. Refer to the specific DBK section for more
information, if needed.

3.

4-4

Select an available channel, such as P1_CH00, and assign it to the specific DBK option. As in theabove note, the DBK option’s physical channel must agree with the channel selected in LogView. In
the ongoing example we have selected one DBK4. Up to 8 DBK4s could be selected for P1_CH00.

DBK Setup in LogView

987693

DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual

Expanding P1_CH00 with a DBK4
4.

Configure the DBK option(s) as applicable for your situation. For example, when configuring
DBK4s, ensure the filter mode (“On” or “Bypass”) agrees with the setup on the actual card(s).

Setting the DBK4 Filter Mode for Channel 0 to Bypass
Note: Setups in software must agree with the physical settings on the DBKs. Refer to the applicable
DBK section for detailed information.
5.

Click the OK button to accept the settings.

6.

Click the Analog Input button to view the new setup in the Analog Input Channel Configuration
Window. Verify all channel numbers. Assign user labels as desired.
The analog input spreadsheet (see following figure) uses four tabs to group analog
input parameters. Always visible are the Physical Channel, User Label, On/Off, realtime Reading, Range, Units, and Channel Type columns.
Clicking a tab exposes one of the four sub-windows of parameters:••••

Storage
DBK Parameters
User Scaling
2-Point Calibration

If beneficial, adjust column width by placing the cursor on the line between
columns (in the column header) and drag the line left or right as needed; forexample -- to make room for a longer, more descriptive user label.

DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual

987693

DBK Setup in LogView

4-5

Analog Input Channel Configuration Window
7.

From the Analog Input Channel Configuration window, select the DBK Parameters tab to view thespecific settings for each DBK channel.
Some DBKs have settings that are physically set on the hardware via jumpers or
switches. In these cases, the designated parameter settings in LogView must agreewith those on the hardware. Setting one does not automatically set the other; inother words, you must make configuration settings in both software and hardware,
when applicable. For information regarding DBK hardware configuration, refer tothe specific DBK sections, as applicable.

8.

Ensure that the DBK parameters are correctly set at this time. If necessary, refer to the applicable
DBK section for an explanation of the parameters; for example, DBK4 programmable filter values.
You can resize the Analog Input Channel Configuration window by dragging its rightedge further to the right. This allows you to see up to four parameters for each channel.

When possible, use User Label names that closely resemble the Physical Channel
names. This practice makes channel identification easier to remember and helps
avoid confusion.
Example: If Physical Channel P1_CH01 was being used for an alarm, then Alarm-P101
would be a logical User Label.
A note regarding the Range column:
All LogBook channels and many DBK channels have a programmable gain amplifier (PGA) thatprovides multiple ranges. Adjusting the range allows you to zoom in or out on your signal for
maximum signal resolution for the range needed. If the Units and/or Scale (from the User Scalingtab) are changed, the available ranges are presented in terms of the new units. For example, if a user
scaling of ×20 is applied to a channel to convert volts to PSI (pounds per square inch), the available
range choices for that LogBook channel would be ±200 PSI, ±100 PSI, ±50 PSI, 0-400 PSI, 0-200
PSI, etc.

Some DBKs have hardware switches and jumpers for configuration. When using
such DBKs, corresponding parameters may need to be set in the LogBook Hardware
Configuration window.

4-6

DBK Setup in LogView

987693

DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s ManualSetting-up Digital DBKs
If you have not already done so, review the applicable DBK section to ensure that the DBK option is
physically set as desired. Note that certain DBKs do not require hardware or software configuration.
Understand your DBK’s physical configuration before attempting to set the device in
LogView’s Hardware Configuration window. For example, if you were configuring a
DBK23, you would need to know the physical setup of switch S1 in order to select thecorrect channel in LogView.
Reference Note:
The LogBook User’s Manual (p/n 461-0901) contains a detailed description of LogView,
and should be referred to if you need to go beyond the basic setup information that follows.

Complete the following steps to set up digital DBKs in LogView.

1.

Open the LogBook Hardware Configuration Window by clicking the Hardware Configuration
button in LogView’s toolbar. A window similar to the following should appear.

Selecting P1, Analog IO, and a Mode of Single-Ended
2.

Select P2, Digital IO and verify that its mode is set to Expansion Channels. See preceding figure.
The DBKs typically have a channel address set physically on the device, by either aswitch or a header. The channel designated in software must agree with the hardware
setting. Thus, in step 3 below, Channel 0 will only be used to select a specific DBK whenthat DBK is physically set for Channel 0. Refer to the specific DBK section for more
information, if needed.

3.

Select an available channel, such as P1_CH00, and assign it to the specific DBK option. As in theabove note, the DBK option’s physical channel must agree with the channel selected in LogView. In
the ongoing example we have selected one DBK4. Up to 8 DBK4s could be selected for P1_CH00.

Expanding P2, Digital IO_Bank 0 with a DBK20DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual

987693

DBK Setup in LogView

4-7

4.

Configure the DBK option(s) as applicable for your situation. For digital DBKs this typicallyconsists of selecting the correct location under P2, Digital IO.
Note: Setups in software must agree with the physical settings on the DBKs. Refer to the applicable
DBK section for detailed information.

5.

Click the OK button to accept the settings.

6.

Click the Digital Input button to view the new setup in the Digital Input Channel Configuration
Window. Verify all channel numbers. Assign user labels as desired.

Digital & Counter Input Channel Configuration Window
This completes the software setup for digital DBK options.
Reference Notes:

4-8

DBK Setup in LogViewo

The DBK sections contain parameter definitions and information regarding DBK
hardware and software settings.

o

The LogBook User’s Manual (p/n 461-0901) contains a detailed description of LogView,
which should be referred to if you need additional information regarding the out-of-thebox software.

987693

DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s ManualTroubleshooting

5

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), Handling Notice …… 5-1
Troubleshooting Checklist …… 5-1
Frequently Asked Questions …… 5-3
Customer Assistance …… 5-7
Please read through this chapter before calling for help. Many customers have solved problems without
factory assistance.
Reference Note:
A list of API error codes appears in the Programmer’s Manual included on your CD-ROM. Notethat API does not apply to LogBook.

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), Handling Notice
The discharge of static electricity can damage some electronic components. Semiconductor
devices are especially susceptible to ESD damage. You should always handle components
carefully, and you should never touch connector pins or circuit components unless you arefollowing ESD guidelines in an appropriate ESD controlled area. Such guidelines include the useof properly grounded mats and wrist straps, ESD bags and cartons, and related procedures.

Troubleshooting Checklist
For most problems, proceed through the following checklist. When applicable, be sure to follow ESD
prevention guidelines to avoid damaging components.
1.

Power. Check power and fuses to all affected units.

2.

If the System Parameters Need Reset. Cycle the power “off” then back “on.” This will often reset
system parameters to the correct values.

3.

Signal. Check signal lines and connectors. Connectors must be free of corrosion. All lines should
be undamaged and free of sharp bends and twists. Signal paths should avoid potential sources ofnoise such as high voltage and electromagnetic interference.

4.

Self-Test. Run system diagnostic tests to confirm the LogBook or Daq device is properly connectedto the PC.

5.

Software. Try to acquire data with the DaqView windows application if you are using a Daq device
or LogView windows application if you are using a LogBook. If you are unable to acquire data ineither DaqView or LogView and another program, a hardware problem is likely. If you can obtainreadings by enabling the input reading column, but cannot log data to disk, an interrupt problem isindicated.

6.

Interrupt. Make sure the interrupt selected matches the interrupt used by the parallel port [forLogBooks and DaqBooks] or the interrupt selected by the hardware switches [on the DaqBoard].
The program MSD.EXE (comes with DOS 6.0 and later) reports the interrupt usage of the computer.
In some cases, an interrupt conflict may arise due to a Windows printer driver stealing the interrupt.
For such a problem, you must edit the SYSTEM.INI file and remove lines loading the printerdrivers. In other cases, the hardware is incapable of accepting interrupts through the parallel port.

7.

Parallel port. Make sure the parallel port selected is the same as the port to which the LogBook or
DaqBook is connected. Also, make sure the correct protocol is selected. For Daq device users, Daq
device configuration or DaqTest.exe will verify this. Also see Parallel Port Troubleshooting Tips.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

967094

Troubleshooting Tips 5-1

8.

Software setup. Make sure the device selected in software matches the hardware being used. Verify
that setup parameters are correct for your application and attached DBK cards and modules.

9.

Power management. The POWER.EXE power management program that is used by some notebook
computers is known to affect proper operation of the parallel and PCMCIA ports. If you are havingsuch trouble, remove the line loading this program from your AUTOEXEC.BAT file.

10. Device drivers. Some computers are pre-configured for numerous device drivers in their
AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files. These drivers often conflict and can be a source oftrouble. It is helpful for diagnostic purposes to boot the machine and test the system with theminimum number of device drivers loaded.

Parallel Port Troubleshooting Tips
Note: Does not apply to LogBook
After completing the Test Hardware function within the Daq device Configuration control panel applet, if aconnection is not made, try the following troubleshooting tips:
Windows 95/98/Me/2000
1. Check the power supply to make sure power is applied.
2. Check the parallel port cable for tight connections.
3. Try all of the protocols listed in the Daq device Configuration control panel. The parallel port
might have a communication protocol other than standard or normal mode.
4. If you still have not established communications, go to Control Panel, System, Device Manager,
Ports, LPT1 and verify the following:(a) Under the General and Driver sections, make sure the parallel port is a standard parallel
port with a driver installed and that no resource conflicts are present. If no driver isinstalled or resource conflicts are present, you need to resolve these issues with yourcomputer manufacturer or information services department.
(b) Under the Resource section, make sure the parallel port has an interrupt level assigned.
If not, add one by unchecking the “Use automatic settings” button, selecting “Basic
configuration 0001” so the same base address is maintained but an interrupt level isadded, and double-clicking on the interrupt level so you can add the interrupt level.
Generally, 7 is reserved for parallel ports but pick one to avoid conflicts. Reboot thecomputer.
(c) If the parallel port is configured as an ECP parallel port and there are connection
problems, you need to access the BIOS and change the parallel port to a standard or
normal mode. You can generally access the BIOS by pressing F2 or Esc during bootingof the computer. You should see a message “Press F2 to enter setup.” Change the parallel
port mode from ECP to standard or normal. Reboot the computer.
(d) Windows/2000 users:(1) In the Device Manager’s list, expand “Ports (COM & LPT)”(2) Highlight “ECP Printer Port (LPT1)” and ‘right-click.’(3) On the Properties box that appears, select the “Port Settings” Tab.
(4) Select the radio-button option that reads, “Use any interrupt assigned to the port.”

5-2 Troubleshooting Tips

967094

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Windows NT
1. Check the power supply to make sure power is applied.
2. Check the parallel port cable for tight connections. Try all of the protocols listed in the Daq device
Configuration control panel. The parallel port might have a communication protocol other thanstandard or normal mode.
3. If you still have not established communications, go to Control Panel, Devices, Hardware Profiles,
Parallel Port and verify the parallel port drivers are installed. If the drivers are not installed, youneed to resolve this with your computer manufacturer. Also, check that the parallel port has aninterrupt level assigned to it by looking at the parallel port resources in the Daq device
Configuration control panel.
4. If it is necessary to add an interrupt level or to change the parallel port communication port, youneed to access the BIOS during computer booting. You should see a message that reads similar to“Press F2 to enter setup.” If the parallel port is configured for ECP or EPP, change it to standard
or normal; then reboot the computer.

Note: Most of these questions pertain to older devices.

Frequently Asked Questions

Q: What are the input and output signal levels on P2 and P3?
A: P2 and P3 are TTL compatible with high levels no greater than 5 volts and low signals at 0 volts or
ground.
Q: What DBK options require the SSH jumper on JP2 to operate?
A: The SSH jumper must be installed on DaqBook/100 Series devices, DaqBook/200 Series devices and
ISA-Type DaqBoards to operate the following DBK options: DBK2, DBK4, DBK5, DBK7, DBK17,
DBK45, DBK50 and DBK51. Daq PC Cards do not have a JP2, but will operate these cards as long as
power for these cards is available.
Q: How do I set a DaqBook/112 to measure single-ended vs differential analog input signals?
A: DaqBook/100, DaqBook/112, and DaqBook/120 models are set by JP4's position. DaqBook/200,
DaqBook/216, and all DaqBoard models and Daq PC Cards are set by software commands.
All Daq devices must be set to single ended mode in order for DBK options to operate.
Q: How do I set a DaqBook/100 device to measure bipolar (+5v to -5v) instead of unipolar (0 to 10v)
analog input signals?
A: DaqBook/100, DaqBook /112, and DaqBook /120 models are set by JP3's position and are unable tomix bipolar and unipolar input signals (unless using a DBK15 option). DaqBook/200, DaqBook /216,
all DaqBoard models and Daq PC Cards are set by software commands and are able to mix bipolar andunipolar inputs by channel.
Q: I am trying to measure differential signals, but my Daq device is not reading the signal correctly.
What could be wrong?
A: The Daq device must be configured to measure differential signals. Differential signals are measured byreading the signal at the high input with respect to common and then subtract the signal at the low input
with respect to common. In addition, common must be connected at the Daq device in order to measure
the differential signal accurately. If the signal being measured only has 2 wires, connect a 100 KΩ
resistor between low and common to provide a reference.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

967094

Troubleshooting Tips 5-3

Q: I can read analog inputs at the primary Daq device, but my ISA-type DBK option card doesn’twork. What could be wrong?
A: The analog DBK cards require power to operate. This power can be provided by the DaqBook or ISAtype DaqBoard (via JP1), DBK32A, or a DBK33. The following voltages [with respect to P1’s pin 7]
must be present to power up analog DBK option cards:•••+15 volts on P1, pin 21-15 volts on P1, pin 2+5 volts on P1, pin 1
Note: Daq PC Cards do not have power available. If all power is present, there could be a failure in the
DBK option or the Daq device. If the first channel of the DBK option can be read, but otherchannels cannot, then the failure is in the primary Daq device.
Q: How does the Daq P1 expansion bus work?
A: All Daq products have 16 single-ended analog inputs. Each of these analog inputs can be expanded to
16 additional inputs with DBK options, providing up to 256 analog inputs. The primary Daq device uses
4 digital output lines on P1 to multiplex the DBK option channels through each analog input of the Daq
device.
Channel numbers on the Daq device are numbered 0 through 15; and expansion channels are numbered
16 through 271. Since each Daq channel can have up to 16 option channels, multiple DBK options thathave 2, 4, or 8 channels can be multiplexed through one primary Daq device channel.
Q: How do I get analog outputs, other than the 0 to 5 volt analog outputs, from my DaqBook/100
Series device, DaqBook/200 Series device, or my ISA-type Daq device?
A: DaqBook/100 Series, DaqBook/200 Series, and ISA-type DaqBoard device analog outputs (12 bit D/Aconverters) are 0 to 5 volts using the internal -5 volt reference. For different or higher analog output
ranges (-10 to +10 volts max), you must provide and external reference voltage equal to the maximum
analog output value desired times -1 (-10 volts for 0 - 10 volt range).
This reference voltage must be applied to pin 10 for D/A channel 0 and pin 26 for D/A channel 1 withrespect to pin 28 or 29 on P1. JP2 on the Daq device must be set to DAC EXT for each channel used.
You cannot use the SSH line for smart DBK options (DBK2, DBK4, DBK5, DBK7, DBK17, DBK45,
DBK50 and DBK51) when using an external reference on D/A channel 1.
Failure to remove the SSH jumper on JP2 when applying an external reference voltage to D/Achannel 1 (pin 26) will result in damage to the Daq device.
Note: Daq PC-Cards do not have analog outputs.
Q: My computer uses ECP is that the same as EPP?
A: No. ECP (Enhanced Computer Port) is a different protocol than EPP (Enhanced Parallel Port).
•••

ECP will function with DaqBooks.
ECP will function with LogBooks.
ECP will work with WaveBooks only if,(a) the WaveBook has a 262-0301 rev b or later chip. Note that chip upgrades are available.
(b) the version of WaveView being used is higher than version 7.8.

Q: I cannot find where the software settings for the DBK7 and the DBK4 cards are located in
DaqView. Where do I find these?
A: After selecting a DBK4 or DBK7 card in "Configure Hardware Settings," a dialog box appears thatallows you to select the number of cards and the sub address settings. There is a <Config> button in
the lower right hand corner. After clicking on the <Config> button the software settings for thesecards can be set.

5-4 Troubleshooting Tips

967094

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Q: The DBK4 seems to kill my system. When the DBK4 is removed, the system functions properly.
Does this imply that the DBK4 is defective?
A: More often than not this indicates a lack of available power. The most common symptom of low
power is a "dead" unit. Failure to provide adequate power can damage one or more components inyour system, but more frequently, the system simply won’t work.
It is important that you calculate your system's power demand before connecting the DBK4, as you
may need an auxiliary power supply. Each DBK4 draws 2750 mW, which is high in comparison to
the power drawn by other DBK cards. As can be seen in the following table, when using a
DaqBook/100 Series product you will always need additional power, while other systems can typicallypower at least one DBK4 card.
Reference Note:
Refer to Power Management in the DBK Basics section, located near the front of themanual, for more information on calculating the system power demand for all your DBK
cards.

Available Power Chart — Supply to Expansion Devices
Product
Available Power
LogBook+5 VDC @ 0.10 A from P1-1, P2-18, P2-20, P3-20+15 VDC @ 0.15 A from P1-21+15 VDC @ 0.05 A from P3-19-15 VDC @ 0.15 A from P1-2
-15 VDC @ 0.05 A from P3-37

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DaqBook/100

2100 mW

DaqBook/112

2400 mW

DaqBook/120

2100 mW

DaqBook/200

4000 mW

DaqBook/216

4000 mW

DaqBook/260

4000 mW

DaqBoard/100A

3300 mW

DaqBoard/112A

3300 mW

DaqBoard/200A

3000 mW

DaqBoard/216A

3000 mW

DaqBoard/260A

3000 mW

DaqBoard/2000 Series& /2000c Series

5000 mW; 5 V at 1 A; ±15 V at 75 mA each (withexception of DaqBoard/2002 and /2002c)

DaqBook/2000 Series

15000 mW; 5V at 1 A; ± 15 V at 500 mA each

Daq PC-Card/112B

0 mW

Daq PC-Card/216B

0 mW

DBK32

7500 mW

DBK32A

15000 mW

DBK33

7500 mW

DBK34

5 A-hr in 12 V mode; fused at 8 A

DBK34A

5 A-hr in 12 V mode; fused at 8 A

967094

Troubleshooting Tips 5-5

Q: How do I calculate the total amount of power needed for all my DBK options?
A: You can calculate your power needs with the tables in Power Management, in the DBK Basics section
located near the front of this manual.
Q: The CA-134 cable does not work with my Daq PC-Card. Why not?
A: Daq PC-Cards Daq/112B and Daq/216B that have a serial number equal to or greater than S/N 151044
use cable CA-134. This cable’s latching connector does not work with the older PC-cards.
Daq PC-Cards Daq/112B and Daq/216B that have a serial number preceding 151044 require cable
CA-134Q.
Q: I cannot read signals with the DBK12 or DBK13. What could be wrong?
A: To measure single-ended signals with the DBK12 and DBK13:
1) the JP3 jumper on those boards must be set to SE (Single Ended)2) the signal must be connected to the analog input High terminal and Common.
When measuring SE signals, the Low input is ignored.
To measure differential signals with the DBK12 and DBK13:
1) the JP3 jumper on those boards must be set to DIFF (Differential)
2) the signals must be connected to the High, Low, and Common input terminals.
If only 2 wires exist for your signal, connect them to the High and Low inputs and install a 1K ohm
resistor between the Low and Common [in the area between the terminal strips and the electronics] on
the DBK12 or DBK13. The place to install the resistor is labeled by channel number and is designatedby the letter "L." The letter "H" designates where to install a resistor between the high and common
terminals if balanced inputs are desired.
Note: Cards are presently manufactured with 100K ohm resistors installed in the "L" locations.
Q: My DIP switch settings appear to be giving my DBK card an incorrect address.
A: There have been a few instances in which a DBK modification included replacing one type of DIP
switch with another; for example, replacing a slide-type switch with a rocker-type switch or a toggletype switch. Although the actual setting of “0” and “1” values remains unchanged for configuring an
address, using a “toggle-Type” switch diagram for a “Slide-switch” results in what looks like an
opposite setting, i.e., 0-0-0-0 would look like 1-1-1-1 if the diagram was not replaced.
The following example may help you determine if you have a “0 / 1” DIP switch reversal:
Example:If you have a 4 micro-switch DIP switch, an address of zero would require 0-0-0-0. Thus, regardlessof what your diagram may look like, the following holds true:
For a slide-type switch… the slides would all be toward “0.”For a toggle-type switch… the depressed part of the switch would be at “0.”For a rocker-type switch … the rocker-arm (like a standard light switch) would be toward the “0.”Please contact the factory if you believe your DIP switch documentation is incorrect.

5-6 Troubleshooting Tips

967094

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Customer Assistance
To report problems and receive support, refer to the contact information provided on the cover page of themanual. When you call, please have the following information available:• Hardware model numbers• Hardware serial numbers• Contents of your CONFIG.SYS, AUTOEXEC.BAT, and SYSTEM.INI files• Software version numbers (including DOS and Windows)• Type of computer and features• Results of performance tests
All equipment returned to the factory must be accompanied by an RMA# (Return Merchandise
Authorization number). Use original shipping containers or equivalent to prevent shipping damage.
Include the information above plus:• The name of a contact person who can discuss the problems encountered• The contact’s phone number• The return shipping instructions• All troubleshooting notes and comments on tests performed and all problem-related conditions
Note: Before calling for assistance, please take a few minutes to review documentation segments thatappear relevant to the problem conditions. Also, if you have not already done so, please look overthe FAQs and the Troubleshooting Checklist that are presented earlier in this chapter.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

967094

Troubleshooting Tips 5-7

5-8 Troubleshooting Tips

967094

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Dimensional Drawings
Chassis for Primary Data Acquisition Devices and Optional Modules
Note: With exception of the 11” x 8.5” x 2.63” category, either one [of two] dimensional drawings could apply to your device, depending on
the unit’s assembly date. Legacy chassis have notable grooves on the left and right sides of the enclosure. The modern chassis
have smooth surfaces. Refer to the associated drawing, modern or legacy, as applicable.

11” x 8.5” x 1.40” Category …… page DD-2

Two drawings provided: Modern Chassis and Legacy Chassis.

DaqBook/100, /120, /112, /200, /216; DBK1, DBK10, DBK23, DBK24, DBK30A, DBK43A,
DBK50, DBK51, DBK52, DBK53, DBK54, DBK84, DBK203, DBK204, TempBook/66;
WaveBook/512, WaveBook/512H; WBK10, WBK10H, WBK10A, WBK14, WBK15, WBK16,WBK1711” x 8.5” x 1.72” Category …… page DD-4

Two drawings provided: Modern Chassis and Legacy Chassis.

DBK34A, DBK70; LogBook/300; WaveBook/512A, WaveBook/516, WaveBook/516A,
DaqBook/2000A

11” x 8.5” x 2.63” Category …… page DD-6
One drawing provided.

DaqBook/2000E, DaqBook/2000X, WBK40, WBK41, WaveBook/516E

11” x 14” x 3.44” Category …… page DD-7

Two drawings provided: Modern Chassis and Legacy Chassis.

DaqBook/260, DBK60, LogBook/360

Dimensions for DBK Cards and Boards (excludes DBK46 and DBK200 Series) …… page DD-9
3.26” x 8.32” Category

DBK2, DBK4, DBK5, DBK7, DBK8, DBK9, DBK11A, DBK12, DBK13, DBK15, DBK16,
DBK17, DBK18, DBK19, DBK20, DBK21, DBK25, DBK32A, DBK33, DBK44, DBK45,
DBK81, DBK82, DBK83

Dimensions for DBK200 Series Devices …… page DD-10
DBK200
DBK201
DBK202
DBK203 Module (See 11” x 8.5” x 1.40” Category)
DBK204 Module (See 11” x 8.5” x 1.40” Category)
DBK205
DBK206
DBK207
DBK207/CJC
DBK208
DBK209Dimensions for Miscellaneous Components …… page DD-17
DIN-1 (DIN rail mounting kit for DBK206, /207, /207CJC, /208, /209) …… page DD-17
DIN-2 (DIN rail mounting for DBK209) …… page DD-18
POD-1 (for use with DBK83) …… page DD-19
TB-100 Terminal Connector Option (68-pin SCSI III, Screw-Terminal Board) …. Page DD-20
Dimensional Drawings

949794DD-1

Chassis for Primary Devices and Modules
11” x 8.5” x 1.40” Category, Modern Chassis

TOP VIEWREAR VIEW

LEFT SIDE
VIEW

FRONT VIEW

These dimensions apply to the following:
DaqBook/100, /120, /112, /200, /216
DBK1
DBK10
DBK23
DBK24
DBK30ADBK43A
DBK50
DBK51
DBK52
DBK53
DBK54
DBK203
DBK204
TempBook/66
WaveBook/512
WaveBook/512H
WBK10
WBK10HWBK10A
WBK14
WBK15
WBK16
WBK17
WBK25

RIGHT SIDE
VIEW

DD-2

949794

Dimensional Drawings

Chassis for Primary Devices and Modules
11” x 8.5” x 1.40” Category, Legacy Chassis

These dimensions apply to the following:
DaqBook/100, /120, /112, /200, /216
DBK1
DBK10
DBK23
DBK24
DBK30ADBK43A
DBK50
DBK51
DBK52
DBK53
DBK54
DBK203
DBK204
TempBook/66
WaveBook/512
WaveBook/512H
WBK10
WBK10HWBK10A
WBK14
WBK15
WBK16
WBK17

Dimensional Drawings

949794DD-3

Chassis for Primary Devices and Modules
11” x 8.5” x 1.72” Category, Modern Chassis

VENT SIDE
VIEW

These dimensions apply to the following:
DaqBook/2000A
DBK34A
DBK70
LogBook/300
WaveBook/516
WaveBook/512A
WaveBook/516A
WBK18
REAR VIEWTOP VIEWFRONT VIEWFAN SIDE
VIEW

DD-4

949794

Dimensional Drawings

Chassis for Primary Devices and Modules
11” x 8.5” x 1.72” Category, Legacy Chassis

These dimensions apply to the following:
DBK34A
DBK70
LogBook/300
WaveBook/516
WaveBook/512A
WaveBook/516A

Dimensional Drawings

949794

DD-5

Chassis for Primary Devices and Modules
11” x 8.5” x 2.63” Category, Modern Chassis

VENT SIDE
VIEW

These dimensions apply to thefollowing:
DaqBook/2000E
DaqBook/2000X
WaveBook/516E
WBK40
WBK41
REAR VIEWTOP VIEWFRONT VIEWFAN SIDE
VIEW

DD-6

949794

Dimensional Drawings

Chassis for Primary Devices and Modules
11” x 14” x 3.44” Category, Modern Chassis

VENT SIDE
VIEW
TOP VIEWFRONT VIEW

DaqBook/260
DBK60
LogBook/360

REAR VIEW

These dimensions apply to thefollowing:

FAN SIDE
VIEW

Dimensional Drawings

949794

DD-7

Chassis for Primary Devices and Modules
11” x 14” x 3.44” Category, Legacy Chassis

These dimensions apply to thefollowing:
DaqBook/260
DBK60
LogBook/360

DD-8949794

Dimensional Drawings

Dimensions for DBK Cards and Boards (excludes DBK46 and DBK200 Series)
3.26” x 8.32” Board Size Category

These dimensions apply tothe following:
DBK2
DBK4
DBK5
DBK7
DBK8
DBK9
DBK11A
DBK12
DBK13
DBK15
DBK16
DBK17
DBK18
DBK19
DBK20
DBK21
DBK25
DBK32A
DBK33
DBK44
DBK45
DBK80
DBK81
DBK82 (Note 1)
DBK83 (Note 2)

Note 1: DBK82, being significantly thicker than other boards, does not fit into 1-slot enclosures such as the DBK10 andthe DaqBook/216. DBK82 does fit into DBK41 enclosures and in drawer type products such as DaqBoard/260.
Note 2: DBK83 makes use of an external screw-terminal connector designated as POD-1 (see page DD-19).
Dimensional Drawings

949794

DD-9

DBK200 Series Boards

DBK200

DBK201DD-10949794

Dimensional Drawings

DBK202
Note: DBK203 and DBK204 are modules that house a DBK202 board. Refer to the 11” x 8.5” x 1.40” category for applicable dimensions.

Dimensional Drawings

949794

DD-11

DBK205
DBK205DD-12949794

Dimensional Drawings

DBK206

Dimensional Drawings

949794

DD-13

DBK207/CJC
These dimensions apply to the both the DBK207 and the DBK207/CJC.
DD-14

949794

Dimensional Drawings

DBK208

Dimensional Drawings

949794

DD-15

DBK209DD-16

949794

Dimensional Drawings

Dimensions for Miscellaneous Components

Dimensional Drawings

949794

DIN-1

DD-17

DIN-2DD-18

949794

Dimensional Drawings

POD-1 (for DBK83)

Dimensional Drawings

949794

DD-19

TB-100 Terminal Connector Option
68-pin SCSI III, Screw-Terminal Board

DD-20

949794

Dimensional Drawings

DBK Cards & Modules
Part 1 of 2

DBK Cards & Modules

DBKs included in Part 1 of 2

DBK1, 16-Connector BNC Adapter Module
DBK2, 4-Ch. Voltage Output Card
DBK4, 2-Ch. Dynamic Signal Input Card
DBK5, 4-Ch. Current Output Card
DBK7, 4-Ch. Frequency-To-Voltage Input Card
DBK8, 8-Ch. High-Voltage Input Card
DBK9, 8-Ch. RTD Card
DBK10, 3-Slot Expansion Chassis
DBK11A, Screw-Terminal and BNC Option Card
DBK15, Universal Current, Voltage Input Card
DBK16, 2-Ch. Strain-Gage Card
DBK17, 4-Ch. SSH Card
DBK18, 4-Ch. Low-Pass Filter Card
DBK20 and DBK21, Digital I/O Cards
DBK23, Isolated Digital Input Chassis
DBK24, Isolated Digital Output Chassis
DBK25, 8-Ch. Relay Output Card
DBK30A, Rechargeable Battery Module
DBK32A, Auxiliary Power Supply Card
DBK34A, UPS / Battery Module

957795DBK Cards & Modules

DBK Cards & Modules

DBK1

16-Connector BNC Adapter Module
Overview …… 1
Hardware Setup …… 2

DBK1 Configuration …… 2
JP4 Configuration in DaqBook …… 2

Software Configuration …… 2
DBK1 – Specifications …… 2

Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics located near
the front of this manual.

Overview
The DBK1 provides a convenient means of attaching analog input signals from BNC cables to a LogBook
or Daq Device via the P1 interface. Each of the 16 inputs has a switchable 100 KΩ bias resistor toaccommodate floating signal sources. The 16 inputs can be used as 16 single-ended inputs (channel 0 to15) or as 8 differential pairs (channel 0 to 7). The BNC inputs are grouped to reflect use in the differential
mode (ch 0, ch 8, ch 1, ch 9, ch 2, ch 10 ...) where channel 8 serves as the low-signal line of channel 0 andso forth.

DBK Expansion Options

886995

DBK1, pg. 1

Hardware Setup
DBK1 Configuration
Factory Default: 100KΩ Bias resistors are Enabled

The only configuration option is to enable or disable the 100 KΩ bias
resistors, 1 per channel. Two resistor networks (RN1 and RN2) contain theresistor elements that are switched by SW1 and SW2 DIP switches. The
rocker-arm switches must be depressed in the desired orientation: OPEN for
disabled (shunted). Default is enabled. Enable bias resistors to makedifferential measurements of signal sources with floating voltages. As
shown in the figure and silk-screened on the board,•SW1 controls channels 0, 8, 1, 9, 2, 10, 3, 11•

SW2 controls channels 4, 12, 5, 13, 6, 14, 7, 15

JP4 Configuration in DaqBook/100 Series
For DaqBook/100, DaqBook/112, and DaqBook/120 devices you must set the DaqBook’s JP4 jumper for
single-ended, or for differential input as needed. Refer to your DaqBook User’s Manual (p/n 457-0906)
for additional information.

Software Configuration
None Required. Treat as a direct signal connection in both DaqView and LogView.

DBK1 - Specifications
Name/Function: 16-Connector BNC Adapter Module
Connectors:
DB37 male, mates with P1
BNC connectors for signal input
Analog Input Connection: 1 BNC connector for each of 16 analog input channels
Dimensions: 221 mm wide × 285 mm long × 25 mm high (8.5” × 11” × 1.375”)
Weight: 1.3 kg (3 lb)

DBK1, pg. 2886995DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK2

4-Channel Voltage Output Card
Overview …… 1
Hardware Setup …… 2

Card Configuration …… 2
Card Connection …… 2

Software Setup …… 3
Use of CA-115 Cables and DIN5 Power Connectors …… 3
DBK2 – Specifications …… 4

This product is not used for LogBook applications.

Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics located near
the front of this manual.

Overview
The DBK2 provides the ability to generate precise, bipolar output voltages. The DBK2 connects to the
Daq device P1 port. Like other P1-compatible DBK cards, the DBK2 is addressed using one of 16 basechannels. Up to 4 DBK2s can share a single base channel for a maximum of 256 channels. The DBK2 cancontrol an array of external devices including programmable power supplies, proportional actuators, analog
indicators, and process controllers.
The DBK2 generates output voltages using a 4-channel 14-bit digital-to-analog converter (DAC). A
precision bipolar reference is used onboard to provide accurate and stable output voltages. Each output
channel is independently jumper configurable for either ±5 V or ±10 V operation. A 14-bit DAC can havevalues from 0 to 16,383 (a value of 8192 should produce a voltage of 0). Thus in the ±5 V mode, thevoltage out VOUT = [10 V × (DAC/16383)] - 5 V.

DBK2 Block Diagram

DBK Option Cards and Modules

886995

DBK2, pg. 1

Hardware Setup
Card Configuration
Factory Default: Voltage Range ±5V
The Daq Device channel and the output level must be configured.
A 6-position DIP switch provides for address selection. The card address refers to the Daq device basechannel. Any card address in the range of 0 to 15 is valid. The sub-address allows up to 4 DBK2s to sharea single base channel. Any sub-address in the range of 0 to 3 is valid. (With 4 local channels on a card and4 cards on each of 16 base channels, a maximum of 256 channels are possible.)

DBK2 Configuration Settings
The DIP switch uses binary weighted values. To select the desired address, set the corresponding switch
values to one. For example, if the desired card address is 11, switches 1, 3, & 4 should be set to one. To set
a switch to a value, depress the corresponding side of the rocker-arm switch.
Each local channel can be set for either ±5 V or ±10 V output. Four 3-pin headers (JP1 through JP4)
correspond to output channels 0 through 3. To configure a channel for ±5 V output, place the shunt jumper
across positions 1 & 2 (default setting) of the corresponding header (see figure). To configure a channel for±10 V output, place the shunt jumper across positions 2 and 3 of the channel header.

Card Connection
Output voltage connections are provided via convenient screw terminals or J1. Each terminal has an
adjacent analog common terminal for convenience. After all connections are in place, secure the wires tothe card for strain relief. Small nylon tie wraps (not included) work well for this purpose. For convenience,
there are also footprints on the board to accommodate BNC connectors.
DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration
Use of the DBK2 requires setting jumpers in DaqBooks/100 Series & /200 Series and
DaqBoards [ISA type].
1.

If not using auxiliary power, place the DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series or DaqBoard [ISA-type]
JP1 jumper in the expanded analog mode, as indicated for JP1 in the following figure.

Jumper Configurations On DaqBoard [ISA] and DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series
DBK2, pg. 2886995DBK Option Cards and Modules

Note: JP1, in the previous figure, is indicated in its default position. The default position is necessary to
power the interface circuitry of the DBK2 via the internal ±15 VDC power supply.

CAUTION
If using auxiliary power cards, DBK32A or DBK33, you must remove both JP1
jumpers entirely from JP1.
Reference Notes:oIn regard to calculating system power requirements refer to DBK Basics locatednear the front of this manual.

oRefer to the DBK32A or DBK33 Document Modules if applicable to yourapplication.

CAUTION
When using the SSH output, do not use an external voltage reference for DAC1.
Applying an external voltage reference for DAC1, when using the SSH output, will
result in equipment damage due to a conflict on P1, pin #26.
2.

Place the JP2 jumper in the SSH position.

3.

For DaqBook/100, DaqBook/112 and DaqBook/120 only, place the JP4 jumper in single-ended
mode.

DaqBook/2000 Series & DaqBoard/2000 Series
No jumper configurations are required for these 2000 series devices.

Software Setup
Reference Notes:
o DaqView users - Refer to Chapter 3, DBK Setup in DaqView.
o LogView users - Not Applicable.

Use of CA-115 Cables and DIN5 Power Connectors
CA-115 is a 6-inch cable with a male DIN5 connector on both ends. CA-115 is used to connect DBK32As
or DBK33s in parallel (when powered by a common power supply).

DBK Option Cards and Modules

886995

DBK2, pg. 3

DBK2 – Specifications
Name/Function: 4-Channel Voltage Output Card
Connectors: DB37 male, mates with P1. Screw terminals for signal output
Resolution: 14-bits (monotonic)
Output Ranges: ±5 V or ±10 V (jumper selectable per channel)
Accuracy: 0.05% of FS
Linearity: 0.02% of FS
Hysteresis: 0.01% of FS

DBK2, pg. 4886995DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK4

2-Channel Dynamic Signal Input Card
Overview …… 1
DBK4 Power Notice …… 2
Hardware Setup …… 3

Card Configuration …… 3
Card Connections …… 6
CE Compliance …… 6
DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration …… 7
DaqBook/2000 Series & DaqBoard/2000 Series …… 7

Software Setup …… 7
Hardware Description …… 7

Current Source (Transducer Biasing) …… 7
Signal Coupling ……8
Amplifier …… 8
Low-Pass Filter …… 8
Sample and Hold …… 8Power Management …… 8
Software Controls …… 9

DBK4 – Specifications …… 9
Accelerometer Tutorial …… 11

What is a Piezoelectric Accelerometer? …… 11
Accelerometer Specification Parameters …… 11
Physical Setup …… 13
Electrical Grounding …… 14
Practical Limitations ……15
Cable-Connector Handling Precautions ……15
Cable Driving ……16

Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements refer to the DBK4 Power Notice on page 2of this section and to DBK Basics located near the front of this manual.

Overview
DBK4 is a 2-channel signal conditioner for dynamic signals. The unit provides a means of interfacing thedata acquisition device with piezoelectric transducers that include, but are not limited to: accelerometers,
microphones, and force/pressure transducers. The DBK4 interfaces with the LogBook’s or Daq Device P1
connector.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

958293

DBK4, pg. 1

DBK4 Power Notice
DaqBook/100 cannot provide adequate power for a DBK4. For information regarding the use of powercards and power modules see Power Requirements in the DBK Basics section near the front of thismanual.

Power-Requirement Worktable

CAUTION

Quantity x milli-Watts = power required

Excessive power consumption can cause equipment damage.
Calculate system power requirements before adding a DBK4
to the system.

Note: It is important to carefully read this DBK4 power notice and othersections of the manual that apply to your LogBook or Daq device
system.
In comparison to other DBK cards, the DBK4 demands significant power.
It is important that you calculate your system’s power demand, as you may
need to add auxiliary power supplies. This document provides a worktablefor calculating system power demand.
To use the worktable: list the quantities of the applicable DBK options, andmultiply these by the mW value. Place the results in the Power column andadd them. The result is the total power required.
If the power required exceeds, or is close to the available
power, you must add a power module or card (for example
a DBK30A or DBK32A).

The following two charts provide information regarding available power.
A/D Available Power Chart
Product

Available

LogBook/300, /360 (Note 2)
DaqBook/100, /112, /120
DaqBook/200, /216, /260
DaqBook/2000A, E, X
DaqBook/2001, /2005
DaqOEM/2001, /2005
DaqBook/2020
DaqBoard/100A, /112A
DaqBoard/200A, /216A
DaqBoard/2000 Series
DaqLab/2000 Series
DaqScan/2000 Series
Daq PC-Cards

mW
5000
2100
4000
15000
10000
10000
7500
3300
3000
2250
10000
10000
0

Option
DBK1
DBK2
DBK4
DBK5
DBK7
DBK8
DBK9
DBK11A
DBK12
DBK13
DBK15
DBK16
DBK17
DBK18
DBK19
DBK20
DBK21
DBK23**
DBK24**
DBK25
DBK40
DBK41
DBK42**

Qty

x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x

mW
0
565
2750

x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x

135
420
455
560
0
455
455
485
1040
905
1085
200
50
50
10
10
10
0
0
35

DBK43A**

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

35

Auxiliary Power Supplies

DBK44

x

330

=

Product

Available mW

DBK45

x

1565

=

DBK32A

15000 (Note 1)

DBK46
DBK50**DBK51**
DBK52
DBK53
DBK54
DBK55
DBK65
DBK70**
DBK80
DBK81
DBK82
DBK83
DBK84
DBK85

x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x

2600
35
35
200
455
455
950
35
35
755
1060
1810
1810
1810
755

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

DBK90
DBK100

x

1400
300

=
=

DBK101x2700=

For information regarding
Battery and UPS Modules,
refer to the following sectionsof the DBK Options Manual:
DBK30ADBK34A

power

Total Power Required ⇒(Column Total)
Note 1: DBK32A provides an additional 15000 mW of power for Daq and LogBook
data acquisition systems. Its output is ±15 VDC. DBK32A is not to be
used for Daq PC-Cards.
Note 2: DBK2 and DBK5 are not to be used with LogBooks.
** Two asterisks indicate that the module has an internal power supply that is powered separately.
DBK4, pg. 2958293

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Hardware Setup
If using a DaqBook/200, DaqBook/216, DaqBoard/200A, or DaqBoard/216A that has a
serial number of 103350 or earlier, you must contact the factory for a hardware
upgrade (EO-1911) before using the DBK4.

Software calibration for each DBK4 requires a set of unique constants supplied on adiskette identified by a serial number matching the DBK4 card. To install these
constants, follow instructions on the “readme” file included on the calibration disk.

Card Configuration
Factory Defaults•

Current Level – 4ma•

Coupling – 10 Hz•

Current Source – On•

40Khz Filter – In-Line

Both hardware and software are used in configuration. This section focuses on the hardware. Jumpers andswitches are used to set: current source (current level and source enable/disable), filter bypass, signal
coupling, and channel addressing. It is best to remove power from the card to perform these selections.
The figure reveals the jumper and switch locations.
Note: The hardware jumper settings referenced in the following subsections are per-channel selections
unless otherwise specified.

DBK4, Board Layout (not to scale)

DBK Option Cards and Modules

958293

DBK4, pg. 3

Signal Coupling (JP2 & JP3)
The figure shows jumper settings for selecting AC coupling, 10 Hz or 0.1 Hz High Pass Filter (HPF), orDC coupling.
Signal coupling is application specific. 10 Hz HPF suits most applications for acceleration measurements
on “light” structures. When performing seismic measurements (or measurements on “massive" structures)the 0.1 Hz HPF rejects the DC bias component while preserving the low-frequency signals.

JP2 Default: 0.1 Hz

JP3 Default: 0.1 Hz

DC coupling may be used when making a voltage mode measurement.

CAUTION
When the input signal is DC-coupled, the current source must be deselected (Jumper JP4
and/or JP5 removed). Failure to do so could result in damage to the transducer.

Current Source for Transducer Biasing (JP4 & JP5)
The DBK4 provides a current source for transducer biasing. Bias current is selected (enabled or disabled)
via jumpers JP4 (channel 0) and JP5 (channel 1) as shown in the figure.

CAUTION
When the input signal is DC coupled, the current source must be “off-line” (jumper
removed) to protect the transducer. While DC coupled, the output voltage of the current
source can approach 30 V depending on the output impedance of the transducer.

DBK4, pg. 4958293

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Current Level (Transducer Biasing) (JP6)
Current level is not channel-specific. The level selected applies toboth channels. The figure shows the JP6 jumper settings for
current level. Most transducers operate with either 2 or 4 mA ofbias current. However, biasing at 4 mA allows the transducer todrive longer cables.

Reference Note:
For more information, refer to the Cable Driving section of the DBK4 Accelerometer Tutorial.

Filter Bypass (JP7 & JP8)
Jumpers JP7 and JP8 are used to enable or disable programmablefiltering for channel 0 and 1 respectively. This selection determines
the bandwidth of the signal to be processed. When disabled(bypassed) the DBK4 can process a signal with a bandwidth up to 40
kHz. The gain in bypass mode is greater than in the filter mode by afactor of 1.583. For example, When the PGA gain is set to 10, thefilter-mode gain is ×10 and the bypass-mode gain is ×15.83.

Main Channel and Sub Channel Selection
Up to 8 DBK4 cards can use 1 of 16 main channels.
Each DBK4 has 2 inputs; thus the input capacity is
256 channels (2 inputs × 8 cards × 16 main channels).
The DBK4 uses JP1 and SW1 for channel and subchannel selection. (Position s8 on SW1 is not used.)
The DBK4 card or a group of DBK4 cards (0-7) musthave a dedicated main channel. Do not intermix
DBK4 cards with other types of DBK cards in achannel. LogBook or Daq device will not function
properly if channel settings are in conflict.

DBK4 Channel Hierarchy
Record all channel settings and label the transducers for future reference.

JP1 on the DBK4 is a 2×16 header located on the far left side of the card. A shunt jumper setting on JP1
allows a card to reside in 1 of 16 possible main channels. Any main channel in the range 0-15 is valid.
The figure below shows that sub-switches s1 to s4 of SW1 can be set by binary values to equal the main
channel selection. This setting must match the jumper on JP1 so the onboard microcontroller knows theJP1 selection. The card then interprets and responds to only the correct card-related commands via P1.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

958293

DBK4, pg. 5

The DBK4’s sub-channel address is selected using switches s5 - s7 of DIP switch SW1 (located above andto the right of JP1). As a 2-channel card, 3 switches are used to select 8 sub-channel addresses. Therefore,
it is possible for each main channel to use up to 8 DBK4s. The figure below shows 16 switch settings forthe main channel and 8 settings for the sub-channel (card) selection.

Card Connections
The DBK4 connects to the LogBook’s or Daq device’s P1 port or a P1 port on a DBK Expansion Module.
For signal inputs, a BNC connector interface is provided for each channel. The DBK4 PC Board has a
microdot connector footprint that is wired in parallel with each BNC connector. The user is can customize
the input connector as needed. As a factory default, the DBK4 is not populated with microdot connectors.

CE Compliance
Special Cables and Connectors for CE Compliance
To insulate BNC connectors from high-voltage sources such as static charges that can enter the circuitry
via an exposed connector and cause ESD damage. Specific cables and connectors that must be used (asstated in the Declaration of Conformity), PVC dust caps (p/n CN-96) must cover all unused BNC
connectors. With dust caps removed, special coaxial cables with insulated end-connectors and rubber Orings(p/n 418-0800) must be used (see figure). Properly installed connectors and dust caps ensure that no
metallic surfaces are exposed.

DBK4, pg. 6958293

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration
Several setup steps of DaqBooks /100
Series & /200 Series devices and
DaqBoards [ISA type] are required to use
DBK4 cards in a system. Note that the
Daq PC-Card is configured in software; itcannot supply power to DBKs.
1.

If not using auxiliary power, place
the JP1 jumper in the expanded
analog mode (Analog Option Card
Use). In this mode jumpers are at
JP1’s –15 V and +15 V positions.

Note: This default position is necessary
to power the interface circuitry of
the DBK4 via the internal ±15
VDC power supply. If using
auxiliary power DBK32A or
DBK33, you must remove both
JP1 jumpers.

DaqBook/100 & /200 & DaqBoard [ISA]
Settings for the DBK4The DBK4 is power intensive; refer to the DBK4 Power Notice (DBK4 page 2) and toPower Requirements in the DBK Basics section near the front of this manual.
2.

Place the JP2 jumper in the SSH position.

CAUTION
When using the SSH output, do not use an external voltage reference for DAC1.
Applying an external voltage reference for DAC1, when using the SSH output, will
result in equipment damage due to a conflict on P1, pin #26.
3.

For DaqBook/100, DaqBook/112 and DaqBook/120 only, place the JP3 jumpers in bipolar mode.

4.

For DaqBook/100, DaqBook/112 and DaqBook/120 only, place the JP4 jumpers in single-ended
mode.

DaqBook/2000 Series & DaqBoard/2000 Series
No jumper configurations are required for these /2000 series devices.

Software Setup
Reference Notes:
o DaqView users - Refer to the chapter 2, DBK Setup in DaqView.
o LogView users - Refer to the chapter 3, DBK Setup in LogView.

Hardware Description
Current Source (Transducer Biasing)
Each channel has a constant-current source that can be jumper-set to 2 mA or 4 mA. The bias current issourced through the center conductor of a coaxial lead and returns to the DBK4 from the transducer’s case
via the outer conductor. The current source provides a dynamic load of more than 1.4 MΩ and has anegligible loading effect on the transducer’s output. If bias is not required, removing a jumper andcoupling the signals directly to the input preamplifier can disable the current source.
Note: Use the 4 mA for long cables, high peak voltages, and high signal frequencies.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

958293

DBK4, pg. 7

Signal Coupling
The input can be configured via jumpers to maximize the usable signal spectrum. The DBK4 provides
two, 1-pole High-Pass Filters (HPF) and one DC path. The HPF can be set to 0.1 Hz, 3 dB cut-off
frequency. In this case, the system frequency response is limited by the source characteristics. The HPF
can also be set to 10 Hz, 3-dB cut off frequency, for high-frequency measurements. The 10 Hz setting isuseful in attenuating setup-induced low-frequency signals that can reduce the dynamic range (e.g., whenusing tape recorders as signal sources).
Note: When using 0.1 Hz coupling, you should set the baseline (via software) to one-shot mode.
The DC path allows the DBK4 to be used in voltage-mode measurements that convey DC as well as AC
information. For example, when motion is measured with a DC LVDT, the transducer is biased with anindependent power supply and its output is referenced to ground.

CAUTION
JP4 or JP5, as applicable, must be removed to disable the current source whenever the
input is DC-coupled. Failure to remove JP4 or JP5, when the input is DC-coupled, canresult in transducer damage.

Amplifier
The DBK 4 includes a Programmable Gain Amplifier (PGA) with three gain settings (×1, ×10, and ×100).
The gain settings are set for each channel via software. These gain settings are performed at configuration
and remain unchanged during a measurement sequence. The PGA has a flat response up to 100 kHz for
in-band and out-of-band frequencies.

Low-Pass Filter
To protect the in-band components from distortion caused by aliases of the out-of-band spectrum, theDBK4 features a 12-pole programmable Butterworth Low-Pass Filter (BLPF). There are eight 3 dB cut-off
frequency (Fc) settings per channel, the lowest frequency is 141.6 Hz and the highest is 18 kHz. In
general, high order BLPF introduce amplitude and phase distortion near the 3 dB cut off frequency.
Limiting the measurement range can reduce this error. A typical measurement range is 70% to 80% of the
3-dB cut-off frequency.
For narrowband measurements, the anti-alias filter can be bypassed providing an extended bandwidth of
40 kHz. In this configuration, the channel has lower distortion and a gain factor of 1.583. This setup may
be useful when calibrating accelerometers with sinusoidal motion. However, in this case, special attention
should be given to external noise since high-frequency noise will be aliased into the signal band.
The switched capacitor clock must be turned on in software for the filter to work.

Sample and HoldThe card’s sample and hold amplifier samples all channels within a system (up to 256) within 50 ns of one
another and preserves their phase information. Measurement of transmissibility can be made between any
two of the 256 possible channels.
The Simultaneous Sample and Hold (SSH) is triggered on the first channel of a scan sequence; after which,
the A/D converter sequentially measures the output of each of the SSH amplifiers. In a scan sequence, thefirst channel should be a non-SSH channel. However, if the scan sequence contains only SSH channels thefirst channel will contain data taken in the sample mode. This data is inaccurate and therefore should bediscarded; however, the second sample (valid) can be a repeat of the first.

Power Management
The DBK4 has circuits for a variety of measurement environments. When not needed, the filters and/or
current source can be powered down via software. This feature can be useful in field units to reduceoverall power consumption.

DBK4, pg. 8958293

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Software Controls
Power management, the PGA, and the low-pass filter’s cut-off frequency are all software controllable.
These parameters are sent via the external address bus in the P1 connector to the DBK4. The microcontroller decodes the configuration message, sets the PGA and filter controls, and illuminates the onboard LED. However, if transmission errors are detected, the micro-controller flashes the LED and ignoresthe message. The error is cleared when an error-free message is received. At power up, the current source
and filters are powered off and the LED is off. The LED will remain off until the DBK4 is successfully
addressed for the first time.

DBK4 – Specifications
Name/Function: 2-Channel Dynamic Signal Input Card
Physical Specifications
Channels: 2
Signal Connection: 1 BNC connector per channel
Dimensions: 8.28" W × 3.25" H
Operating Specifications
Power Consumption (typical): 20 mA @ +5 V, 95 mA @ +15 V, 80 mA @ -15 V
Current Source:
Output Impedance: >1.4 MΩ
Compliance: 27 VDC
Current Levels: 2 & 4 mA
Broadband Noise: 0.3 µA RMS (Bw = 100 kHz)
Input Impedance: 150 kΩ
Gain:
Bypass Mode:
×1.583×15.83 ×158.3
×1
×10
×100
Filter Mode:
Input Ranges: ±5 V
±500 mV ±50 mV FS
Coupling: AC, DC
1-pole, 10 Hz HPF
AC:
1-pole, 0.1 Hz HPF
Input Signal/Noise: >96 dB (Bw = 100 kHz)
Filter(Typical):Distortion (typical)
Bypass Mode: The jumpers JP7 and JP8 in the 1-2 position disabling
the programmable low pass filter.
@ 100 Hz - 81 dB@ 1 kHz - 82 dB@ 5 kHz - 81 dB
Filter Mode: The jumpers JP7 and JP8 in the 2-3 position enabling the
programmable low pass filter. With the following cutoff
frequencies selected via software.
4.5 kHz cutoff frequency:@ 100 Hz - 79 dB@ 1 KHz - 75 dB
18 kHz cutoff frequency:@ 100 Hz - 68 dB@ 1 KHz - 68 dB@ 5 kHz - 58 dB*Note the filter mode measurements were taken at the +5 V range
with the software enabled switched capacitor clock and excitation.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

958293

DBK4, pg. 9

Cut-off(Fc):
18 kHz 9 kHz
4.5 kHz 2.25 kHz
1125 Hz 562.5 Hz 281.2 Hz 141.6 Hz
Flatness DC - 80% Fc: ±0.2 dB
Channel Matching DC - 80% Fc: Phase: ±6°
Accuracy Passband Center: ± 0.5 dB

DBK4, pg. 10958293

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Accelerometer Tutorial
This accelerometer tutorial covers the following topics. Page numbers refer to DBK4 document module
pages.
What is a Piezoelectric Accelerometer?......11
Accelerometer Specification Parameters......11
Physical Setup......13
Electrical Grounding......14
Practical Limitations...... 15
Cable-Connector Handling Precautions......15
Cable Driving......16

What is a Piezoelectric Accelerometer?
A low-impedance piezoelectric accelerometer consists of a piezoelectric crystal and an electronic amplifier.
When stretched or compressed, the two crystal surfaces develop a charge variation that is related to theamount of stress, shock, or vibration affecting the crystal. The amplifier outputs a corresponding signal
and transforms the sensor’s high impedance to a lower output impedance of a few hundred ohms. Besides
acceleration, such sensors can measure pressure and force.
The circuit requires only 2 wires (coaxial or twisted pair) to transmit both power and signal. At low
impedance, the system is insensitive to external or “triboelectric” cable noise. Cable length does not affectsensitivity.

The figure shows a simple sensor-DBK4 connection. The MOSFET is powered from a constant-current
source of 2 or 4 mA at 27 volts. In the quiet state, the MOSFET circuit will bias off at about 12 V. As thesystem is excited, a voltage develops across R and the crystal and is applied to the gate of the MOSFET.
This voltage will cause linear variation in the impedance of the MOSFET and a proportional change in bias
voltage. This voltage change will be coupled to the DBK4 input amplifier through the capacitor C. The
value of R and the internal capacitance of the crystal control the low-frequency corner. Units weighing
only a few grams can provide high-level outputs up to 1 V/g with response to frequencies below 1 Hz.

Accelerometer Specification Parameters
Noise in Accelerometers
The noise floor or resolution specifies the lowest discernible amplitude (minimum “g”) that can bemeasured. There are two main sources of noise:• Noise from the crystal and circuit inside the accelerometer. Some types of crystals, such as
quartz, are inherently more noisy than others. A good noise floor is 10 to 20 µV.
• Noise from electrical activity on the mounting surface. Since the signal is a voltage, 60 Hz orother voltages (induced or ground loop, etc) may interfere. The best protection is toelectrically isolate the accelerometer.
DBK Option Cards and Modules

958293

DBK4, pg. 11

Sensitivity
The sensitivity of an accelerometer is defined as its output voltage per unit input of motion. The unit ofmotion used is the “g”. One “g” is equal to the gravitational acceleration at the Earth’s surface, which is
32.2 ft/(sec)(sec) or 981 cm/(sec)(sec). The output is usually specified in millivolts per “g” (mV/g).
Sensitivity is usually specified under defined conditions (frequency, testing levels, and temperature), forexample: 100 mV/g at a frequency of 100 Hz, level +1 g, at 72°F.
While a given sensor model may have a “typical” sensitivity of 100 mV/g, its actual sensitivities may range
from 95 to 105 mV/g when checked under stated conditions. The manufacturer typically provides sensor
calibration values.
Transverse Sensitivity
An accelerometer is designed to have one major axis of sensitivity, usually perpendicular to the base andco-linear with its major cylindrical axis. The output caused by the motion perpendicular to the sensing axis
is called the transverse sensitivity. This value varies with angle and frequency and typically is less than 5%of the basic sensitivity.
Base-Strain Sensitivity
An accelerometer’s strain sensitivity is the output caused by deformation of the base due to bending in themounting structure. In measurements on large structures with low natural frequencies, significant bending
may occur. Units with low base-strain sensitivity should be selected.
Inserting a washer smaller than the accelerometer base under the base to reduce the contact surface area
can substantially reduce base-strain effects. This technique lowers the usable upper frequency range.
Acoustic Sensitivity
High-level acoustic noise can induce outputs unrelated to vibration input. In general, the effect diminishes
as the accelerometer mass increases. Using a light, foam-rubber boot may reduce this effect.
Frequency Response
An accelerometer’s frequency response is the ratio of the sensitivity measured at frequency f to the basic
sensitivity measured at 100 Hz. This response is usually obtained at a constant acceleration level, typically
1 g or 10 g. Convention defines the usable range of an accelerometer as the frequency band in which thesensitivity remains within 5% of the basic sensitivity. Measurements can be made outside these limits if
corrections are applied. Care should be taken at higher frequencies because mounting conditions greatly
affect the frequency range (see Mounting Effects below).
Dynamic Range
The dynamic measurement range is the ratio of the maximum signal (for a given distortion level) to theminimum detectable signal (for a given signal-to-noise ratio). The dynamic range is determined by several
factors such as sensitivity, bias voltage level, power supply voltage, and noise floor.
Bias Level
Under normal operation, a bias voltage appears from the output signal lead to ground. There are two basic
MOSFET configurations commonly used. One exhibits a 7-8 V bias and the second a 9-12 V bias.
Operation of the two circuits is identical except for the available signal swing. The low-voltage version
typically exhibits 5-10 µVrms versus 10-20 µVrms for the high voltage.
Thermal Shock - Temperature Transients
Piezoelectric accelerometers exhibit a transient output that is a function of a temperature’s “rate-ofchange”. This “thermal shock” is usually expressed in g/°C and is related to:• Non-uniform mechanical stresses set up in the accelerometer structure• A pyroelectric effect in piezoelectric materials—an electrical charge is produced by thetemperature gradient across the crystal.

DBK4, pg. 12958293

DBK Option Cards and Modules

This quasi-static effect produces a low-frequency voltage input to the MOSFET amplifier. This voltage isusually well below the low-frequency corner, but the effect can reduce the peak clipping level and cause
loss of data. This effect does not affect the accelerometer’s basic sensitivity or the data unless the thermal
shift in the operation bias level results in clipping. Where drastic thermal shifts are expected, use 12 V bias
models. The effect’s severity is related to the mass of the accelerometer. In 100 mV/g industrial units, theeffect is usually negligible. Using rubber thermal boots can reduce the effect significantly.
Overload Recovery
Recovery time from clipping due to over-ranging is typically less than 1 ms. Recoveries from quasi-static
overloads that generate high DC bias shifts are controlled by the accelerometer input RC time constant thatis fixed during manufacture.
Power Supply Effects
The nominal power supply voltage recommended by most manufacturers is 15 to 24 V. Units may be usedwith voltages up to 28 volts. Sensitivity variations caused by voltage change is typically 0.05%/volt.
Power supply ripple should be less than 1 mVrms.
Connector
This parameter specifies the connector type and size (4-48, 6-40, 10-32 coaxial etc) and the location on thesensor, i.e., top or side (usually on the hex base). Where there is no connector on the sensor, an integral
cable is specified with the length and the connector, i.e., integral 6-ft to 10-32.

Physical Setup
Mounting Effects
Adding an accelerometer to a test object may influence the object’s mechanical resonance and/or reduce
the resultant vibration level. The mass of the structure and accelerometer as well as the position on the
structure can affect the measurement. For example, an accelerometer with a small mass relative to a car’s
mass will affect measurements on the hood when placed directly in the hood’s center. The sameaccelerometer placed on the more massive frame will have little effect.
The resonance change in a simple spring-mass system caused by adding an accelerometer may beapproximated by:∆f = fn {1 - [m/(m - ma)]½}
Where:∆f = Change in Resonant Frequency
fn = Original Resonance Frequency without Accelerometerm = Spring Mass
ma = Mass of Accelerometer
Threaded Stud Mount
The preferred method for attaching an accelerometer to the test surface is by the threaded stud mount. Thismethod fuses the accelerometer and test surface. When the stud mount is impractical, an adhesive
installation is usually a good alternative.
Adhesive Mounts
Some accelerometers can be glued directly to the test surface. Others must use mounting adapters (bases).
These adapters are normally glued to the test surface and the accelerometers are stud-mounted to them.
When applying a layer of adhesive, keep in mind that the adhesive creates a new spring-mass system withlower high-frequency response. To avoid a thick glue line, Cyanocrylate adhesives work well because:• They cure quickly, within seconds.
• Glue lines can be kept ultra-thin by using glue sparingly and pressing the accelerometer to thesurface with adequate force.
• Cleanup is easy since these adhesives will dissolve with acetone.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

958293

DBK4, pg. 13

Removal of Adhesive Accelerometers
Many accelerometers and adhesive adapters have been damaged by improper removal. A safe removal
method is to torque the accelerometer or its adapter with a wrench using the flats provided. Adhesives are
generally weakest in the shear mode and will yield under steady torque.

Accelerometer Mounting

CAUTION
Never strike an accelerometer to remove it. The trauma will likely damage theaccelerometer and affect calibration.

Magnetic Mounting Adapters
Magnetic mounting adapters can attach accelerometers to ferromagnetic surfaces such as machinery andstructures where the sensor is to be moved quickly from place to place. The accelerometer is attached tothe magnet (usually by stud mount) and the assembly is then applied to the surface.
In general, use magnetic adapters with caution and never beyond 1 kHz. Expect response degradation in
proportion to accelerometer mass. To ensure the best accuracy from the magnetic mount:1.

If possible, attach the magnet to bare metal. Paint will lessen the holding force of the magnet and canaffect response.

2.

Clean mounting area to remove oil, grease and foreign matter, which could reduce the contact for astrong magnetic bond.

3.

Select a flat area to achieve maximum surface contact.

4.

Attach the magnet to the test surface CAREFULLY. Remember that the pull of the magnet rises
sharply just before contact with the ferromagnetic surface. This force could pull the assembly fromyour hand resulting in a severe metal-to-metal shock. This could over-range the accelerometer beyond
its maximum shock limit and damage it.

5.

If possible, calibrate the magnetic/accelerometer assembly.

Electrical Grounding
Case-Grounded Design
In case-grounded designs, the common lead on the impedance-matching circuit is tied to the accelerometercase. The accelerometer base/stud assembly forms the signal common and electrically connects to the shellof the output connector. Case-grounded accelerometers are connected electrically to any conductive
surface on which they are mounted. When using these units, take care to avoid errors due to ground noise.
Isolated-Base Design
To prevent ground-noise error, many accelerometers have a base-isolated design. The outer case/base of
the accelerometer is isolated electrically off ground by means of an isolation stud insert. The proprietary
material used to form the isolation provides strength and stiffness to preserve high-frequency performance.
DBK4, pg. 14

958293

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Practical Limitations
Mass Loading
The accelerometer mass should be less than 10% of the rigidly-coupled mass of the test object. The test
object should be rigid at the mounting point, such as a bearing housing rather than a sheet metal cover.
Upper Frequency Response
Piezoelectric accelerometers will attenuate below the low-frequency 3-dB point, but they will amplify at ornear their resonant frequency. The mounted resonant frequency of the accelerometer should be about fivetimes the highest frequency of interest (for ±0.5 dB accuracy). Refer to the frequency response data
supplied with each accelerometer to establish the usable range. For general surveys or broader tolerances,smaller multiples may be used. For example, for frequencies up to 1/2 the mounted resonance, sensitivity
would typically be 12% higher than nominal.

Cable-Connector Handling Precautions
Connectors
Clean the connector ends periodically with a stiff-bristle brush (such as a glue brush or small paintbrushwith clipped bristles) dipped in a solvent. This will remove metal slivers (which can peel off connector
threads and short across contacts), oil and other contaminants.
When connecting 10-32 or 5-44, thread the cables to sensor jacks. Do not use pliers to torque knurledcoupling nuts in place. Hand tightening is sufficient for most applications. If the nut tends to loosen under
severe shock or vibration, you may use a mild thread-locking compound. Use it very sparingly and apply
only to the male thread to avoid contamination of the electrical contact.
Because of their size, 10-32 (and smaller) connectors are relatively fragile. Always hold the transducer
steady and twist off the knurled coupling-nut. Never hold the coupling-nut and twist the transducer. Use
10-32 (and smaller) connectors only when necessary.
Cables
The weakest point on the cable assembly is at the intersection of the wire and connector; so, avoid stress at
this point. Sharp bends can overstress the conductors and insulation causing shorting or breakage.
The figure shows the preferred methods of cablerouting to the connector. The flexure occurs awayfrom the intersection point. Relative cable motion
at the sensor body or connector can cause erroneous
output signals at frequencies where cable motion is
amplified (cable “whip”). Miniature accelerometers
are especially susceptible due to their small size andlow mass. This problem is remedied by proper tie
down as shown. A “strain relief loop” will ensurethat cable flexure does not occur at the connector
when the cable is fastened to a stationary surface.
Accelerometer Connections
Triboelectric Noise
Triboelectric noise is caused by the potential developed in a flexing cable. The cable shield may rub
against the cable’s insulator, and the interior friction generates a charge that produces noise. The
triboelectric noise voltage or charge is coupled to the signal leads by inner conductor capacitance and may
be represented by a voltage source in series with a capacitance. In general, triboelectric noise is associatedwith bending of signal cables when low-frequency vibrations (below 10Hz) are being measured. If moving
or securing the cable alters the output compared to an external reference, triboelectric noise is a likely
suspect.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

958293

DBK4, pg. 15

Cable Driving
Operation over long cables is a concern with all types of sensors. Concerns involve cost, frequency
response, noise, ground loops, and distortion caused by insufficient current available to drive the cablecapacitance.
Coupling a short (e.g., 1m) adapter cable from the accelerometer to a long, low-cost cable like RG-58U or
RG-62U with BNC connectors can reduce the cost of long cables. Since most cable failures occur at theaccelerometer connection where vibration is the greatest, only the short adapter cable would needreplacement.
Capacitive loading in long cables acts like a low-pass, second-order filter and can attenuate or amplify
high-frequency signals depending on the output impedance of the accelerometer electronics. Generally thisis not a problem with low-frequency vibration (10 Hz to 2000 Hz). For measurements above 2000 Hz andcables longer than 100 ft, the possibility of high-frequency amplification or attenuation should beconsidered.
The DBK4 constant-current source provides 2 or 4 mA to integral electronics. Use the higher current
setting (4 mA) for long cables, high peak voltages, and high signal frequencies.
The maximum frequency that can be transmitted over a given length of cable is a function of both the cablecapacitance and the ratio of the maximum peak signal voltage to the current available from the constantcurrent source:

f =

K
⎛ V ⎞
⎟
2πC⎜
⎝ Icc − Ib ⎠Drive Current
(mA)
2
2
2
4
4
4

DBK4, pg. 16

Where:
f = Maximum frequency in Hz
9
K = 3.45 ×10 (K is the scale factor to convert Farads to picoFarads andAmperes to milliAmperes and a factor to allow cable capacitance tocharge to 95% of the final charge.)
C = Cable capacitance in picoFarads
V = Maximum peak measured voltage from sensor in volts
Icc = Constant current from current source in mA
Ib = Current required to bias the internal electronics, typically 1 mA

Cable Length@30 pF/ft (Ft)
10
100
1000
10
100
1000

958293Frequency Response to 5% ofMaximum Output Signal Amplitude±1V±5V
185 kHz37 kHz18.5 kHz
3.7 kHz1.85 kHz370 Hz550 kHz110 kHz
55 kHz
11 kHz5.5 kHz
1.1 kHzDBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK5

4-Channel Current Output Card
Overview …… 1
Hardware Setup ……. 2

Card Configuration ……. 2
Card Connection ……. 3
CE Compliance ……. 3

Software Setup ……. 4
DBK5 – Specifications ……. 4
This product is not used for LogBook applications.
Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements refer to DBK Basics located near thefront of this manual.

Overview

DBK5 Block Diagram
The DBK5 can control four 4 to 20 mA current loops. The card connects to the Daq Device’s P1 port anduses one of the Daq Device’s 16 base channels. Up to four DBK5s can share a single base channel for a
maximum of 256 channels. The DBK5 card neither sources nor sinks current; instead, it modulates current
in an externally powered loop. In this way, the DBK5 acts as a current-loop transmitter. The DBK5 iscompatible with both regulated and unregulated loop supplies, providing these supplies are within therange of 12 to 45 V and have a loop resistance that does not exceed 1.95 kΩ, according to the following
relationship:
VSUPPLY = VTRANSMITTER + (ILOOP * RLOOP)
where: VTRANSMITTER = 6 V, and ILOOP = 20 mA max
The DBK5 provides loop-current control through 12-bit digital-to-analog converters(DACs). The 12-bit range of 0 to 4095 corresponds with 0 to 100% of full-span and an
output of 4 to 20 mA. As shown in the table, the current output IOUT = 4 mA +(DAC/4095 × 16 mA). Thus, the DAC values for currents between 4 and 20 mA is
equal to 255.94 × (IOUT - 4 mA).

DBK Option Cards and Modules

879895

DAC
0
...
1000
...
4095

mA
4
...
7.9
...
20

DBK5, pg. 1

The 4 channels are optically isolated from the Daq Device and from each other. Isolation allows the loop
voltages to float beyond the Daq Device’s common mode range. An externally powered loop allows the
DBK5 to continue to modulate the loop current in the event of a fault or power loss in the Daq Device. If
the loop is powered-up before the Daq Device, the DBK5 will maintain the loop current at 4 mA. After afault, the DBK5 will maintain the loop current at the last level set.

Hardware Setup
Card Configuration
Up to four DBK5 cards can be assigned to a single Daq device channel. With 16 Daq device channels, 4cards per channel, and 4 inputs per card, up to 256 inputs are possible (16 x 4 x 4).
Each card must appear unique to the Daq device. Micro-switches 1 through 4 (On DIP switch S1) set thecard address for the Daq device channel. A card address can be set to a value in the range of 0 to 15,
inclusive. Micro-switches 7 and 8 set the sub address to a value of 0, 1, 2, or 3 to distinguish one cardfrom another, for a given Daq device channel.
Both addresses are determined by binary-weighted values of the micro-switches. In the following figure
the DIP switch is set for a card address of 15 since micro-switches 1 through 4 are in the “1” position. Thismeans the binary weights add up to fifteen (8 + 4 + 2 + 1). In the same figure the sub address is 3, since
micro-switches 7 and 8 are in the “1” position giving us 2 + 1. Note that micro-switches 5 and 6 are notused. Since addresses start at “0” instead of “1,” a card’s 15 / 3 address would mean that it is assigned tothe sixteenth Daq device channel and that it is the fourth card.

Switch Settings & Resulting Addresses
Switch 1-4
Settings

Configuration DIP Switch
Shown with a Card Address of
15 and a Sub Address of 3.

1

2

3

4

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

1

1

1
8

Resulting
Card
Address

Switch 7-8
Settings**

ResultingSub
Address

7

8

0

0

0

0

1

5

0

1

1

0

0

12

1

0

2

1

1

1

15

1

1

3

4

2

1

--

2

1

--

Weights associated with switches when set to “1”*Micro-switches 5 and 6 are not used.

DBK5, pg. 2879895DBK Option Cards and Modules

Card Connection
Current-loop connections are provided via dual screw terminal connections. The + and - loop connections
are shown in the figure. Once all connections are in place, secure wires to the board at captive areas at theend of the board. Nylon tie wraps (not included) work well for this purpose.

(1) An external loop-voltage supply must be provided.
(2) To meet CE safety specifications, an edge guard (kit p/n 232-0806) must be attachedto the DBK5 card before insertion into a DBK41 expansion chassis. This guardhelps prevent accidental access to high-voltage circuits.

DBK5 Current Loop Configuration

CE Compliance
Reference Notes:
Should your data acquisition system need to comply with CE standards, refer tothe CE Compliance section of the Signal Management chapter.

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration
Use of the DBK5 requires setting jumpers in DaqBooks/100 Series & /200 Series devices
and DaqBoards [ISA type].
1.

If not using auxiliary power, place the JP1 jumper in the expanded analog (Analog Option Card
Use) mode. In this mode JP1 jumpers are positioned in the –15 V and +15 V positions.

Jumper Configurations in DaqBooks/100 Series & /200 Series devices and DaqBoards [ISA-Type]

Note: The JP1 default position, indicated above, is necessary to power the interface circuitry of the DBK5 via
the internal ±15 VDC power supply. If using auxiliary power cards DBK32A or DBK33 you must
remove both JP1 jumpers. Refer to Power Requirements in the DBK Basics section and to the DBK32A
and DBK33 sections of this manual.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

879895

DBK5, pg. 3

CAUTION
When using the SSH output, do not use an external voltage reference for DAC1.
Applying an external voltage reference for DAC1, when using the SSH output, will resultin equipment damage due to a conflict on P1, pin #26.
2.

Place the JP2 jumper in the SSH position (see above CAUTION).

3.

For DaqBook/100, DaqBook/112 and DaqBook/120 only, place the JP4 jumper in single-ended
mode.

DaqBook/2000 Series & DaqBoard/2000 Series
No jumper configurations are required for these /2000 series devices.

Software Setup
Reference Notes:
o DaqView users - Refer to the DBK Setup section in the DaqView document.
o LogView users - Not Applicable.

DBK5 – Specifications
Name/Function: 4-Channel 4-20 mA Current Output Card
Connectors: DB37 male, mates with P1. Screw terminals for signal output.
Accuracy/Linearity: 0.1% FS
Resolution: 4 µA / LSB, monotonic
Hysteresis: 0.02% FS
Regulation: 0.05% FS
Compliance: RLOOP = (VSUPPLY - 6) / 0.020 max
Isolation: 500 V

DBK5, pg. 4879895DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK7

4-Channel Frequency-To-Voltage Input Card
Overview …… 2
Hardware Setup …… 2

Card Configuration …… 3
Card Connection …… 7
CE Compliance …… 8
DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration …… 8
DaqBook/2000 Series & DaqBoard/2000 Series …… 9

Software Setup …… 9
Hardware Function …… 9

Input Signal Conditioning …… 9Edge Selection …… 11
Debouncing …… 11
Frequency Measurement …… 11
D/A Conversion …… 12

Specifications - DBK7…… 13

Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics located near
the front of this manual.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

879895

DBK7, pg. 1

Overview
The DBK7 can be used for diverse frequency-monitoring applications. Typical uses include measuring theflow of liquids with a flowmeter and measuring rotation (rpm) with a shaft encoder. The monitored
process must generate a series of electrical pulses whose frequency is related to the desired variable.
Features of the DBK7 include:• Inputs can be analog (high or low level) or digital.
• Each channel has a programmable frequency range.
• Noise effects can be minimized by debounce, attenuation, and low-pass filtering.
• Up to 64 DBK7s can be used with a single LogBook or Daq device for a maximum of 256 channels.
The card’s basic function can be realized from the following block diagram. Each channel:• Conditions an input signal• Selects the signal’s rising or falling edge
• Debounces the edge
• Measures the signal’s frequency.
The D/A converter outputs a voltage from -5 V to +5 V to correspond with the selected frequency range.
The LogBook directs the card’s D/A converter to convert the data from the proper input channel.

Hardware Setup
CAUTION
DBK7 must be configured before connecting the card to inputs and outputs.
Failure to do so could result in card damage.
Hardware-related steps for setting up DBK7 include:•••

DBK7, pg. 2

Configuring the DBK7 onboard jumpers and switches for the application(see previous CAUTION).
Configuring the Daq device (see page 8)
Connecting the input cables to sensors and the output cable to a Daq device or LogBook.

988893

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Card Configuration
Several jumpers and one switch must be set on the DBK7 card to match both the system setup and thesignal-conditioning requirements. This section describes a typical configuration. The following tableindicates the factory default settings of each jumper. The below figure shows the location of the jumpers
and DIP-switch (S1).
Factory Defaults for DBK7 On-board Jumpers
Configuration

Jumpers

Applies to …
J1

Channel Selection, pg. 4

16 Channels• The default is channel 0• Up to 4 cards can share the same J1channel.

• See switch S1 information in regard tocard selection.

Input Circuit Selection, pg. 6• The default is Analog Input• Each jumper connects pins 1 and 2

JP3 and JP4

CH 0

JP23 and JP24

CH 1

JP43 and JP44

CH 2

JP63 and JP64

CH 3

JP1

CH 0

• The default is Attenuation Enabled

JP21

CH 1

• Each jumper connects pins 1 and 2

JP41

CH 2

JP61

CH 3

Attenuation Selection, pg. 6(reduced sensitivity)

Low Pass Filter Selection, pg. 7• The default is 100 kHz• Each jumper connects pins 1 and 2

JP2

CH 0

JP22

CH 1

JP42

CH 2

JP62

CH 3

DBK7 Board Layout

DBK Option Cards and Modules

988893

DBK7, pg. 3

Channel and Card Selection Configuration (J1 and S1)
Up to 4 DBK7 cards can connect to a single main channel. Thus, a 16-channel LogBook or Daq device
can connect to 64 DBK7 cards. Since each card has 4 input channels, a fully populated system can use 256
input sensors. To keep these inputs organized, the card is configured by physically setting a jumper (J1)and a DIP switch (S1).
•

J1 is a 24-pin (3×8) header requiring two pins in a row to be connected. Up to 4 cards can share thesame channel.

•

S1 is a 6-position DIP switch (positions 3-6 set the main channel). Each card sharing a main channel
can have one of four sub-addresses (card number) as set by S1 (positions 1 & 2).
J1, S1, and the software must all be set to the same channel.

Set the main channel and sub-address as follows:

DBK7, pg. 4

1.

Determine the main channel and card number for each DBK7 used. It may be necessary to check thesoftware setup and other cards in the system to avoid a conflict. Note that a DBK7 may share achannel with 3 other DBK7s. Each card sharing a LogBook or Daq device base channel must use aunique card number sub-address.

2.

Set the J1 jumper across the 1st and 2nd or the 2nd and 3rd pin of a row to the desired channel.
Refer to the silk screening just above the jumper for proper positioning (see previous figure).

3.

Set S1 DIP switches 3-6 (OC0 to OC3) to match the channel selected on J1, and verify both settings(S1 and J1) are correct (see previous figure).

4.

Set S1 DIP switches 1 & 2 (CRD0 and CRD1) to give the card a unique sub-address with the chosen
main channel. Any unused sub-address in the range 0-3 is valid (see following figure).

988893

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK7 Channel Configuration
Note: Each of the 16 main Daq device channels can support 4 DBK7 cards; and each DBK7 card cansupport 4 analog channels. Both J1 and S1 (3-6) select the main channel (they must match). S1 (12) selects the card. Every card must have a unique address of channel and card.
DBK Option Cards and Modules

988893

DBK7, pg. 5

Input Signal Conditioning Configuration
Hardware settings affect 3 aspects of signal conditioning:• Input circuit selection: analog or digital• Attenuation selection• Low-pass filter selection.
Input Circuit Selection
Each input channel can be set for the analog or digital circuit. Two jumpers must be set for each channel.
Select the input circuit for each input channel as follows:1.

Determine the best circuit type for each channel.
• The digital input circuit works best for DC-coupled signals where the low level is less than
0.5 V and the high level is above 2.5 V and the voltage does not exceed ±15 V. By using apull-up resistor, switches and relays can create the signal. Frequencies can be as high as
960 kHz. The digital input circuit does not attenuate or filter the input signal.

•
2.

The analog input circuit is AC-coupled and is sensitive to signals from 100 mV to 84 V p-p.
It also provides attenuation and low-pass filtering to reduce the effects of noise.

Position the input circuit jumpers for analog or digital (see figure). Verify that both jumpers for achannel are set the same (JP3 and JP4 for channel 0; JP23 and JP24 for channel 1;
JP43 and JP44 for channel 2; and JP63 and JP64 for channel 3).

Default
AnalogAttenuation Selection (Analog Input Circuit Only)
When measuring strong analog signals, the attenuator can reduce the input sensitivity and the effects ofnoise. If enabled, the attenuator reduces the input sensitivity by a factor of about 20.
Set the attenuation for each channel as follows:1.

Determine the best attenuation for each channel.
• Use attenuation and reduced sensitivity if the input signal’s peak level exceeds 1 V.
• Disable attenuation for full sensitivity if the input signal’s peak level is less than 1 V.

2.

For attenuation, position the jumper across pins 1 and 2. Attenuation is enabled (the default setting).
(See figure.)

Default
Attenuation Enabled(Reduced
Sensitivity)

3.
DBK7, pg. 6

To disable attenuation, position the jumper across pins 2 and 3.
The full-strength signal is used.
988893

DBK Option Cards and Modules

4.

Verify the jumper position for each input channel.

- JP1 for channel 0- JP21 for channel 1- JP41 for channel 2- JP61 for channel 3

Low-Pass Filter Selection (Analog Input Circuit Only)
The low-pass filter removes high-frequency noise that could otherwise fool
the DBK7 into detecting a higher frequency. To set the low-passfilter:1.

Determine the highest frequency you expect
to measure on each input channel.

2.

Select the next higher cutoff frequency (30 Hz,
300 Hz, or 100 kHz) for each corresponding channel(see figure Typical Sine-Wave Sensitivity vs Frequency
later in this section). Verify that the DBK7’s sensitivity
will accommodate the expected input signal strength.

3.

Set jumpers for low-pass filter selection.
- JP2 for channel 0- JP22 for channel 1- JP42 for channel 2- JP62 for channel 3

Default
100 kHz

Card Connection
After the DBK7 hardware is configured, the card can be safely connected to the signal inputs and to theprimary acquisition device. You can connect up to four sensors to the DBK7’s input BNC connectors.
A CA-37-x (or CA-131-x) cable is used to connect the card to a LogBook or Daq device [possibly throughan expansion module] via the card’s DB37 connector. Connection steps follow.

WARNING
Electric shock hazard! Do not exceed a sensor input of 30 Vrms (42 Vpeak, 84 Vp-p)
for analog or ±15 Volts for digital. Exceeding these values may present an electric
shock hazard that could possibly result in injury or death, in addition to DBK7
damage.
Connect the DBK7 card as follows:1.

Connect each sensor’s BNC connector to a mating connector on the card. Channel labels (CH0 toCH3) are printed just below the corresponding connector. Label each sensor with its corresponding
channel, card sub-address, and DBK7 input channel.

2.

For a single DBK7 card, connect one end of the P1 cable to the card’s male DB37 output connector.

DBK Option Cards and Modules•

For DaqBook applications - use a CA-37-1 cable•

For DaqBoard/2000 Series or /2000c Series boards - use a CA-37-1 with a DBK200 Series
adapter•

For DaqBoard [ISA type] boards - use a CA-131-1 cable•

For Daq PC-Card, use a CDK10 (expansion, power module) with CA37-1 and CA-134
cables.

988893

DBK7, pg. 7

3.

Connect the other end of the cable to the P1 port of the LogBook or Daq device. For multiple DBK7
cards, use a CA-37-x (or CA-131-x) cable to daisy-chain several cards or an expansion module. For
example, three DBK7s (or 2 DBK7s and an expansion module) can be connected to a LogBook or a
Daq device with a CA-37-3.

4.

For multiple cards from a Daq PC-Card, cable CA-134 must first connect to an expansion module (aCDK10 or a DBK41 with a DBK33 power card) then through a CA-37-x to the DBK7s.

Note: For longer cable runs, use a CA-113 to add 6 ft of cable length where needed.

CE ComplianceIf your data acquisition system needs to comply with CE standards, the DBK7 must be placed in a
DBK41/CE 10-slot analog expansion module that is connected to the LogBook or Daq device by a
CA-143-x cable.
Note that in the presence of 3 V/m RF fields, the following conditions must exist in order to meet CE
requirements:•

500 mVpp signals are required to maintain 0.1% accuracy.

•

Metal shells of the BNC connectors must be directly connected to the chassis ground in orderto maintain 100 mV sensitivity and 0.1% accuracy.

•

The host computer must be properly grounded.

•

The host computer and peripheral equipment must be CE compliant.
Reference Notes: If your data acquisition system needs to comply with CE standards
refer to the following:o The CE Compliance section of Chapter Signal Management.
o The DBK41 document module.

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration
Several setup steps of DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series
devices and DaqBoards [ISA type] are required to use
DBK7 cards in a system.
1.

If not using auxiliary power, place the JP1 jumper inthe expanded analog mode.

Note: This default position is necessary to power theinterface circuitry of the DBK42 via the internal±15 VDC power supply. If using auxiliary power(DBK32A/33), you must remove both JP1
jumpers. In regard to calculating system power
requirements refer to Power Requirements in the
DBK Basics section near the front of the manual.

DaqBook/100 & /200 and
DaqBoard [ISA] Settings for DBK7

CAUTION
When using the SSH output, do not use an external voltage reference for DAC1.
Applying an external voltage reference for DAC1, when using the SSH output, will
result in equipment damage due to a conflict on P1, pin #26.

DBK7, pg. 8988893

DBK Option Cards and Modules

2.

Place the JP2 jumper in the SSH position (See previous CAUTION).

3.

For DaqBook/100, /112 and /120 only, place JP3 jumpers in bipolar mode.

4.

For DaqBook/100, /112 and /120 only, place JP4 jumpers in single-ended mode.

DaqBook/2000 Series & DaqBoard/2000 Series
No jumper configurations are required for these /2000 series devices.

Software Setup
Reference Notes:
o DaqView users - Refer to chapter 2, DBK Setup in DaqView.
o LogView users - Refer to the chapter 3, DBK Setup in LogView.

Hardware Function
This section explains DBK7 functions that affect user settings to ensure the best performance. For setup
questions or noise problems, refer to the related section. The figure provides an overview of signal
conditioning function blocks and can be referred to for the following discussions.

Input Signal Conditioning
The DBK7 conditions the input signal in several ways to provide the best output accuracy. Reducing noiseand limiting the bandwidth are the first steps in the conditioning process and are done in hardware.
Software can further clean up the signal by selecting the cleanest edge to read and by setting a debounce
delay to ignore spurious signals.
Analog Input Signal Conditioning
The equivalent analog input circuit is shown in the figure. Input voltages should be at least 50 mV peakto-peak. The maximum analog input signal is 30 Vrms (42 Vpeak, 84 Vp-p). Stronger signals may
damage the DBK7 or present an electrical shock hazard.

When the input circuit jumpers are set for analog, the center conductor of the BNC connector is ACcoupled through a 0.33 µF capacitor to the attenuator. The outside conductor connects directly to ground.
With the attenuator disabled for full sensitivity, input-protection diodes limit the signal to about 1.5 Vp-p.
Larger signals will see an impedance of 6.7 KΩ (rather than 20 KΩ) in series with 0.33 µF. With theattenuator enabled, the input impedance remains 20 KΩ regardless of the input level.
After AC-coupling, attenuation and filtering, a comparator converts the input signal into a clean digital
signal. The comparator output is high when the center-pin signal is higher than the outside-conductor
signal (and low when the center-pin is lower). The comparator has hysteresis to reduce the effects of noiseby ignoring small signals.
DBK Option Cards and Modules

988893

DBK7, pg. 9

The following graph shows typical sine-wave sensitivity in peak-to-peak voltage vs frequency. Six
combinations of attenuation (on/off) and low-pass filtering (30 Hz, 300 Hz, and 100 kHz) are graphed.

Digital Input Signal Conditioning
The equivalent digital input circuit is shown in the figure. The
input signal may range from -15 to +15 V. Higher voltages may
damage the DBK7.
When the input circuit jumpers are set for digital, the outside(shield) conductor of the BNC connector connects directly toground. The center conductor is pulled up with 27 KΩ to +5 V
and then passes through a 2.7 KΩ protection resistor before being
detected by a Schmitt-trigger buffer with input-protection diodes.

The input thresholds are fixed TTL levels. Below 0.5 V (0.8 V
typical), the Schmitt-trigger buffer output is low. Above 2.1 V (1.6 V
typical), the buffer output is high. The 27 KΩ pull-up resistor allows
the digital inputs to sense switches or relays connected directly to the
DBK7 as shown in the figure. The debounce circuit can remove noise
effects of switching.

The input impedance for digital signals depends on the signal level. For signals between 0 and 5 V, theinput-protection diodes do not conduct, and the digital input impedance is just the 27 KΩ pull-up
resistance. For signals less than 0 V or greater than 5 V, the input-protection diodes conduct and theimpedance drops to about 2.4 KΩ. The figure shows the approximate digital-input current/voltage
relationship.

DBK7, pg. 10988893

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Edge Selection
The DBK7 determines the frequency by measuring the time between successive rising or falling edges of
the input signal. Which edge is electrically cleaner depends on the application and related components. If
rising edges are used, the edge-selection circuit does not modify the signal. If falling edges are used, thecircuit inverts the signal so falling edges appear as rising edges to the subsequent circuits. Throughsoftware, each channel can be independently set for rising- or falling-edge.

Debouncing
Debouncing is a process of ignoring signals too short to be real events. When a relay or switch closes, theelectrical contacts may not initially make good contact. Mechanical vibrations can occur, and contact ismade and broken several times stabilizing. Counting all these signals would yield too high a frequency.
The debounce circuit solves this problem by ignoring rising edges not preceded by a sustained low signal.
The sustain interval can be set in software to 0, 0.6, 2.5, or 10 ms for each channel. Debouncing may bedisabled (0 ms) for clean, high-frequency signals. Long debounce times will limit high-frequency response(e.g., a 10 ms debounce will limit the frequency to about 100 Hz). In general, use “0” (debounce disabled)for clean, high-frequency signals; increase the debounce as needed for noisy, low-frequency signals fromswitches and relays.
The figure shows the effect of 10 ms debouncing on a noisy signal. To be counted, a rising edge must be
preceded by a low sustained for at least 10 ms without any other edges. Rising edges a and f are counted
because they are preceded by low signal levels sustained for at least 10 ms (the debounce time). All otherrising edges (b, c, d, and e) are ignored. Any falling edge makes (or keeps) the debounced output low,
regardless of preceding edges. Thus, the DBK7 can detect short pulses even with debouncing.

Frequency Measurement
After debouncing, the signal’s frequency is ready to be measured. Frequencies are measured to 12-bit
accuracy between a minimum frequency (Fmin) and maximum frequency (Fmax). This frequency range canbe programmed individually for each channel. The limitations on F min and Fmax are:•

The frequency range must be within 0 to 1 MHz.

••

Fmax - Fmin must be at least 1 Hz.
Fmax / Fmin must be at least 100/99 (1.010101).

Based on F min and Fmax , the DBK7 measures the frequency by counting input cycles during a variable timeinterval. The length of the interval depends on the difference between Fmin and Fmax .
•For a wide range (when Fmin and Fmax are far apart), each bit of the 12-bit result represents alarge frequency change and can be measured quickly.

•

For a narrow range (when Fmin and Fmax are close together), each bit of the 12-bit result
represents a small frequency change and takes longer to measure.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

988893

DBK7, pg. 11

The following equation determines the time interval needed to measure a frequency:
Minimum Measurement Period (sec) = (4096 x 0.5 µs) [Fmax/(Fmax - Fmin)]In this equation: 4096 derives from 12-bit precision; 0.5 µs is the resolution of the DBK7’s timing circuits;
and Fmax / (Fmax - Fmin) is the ratio the measurement time must be increased to achieve 12-bit accuracy overthe selected range.
To see how the measurement period varies, consider two examples:•

To measure frequencies from 59 to 61 Hz, the measurement period is at least
4096 x 0.5 µs x 61/2 = 62.5 ms, or about 16 measurements per second.

•

To measure frequencies from 1 to 61 Hz, the measurement period is at least
4096 x 0.5 µs x 61/60 = 2.1 ms. Note that as the DBK7 only measures frequency once per
cycle, it would take from 1 to 61 measurements per second.

Thus, measuring frequencies over a narrow range takes longer than over a wide range as the ratio of
Fmax/(Fmax - Fmin). The actual measurement time is the sum of several items: the minimum measurement
period (from the equation above), the actual input period, and a variable processing time of 0 to 4 ms.
Note: If the Sequence Rep Rate is set faster than the measurement rate, multiple readings of thesame measurement will occur.
After the frequency (F) is measured to the required accuracy, it is scaled to a 12-bit number (D) for use by
the Digital to Analog Converter (DAC). This 12-bit number is determined by the formula:D = 4096 [(F - Fmin) / (Fmax - Fmin)]; where: 0 < DAC < 4096
If the measured frequency is Fmin, then the scaled result is 0. If the measured frequency were Fmax, then thescaled result would be 4096 but is limited to 4095. Measured frequencies below Fmin are scaled as 0;
frequencies above Fmax are scaled as 4095. The highest frequency that produces an accurate result is theone that converts to a DAC value of 4095; that is, Fmin + 4095/4096 (Fmax - Fmin) which is the same as
Fmax - 1/4096 (Fmax - Fmin).

D/A Conversion
The 12-bit scaled result is stored in the DAC to be read by the data acquisition system. Instead of having
four DACs with their associated circuits, the DBK7 shares a single DAC among the four channels. Using
the DAC this way makes the DBK7 more reliable, cost-efficient, and easier to calibrate. Each time the
LogBook or Daq device addresses a different DBK7 channel, the DAC supplies the corresponding voltage(Vout) according to the formula:
Vout = 10.0 (D/4096) - 5.0 V
Since DAC values (D) range from 0 to 4095, DBK7 output voltages range from -5.0000 to +4.9976 V.
Calibration for the DBK7 is automatic. When the DBK7 is initialized through software, its gain and offset
errors are measured. The output circuits are then adjusted so the LogBook or Daq device measurements
correspond to the DAC setting. The DBK7’s software-adjustable gain and offset can correct for small
errors in the DBK7 or the LogBook/Daq device. This automatic calibration eliminates the periodic needfor manual calibration.

DBK7, pg. 12

988893

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Specifications - DBK7
Name/Function: 4-Channel Frequency-to-Voltage Input Card
Input Channels per Card: 4
Maximum Cards per System: 64
Maximum Channels per System: 256
Input Connector: 1 BNC connector per channel
Connector: DB37 male, mates with P1
Frequency Ranges: (programmable) 0 Hz to 960 kHz
Output Voltage Range: -5 V to +5 V
Debounce Delays: (software selectable) 0, 0.6, 2.5, 10 ms
Measurement Rate: up to 500 per second per channel, 1000 per second total
Accuracy: 0.1%

Analog Input
Low-level:
50 mV typical (100 mV max) p-p sine wave @ 10 Hz to 100 kHz
Any edge of 50 (100 max) mV amplitude and 5 V/s rate.
Input impedance: AC-coupled (0.33 µF), in series w/ 20 KΩ to ground.
15 mV hysteresis.
High-level:0.75 V typical (1.25 V max) p-p sine wave @ 10 Hz to 100 kHz
Any edge of 0.75 V (1.25 V max) amplitude and 50 V/s rate.
Input impedance: AC-coupled (0.33 µF), in series w/ 20 KΩ to ground.
250 mV hysteresis.
Maximum Input Voltage: 30 Vrms (84 Vp-p)
Low-Pass Filters: (hardware selectable) 30 Hz, 300 Hz, 100 kHz

Digital Input
TTL-Level: 0.001 to 960 kHz.
Input Impedance: 27 KΩ pull-up to +5 V || 50 pF
V Low (“0”): 0.8 V typ, 0.5 V min
V High (“1”): 1.6 V typ, 2.1 V max
Hysteresis: 400 mV min
Pulse Width (high or low): 520 nsec min.
Maximum Input Voltage: -15 V to +15 V

DBK Option Cards and Modules

988893

DBK7, pg. 13

DBK7, pg. 14

988893

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK8

8-Channel High-Voltage Input Card
Overview …… 1
Hardware Setup …… 2

Card Configuration …… 2
Card Connection …… 2
CE Compliance …… 2
DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration …… 3
DaqBook/2000 Series & DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration …… 3
Daq Device Connection …… 3
Safe Mounting …… 3

Software Setup …… 3
DBK8 – Specifications …… 4
Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics located near
the front of this manual.
Note:

DBK8 has a footprint for installing a second DB37 connector, to accommodate input signals.
Pins 30 to 37 correspond to channels 7 to 0; pins 11 to 18 correspond to channels 15 to 8
(or low 7 to 0 in differential mode). This pinout [for the footprint] is the same as P1 for the 16 main
channels, with exception that the non-channel pins are not wired. Chapter 2 includes P1 pinouts.

Overview
The DBK8 reads voltages up to ±100 V from DC to 10 kHz. The inputs are balanced differential andreferenced to the LogBook or the Daq Device analog common. No external biasing resistors are used. The
input impedance of each DBK8 channel is 10 MΩ to minimize loading of the circuit being measured. Two
DBK8s can share the same base channel to allow a maximum of 32 DBK8s and 256 high-voltage inputs.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

888194

DBK8, pg. 1

Each DBK8 channel has 3 user-set voltage ranges: ±10 V, ±50 V, and ±100 V. The ranges are selected by
the placement of shunt jumpers on pin headers for each channel. While the channel-to-channel resistanceis 10 MΩ, there is no other inherent isolation between the channels. The common of the host computer has
a direct connection to the LogBook or the Daq Device analog common. Either side of any input channel is
5 MΩ from analog common.
The DBK8 has 3 attenuation factors.
• The ±100 V range attenuates the input by a factor of 20.
• The ±50 V range attenuates the input by a factor of 10.
• The ±10 V range attenuates the input by a factor of 2.
Note: The signal coming from the DBK8 into the LogBook or Daq Device does not exceed ±5 V.

Hardware Setup
Card Configuration
Factory Defaults: Voltage Range (each channel) - ±10V
Inputs from 1 or 2 DBK8s are multiplexed into 1 of the base channels.
Channel selection is made on 2×16-pin header JP1A by placing the shuntjumper on the pair of pins next to the chosen base channel.
The addressing scheme allows for 16 inputs on each analog channel. The
DBK8 is an 8-input card; and 2 DBK8’s can use the same channel if one
is configure for low channels and the other for high channels. Placing theshunt jumper on JP16 in the 2-1 position sets the card address for the
lower 8 channels (0-7) in an address group. Placing the shunt jumper on
JP16 in the 2-3 position sets the card address for the upper 8 channels (815).
Each of the 8 input channels has 3 voltage ranges that are manually
selected by the placement of a pair of shunt jumpers on a channel range
select header. It is important that both jumpers are placed on the samerange value or incorrect voltage readings will be received by the system.

Card Connection
The DBK8 is equipped with screw terminal connectors for easy access toall of the analog inputs. Connections are provided for 8 pairs of inputs
and 2 analog-commons. There is a high and a low terminal in eachchannel pair to maintain consistent polarity signs with voltage readings. For AC signals, the polarity isarbitrary unless multiple signals are being connectedwith an interest in channel-to-channel phase relationships. After all connections
are in place, captive areas are provided at the end of the DBK8 for securing thewires to the board. Nylon tie wraps (not included) work well for this purpose.

CE Compliance
Reference Notes:
Should your data acquisition system need to comply with CE standards, refer tothe CE Compliance section of the Signal Management chapter.

DBK8, pg. 2888194

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration
Use of the DBK8 expansion card with DaqBooks/100 Series & /200 Series devices and
DaqBoards [ISA type] requires 3 jumper settings.
1.

If not using auxiliary power, place the JP1 jumper in the expanded analog (Analog Option Card Use)mode. This is indicated for JP1, in the following figure.

JP1 Default
Analog Option Card

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA-Type] Jumper Settings for the DBK8
Note: JP1’s default position is necessary to power the interface circuitry of the DBK42 via the internal+15 VDC power supply. If using auxiliary power cards DBK32A or DBK33, you must remove
both JP1 jumpers. Refer to Power Requirements in the DBK Basics section, as well as to the
DBK32A and DBK33 sections of the manual.
2.

For DaqBook/100, DaqBook/112, and DaqBook/120 only, place the JP3 jumper in Bipolar Mode.

3.

For DaqBook/100, DaqBook/112, and DaqBook/120 only, place the JP4 jumper in Single-Ended
Mode.

DaqBook/2000 Series & DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration
No jumper configurations are required for these 2000 series devices.

Daq Device Connection
Several options exist for placement of the DBK8 card in a system. Because the inputs can be high-voltage,
the card should be physically secure and out of harm’s way. DBK8 will install in the 3-position DBK10chassis, 10-position DBK41 card cage, the card slot in either the DaqBook/112 or /216, or in a section of asnap-in mounting track (mounted to a secure surface), or used as an insulated holder for a loose DBK8.

Safe Mounting
Several options exist for placement of the DBK8 card in a system. Because the inputs can be high-voltage,
the card should be physically secure and out of harm’s way. The DBK8 will install readily in the 3position DBK10 chassis, the 10-position DBK41 card cage, or in a section of a snap-in mounting track
mounted to a secure surface or used as an insulated holder for a loose DBK8.

Software Setup
Reference Notes:
o DaqView users - Refer to chapter 2, DBK Setup in DaqView.
o LogView users - Refer to chapter 3, DBK Setup in LogView.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

888194

DBK8, pg. 3

DBK8 - Specifications
Name/Function: 8-Channel High-Voltage Input Card
Connectors:
DB37 male, mates with P1screw terminals
DB37 footprint, for signal inputs
Voltage Input Ranges: ±10 VDC, ±50 VDC, ±100 VDC; selection by jumper for each channel.
Input Impedance: 10 MΩ
Attenuation:@ 10 V, Vout=Vin/2@ 50 V, Vout=Vin/10@ 100 V, Vout=Vin/50
Output Voltage Range: ±5 VDC
Bandwidth: 15 kHz
Attenuation Accuracy: 0.5%
Offset Voltage: Typical: 0.5 mV; Maximum: 2.0 mV
Offset Drift : Typical: 4 µV/ºC; Maximum: 10 µV/ºC
Common Mode Rejection:

DBK8, pg. 4

Range

Typical

Min.

10 V

-68 dB-55 dB

50 V-65 dB-53 dB

100 V-63 dB-51 dB

888194

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK98-Channel RTD Card

Overview …… 1
Hardware Setup …… 2
Card Connection …… 2
Card Configuration …… 2
DBK9 Calibration …… 3
DaqBook /100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration …… 3
DaqBook/2000 Series & DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration …… 3
Software Setup …… 3
DBK9 – Specifications …… 3
Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics located near
the front of this manual.

Overview
Temperatures sensed by RTDs are attached to the LogBook or the Daq Device through the DBK9 RTD
expansion card.
Up to eight RTDs can attach to each DBK9 and up to 8 DBK9s can attach to the LogBook or the Daq
Device for measuring a maximum of 256 temperatures. The DBK9 card supports 3- or 4-wire RTDs andoperates by reading 3 voltages and using them in the following equation:
RTD = [Va - Vd - 2(Va - Vb) Rsense] / Vd

(Result in Ohms)

Where: Rsense = 100 Ω (a constant derived from the actual hardware)
The result of this equation is converted into a temperature via software (using a complex formula andlookup tables). The DBK9 features an on-board Programmable Gain Amplifier for measuring 100 Ω,
500 Ω, or 1000 Ω type RTDs. For each RTD, the DBK9 can measure temperatures in a range of-200 to +850°C.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

879895

DBK9, pg. 1

Hardware Setup
Card Connection
The DBK9 is equipped with screw terminals for the connection of 3-wire or 4-wire RTDs as shown in the
figure.

Card Configuration
Factory Defaults:

JP2 RTD Type: 100ohm
JP3 RTD Source Type: 100 ohm
Two aspects of card configuration are the channel address and the RTD type.
Channel Address Jumpers

Channel Group Select (JP4)
One or two DBK9s may be connected to each channel (2×8 signals × 16 channels for a maximum of 256
inputs). Since this is a daisy-chain type of interface, each card must appear unique to the LogBook or the
Daq Device. This is accomplished by setting the Channel Select jumper (JP1) and the Channel Group
Select jumper (JP4) of each DBK9. JP4 selects either Upper (8-15) or Lower (0-7) channels.
No two cards in a system are to have the same channel settings.

RTD Type Selection Jumpers (JP2 and JP3)
The DBK9 was designed to measure 100 Ohm, 500 Ohm, and 1000 Ohm RTDs (all 8 RTDs must be thesame type for each DBK9). The different RTD types can be selected by changing the RTD Type jumper(JP2) and the RTD Voltage Source jumper (JP3). The default settings are shown in the figure.
JP2 and JP3 must use the same setting.

DBK9, pg. 2879895DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK9 Calibration
The DBK9 is default-calibrated for a 100 Ω RTD. To use the
DBK9 with a 500 Ω or a 1000 Ω RTD, the user must calibrate
the card as follows:
1.

Purchase the resistors above for the given RTD type.

2.

Measure the resistor with a reliable meter, and record theexact value.

3.

Refer to the charts, and match up the proper temperature
with the measured Resistance.

4.

Connect the resistor to Channel 0 on the DBK9.

5.

Run DaqCal from the Windows support for DBK9.

6.

Adjust RP1 for the temperature that was found in thecharts.

7.

After the temperature is matched, the DBK9 is calibrated.

8.

Repeat this procedure to use a different RTD type.

RTD Type

Required Resistor*
100 Ω
374 Ω, 1.0%
500 Ω
1870 Ω, 1.0%1000 Ω
3740 Ω, 1.0%
* These resistors are theoreticalvalues that correspond to 795°C.

Note: Be sure JP2 & JP3
settings are correct for the RTD
type that is being calibrated.

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration
Use of the DBK9 expansion card with
DaqBooks/100 Series & /200 Series and
DaqBoards [ISA type] requires three jumper
settings.
1. If not using auxiliary power, place the JP1jumper in the expanded analog mode.
Note: This default position is necessary to
power the interface circuitry of the
DaqBook/DaqBoard Jumpers for the DBK9
DBK9 via the internal ±15 VDC power
supply. If using auxiliary power cards
DBK32A or DBK33, you must remove both JP1 jumpers. Refer to Power Requirements in the
DBK Basics section and to the DBK32A and DBK33 sections of the manual for more information.
2.

For DaqBook/100, DaqBook /112, and DaqBook /120 only, place the JP3 jumper in Bipolar mode.

3.

For DaqBook/100, DaqBook /112, and DaqBook /120 only, place the JP4 jumper in Single-Ended
Mode.

DaqBook/2000 Series & DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration
No jumper configurations are required for these /2000 series devices.

Software Setup
Reference Notes:
o DaqView users - Refer to chapter 2, DBK Setup in DaqView.
o LogView users - Refer to the chapter 3, DBK Setup in LogView.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

879895

DBK9, pg. 3

DBK9 – Specifications
Name/Function: 8-Channel RTD Measurement Card
Connector: DB37 male, mates with P1 pinout; screw terminals for signal connections
Configurations: 3-wire or 4-wire
Alpha: 0.00385
Inputs: 8 channels
Temperature Ranges: -200 to +850°C
RTD Excitation Current:
100 Ω

500 µA500 Ω

227 µA

1000 Ω

160 µA

Accuracy: ±1.5°C (wide band)
Resolution: 0.3°C
Range and RTD Type Adjustments: Jumpers on circuit board

DBK9, pg. 4879895DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK103-Slot Expansion Chassis

Overview …… 1
Hardware Setup …… 1
DBK10 - Specifications…… 2
Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics located near
the front of this manual.

Overview
DBK10 is a metal enclosure that holds up to 3 expansion cards. Cards can slide into their slots without
removing the signal connections. Two DBK10s are ideal for applications that require 6 or fewer DBK
cards. Multiple enclosures can be stacked to accommodate many cards. For applications that require morethan six cards, the DBK41 is recommended.
Note: Cards can be used alone without an enclosure if they are secured and protected as needed.
Note: DBK10 requires no software configuration; however, the installed analog DBK cards do.

Hardware Setup
The DBK10 has 3 card slots for easy access to the analog expansion cards. Set up hardware as follows:1.

Complete all DBK card configurations to fit your application and channel assignments.

2.

Attach signal input wires (with strain relief as needed) or BNC connectors before inserting card into
DBK10 slot.

3.

Secure card in slot by tightening screw and washer to hold card securely in place.

4.

Attach the card’s DB37 connector to the P1 connector with the appropriate cable(CA-37-x or CA-131-x) to daisy-chain all cards installed in the DBK10(s).

Installing a Card in a DBK10 Expansion Chassis

DBK Option Cards and Modules

879895

DBK10, pg. 1

DBK10 - Specifications
Name/Function: 3-Slot Expansion Chassis
Size: 11" long x 8½" wide x 1 3/8" high
Weight: 3 lb (empty); add 8 to 12 oz for each card
Capacity: Accommodates 3 DBK expansion cards
Material: Aluminum
Finish: Black, powder-coated

DBK10, pg. 2879895DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK11A

Screw-Terminal and BNC Option Card

Overview …… 1
Hardware Setup …… 2

DBK11A Connections …… 2
DaqBook and DaqBoard Configuration …… 3
CE Compliance …… 3

Software Setup …… 3
DBK11A - Specifications …… 4

Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics located near
the front of this manual.

Overview
DBK11A is a passive card that provides screw-terminal connections and optional BNC connections inplace of a 37-pin (DB37) connector; i.e., P1, P2, or P3. In addition to providing access to all 37 pins on a
DB37 connector, the card includes sockets for optional passive-filtering components.
In regard to the optional filtering aspect, the card provides connectivity between DB37 pins and screw
terminals while passing through the card’s prototyping area, as can be seen in the following figure. Thisregion of the DBK11A can accommodate resistors, capacitors, and custom wiring. The user can choose
component values to meet application requirements.

Note:

DBK11A is compatible with DB37 connectors, for example the P1, P2, and P3 connectors on
LogBook, DaqBook, and DaqBoard devices. The DBK11A card has footprints for 4 BNC
connectors that can be soldered onto the card.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

879895

DBK11A, pg. 1

Hardware Setup
DBK11A Connections
The DBK11A connects to a P1, P2, or P3 DB37 connector via a CA-37-x cable. The card has screwterminal blocks for easy access to analog inputs and outputs. Each screw-terminal has a numberthat corresponds to a pin number on the DB37 connector.
The DBK11A prototyping area, see figure, contains standard 0.1” hole spacing for the optional installationof user-customized circuitry.
BNC connectors can be soldered to the board at footprints labeled: CN0, CN1, CN2, and CN3. These will
have connectivity to J6 and J12, as indicated in the figure. The J6 and J12 terminals can be wired to theother screw terminals to provide BNC connection for designated P1 pins.

DBK11A Board Layout

Reference Notes:
Refer to chapter 2, System Connections and Pinouts, to verify the pin designations for P1, P2, or P3,
as applicable. The DBK11A screw-terminals are labeled 1 through 37. These numbers correspond
one-to-one with specific DB37 pins for P1, P2, and P3.
To make wire connections to the card’s terminal blocks:

DBK11A, pg. 2

1.

Refer to the applicable pinout (P1, P2, or P3) in chapter 2, System Connections and Pinouts.

2.

Using 14 to 26 gage signal wire, make the appropriate connections to the DBK11A terminal blocks.
The screw-terminal numbers 1 through 37 correspond directly with the P1, P2, or P3 pins, dependingon which DB37 connector applies.

3.

Once all connections have been made, secure all wires at the end of the DBK11A board. Nylon tie
wraps (not included) work well for this purpose.

879895DBK Option Cards and Modules

If you want to add your own custom circuit to the DBK11A:
The DBK11A includes spare terminals for optional circuitry, such as RC networks. The card includes
several hundred unconnected solder pads and signal paths to the analog input terminals [pins 11-18 and
30-37]. Note that the default circuit path is just a straight connection, with no options.
Optional RC filters can be located on the card to correspond with the DB37 pins for the 16 analog input
channels. Before adding components, drill out the 1/16” diameter jumper-removal holes.

DaqBook and DaqBoard Configuration
Due to the DBK11A’s simplicity and flexibility, no configurations are required other than those that may
depend on the nature of the signal source.

CE Compliance
Reference Note:
Should your data acquisition system need to comply with CE standards, refer tothe CE Compliance section of chapter 1, Signal Management.

Software Setup
Reference Notes:
o DaqView users - Refer to chapter 3, DBK Setup in DaqView.
o LogView users - No Setup in LogView.

Note: DaqView Users – The DBK11A is not listed in DaqView’s Hardware Configuration window;
however, to use the card you must configure the applicable DBK11A channel(s) for Direct Signal
Connect. When you select Direct Signal Connect, the applicable channels are made available on
the DBK11A, from within DaqView. Note that aside from the ability to read Analog accessed
through P1, the digital I/O window of DaqView can access a DBK11A connected to P2; and thecounter/timer window can access a DBK11A connected to P3.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

879895

DBK11A, pg. 3

DBK11A - Specifications
Name/Function: Screw-Terminal Card
Connector: DB37 male, attaches to P1, P2 or P3 connector
Wire Size Range: 14 to 26 gage
BNC Option: DBK11A includes 4 BNCs for optional user-soldered connections

DBK11A, pg. 4879895DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK15

Universal Current, Voltage Input Card
Overview …… 1
Hardware Setup …… 2

Card Configuration …… 2
Card Connection …… 3
DaqBook/100 & /200 and DaqBoard [ISA-Type] Configuration …… 4
DaqBook/2000 Series and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration …… 4

Software Setup …… 5
DBK15 – Specifications ……5

DO NOT adjust the potentiometers! Evidence of adjustment voids the factory warranty!

Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics located near
the front of this manual.

Overview
DBK15 uses a 16-channel multiplexer and a programmable gain input amplifier (PGA). Component
sockets accept resistors that configure each channel for current-to-voltage conversion or for voltage
attenuation. The differential signal input from the transducer must use 3 leads: high, low, and common.
When configured by appropriate resistors, the DBK15 can measure voltages up to 30 VDC or currents up
to 20 mA. Each of 16 input channels has a resistor “A” and “B” location. Installing various resistors inthese locations yields channel-to-channel flexibility. The DBK15’s input amplifier is software
programmable for ×1 or ×2 gain per channel, providing unipolar 0 to +10 V or bipolar -5 to +5 V ranges
per channel.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

889094

DBK15, pg. 1

Hardware Setup
DO NOT adjust the potentiometers! Evidence of adjustment voids the factory warranty!

Card Configuration
Factory Default: Input range of ±5V
1.

Determine the LogBook’s or Daq device’s Analog Input Channel for each DBK15
in your system. As few as one or as many as 16 DBK15’s may be connected toyour device. Since this is a daisy-chain type interface, each card must appear
unique. This is accomplished by assigning each card to a different Analog Input on
the LogBook or the Daq device.

2.

Locate the 16×2 pin header labeled JP1 near the front of the board. Note the 16
jumper locations on this header labeled CH0 through CH15 corresponding to the
LogBook’s or Daq device’s Analog Input Channels.

3.

Set JP1 jumper on the pins for your intended output channel (CH0-CH15, see
figure). Only one jumper is used on a single card. No two cards in the same
system can have the same jumper setting.

4.

On enhanced versions of this board, bias resistors have been installed between the channel lows andanalog common. If you have an early version of the board, you can still install bias resistors. The useof bias resistors is discussed in the Signal Management chapter.

5.

Determine values for RA and RB for each input signal channel. Standard RN55D (¼ watt, 1%, metalfilm) resistors or 22 gage bare wire (short) plug in pin sockets. See the following table.
Note that a multiplexed input in sampled data systems must have low impedance to allow for
accurate measurements. For 12-bit accuracy at 100 kHz, equivalent attenuator impedances should beless than 1 kΩ and signal sources must have impedances less than 1/4000 of the attennuator input
impedance. For example, a 2:1 attenuator using 2 KΩ resistors will have 1 KΩ of equivalent
impedance; but the source impedance must be less than 1/2 Ω (1/4000 of 2000) for 12-bit
measurement accuracy to be attained.

DBK15, pg. 2889094

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Input Range

RA

Gain

Polarity±5 VDC

10 Ω
Short
2 KΩ

Open

×1

Bipolar

2 KΩ

×1

Bipolar

2 KΩ

×1

Bipolar±20 mA

10 KΩ
Short

249 Ω

×1

Bipolar±20 mA

Short

124 Ω

×2

Bipolar

±2 mA

Short

1240 Ω

×2

Bipolar±10 VDC±30 VDC

6.

RB

Install resistors in RA and RB sockets for each channel as desired (see figures).

In voltage mode, RA and RB (installed by the user) form a resistor divider network. In current mode, RA isalways shorted, RB is shunted with a resistor. 8 channels can be configured alike with 16-pin, 8-resistor DIP-8
resistor networks. With no resistors, DBK15 provides 16 differential voltage inputs for +5 V full-scale inputs.
CL positions are used for bias resistors if necessary. Two differential measurement configurations can be used:floating or referenced differential. Refer to the Signal Management chapter for more information.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

889094

DBK15, pg. 3

Card Connection
1.

Connect the signal input wires to the appropriate screw terminals. The DBK15 is equipped withscrew terminal connectors for easy access to inputs and ground access points. Connectors areprovided for 16 differential inputs and are labeled by channel number and H and L for high and low
analog inputs. On board, there are 100KΩ bias resistors in the CL locations per channel (the CH
locations are not used). These resistors can be removed if desired.
The DBK15 card only supports differential inputs (not single-ended). Connect thehigh end of the signal to the High input and the low end to the Low input of thedesired channel. Ground referencing to Analog Common is important for optimum
accuracy.

2.

Use tie wraps (not included) and the board’s edge-holes to secure all wires in a way that will notallow mechanical stress to affect the signal connection. In other words, be sure to provide a degreeof slack, or “strain-relief.”

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA-Type] Configuration
Use of the DBK15 requires setting jumpers in DaqBooks/100 Series & /200 Series and
DaqBoards [ISA type].
1.

If not using auxiliary power, place the JP1 jumper in the expanded analog mode.
JP1

JP3

JP4

-15 V
-OCTOUT-OCLKIN+15 V
Analog Option
Card Use

BipolarSingle-Ended
Factory Default Factory Default

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard[ISA-Type] Jumpers for the DBK15

Note: The JP1 default position is necessary to power the interface circuitry of the DBK5 via the internal±15 VDC power supply. If using auxiliary power (e.g., DBK32A or DBK33), you must remove
both JP1 jumpers. Refer to Power Requirements in the DBK Basics section and to the DBK32A
and DBK33 sections as applicable.
2.

For DaqBook/100, DaqBook /112 and DaqBook /120 only, place the JP3 jumper in Bipolar mode.

3.

For DaqBook/100, DaqBook /112 and DaqBook /120 only, place the JP4 jumper in single-ended
mode.

Note: Analog expansion cards convert all input signals to single-ended voltages referenced to analog
common.

DaqBook/2000 Series and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration
No jumper configurations are required for these /2000 series devices.

DBK15, pg. 4889094

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Software Setup
Reference Notes:
o DaqView users - Refer to chapter 3, DBK Setup in DaqView.
o LogView users - Refer to chapter 4, DBK Setup in LogView.

DaqView Users: When DBK15 is used with DaqBoard/2000 Series or /2000c Series Boards, theInternal Clock Speed must be set to 100 kHz as described in the DaqView document module.

DBK15 – Specifications
Name/Function: Universal Current/Voltage Input Card
Input Connectors: Screw terminals for signal connections
Output Connector: DB37 male, mates with P1 using CA-37-x cable
Attenuation/Shunt Resistor Connector: Machine sockets accommodate standard ¼-watt resistors
Gain Ranges: ×1, ×2
Inputs: 16 differential
Voltage Input Ranges: ±5 VDC max
Current Input Range: ±20 mA max
Attenuator Resistors:
Accuracy: +1%
Temperature Coefficient: 100 ppm/ºC
Gain Accuracy: ±0.05% typ, ±0.25% max
Maximum Input Voltage: ±35 VDC
Slew Rate: 10 V/µs
Settling Time: 2µs to 0.01%
CMRR: 80 dB min
Non-Linearity: 0.002% typ, 0.015% max
Unattenuated Bias Current: 150 pA typ, 0.2 µA max @ 25ºC
Offset Voltage:±(0.5 + 5/G) mV @ 25ºC typ±(2.0 + 24/G) Mv @ 25ºC max
Offset Drift:±(3 + 50/G) µV/ºC typ±(12 + 240/G) µV/ºC max

Note: Specifications are subject to change without notice.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

889094

DBK15, pg. 5

DBK15, pg. 6889094

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK162-Channel Strain-Gage Card
Overview …… 1
Hardware Setup …… 2

Card Connection …… 2
Excitation …… 5
Card Configuration …… 6

Calibrating DBK16, for Daq Devices …… 9

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration …… 10
DaqBook/2000 and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration …… 10

Software Setup …… 11
GageCal Program …… 11

Example …… 12
Using the DBK16 with 3-Wire Strain Gages …… 13

Calibrating DBK16 and DBK43A for LogBooks …… 15

Overview …… 15
Calibration Methods …… 16
Procedures Common to All Calibration Steps (Required) …… 17
Nameplate Calibration and Manual Calibration …… 20
Channel Calibration Procedure …… 23
2-Point Calibration …… 26
Shunt Calibration …… 28
Creating a Units Conversion Transfer Function …… 30
Periodic Calibration Without Trimpots …… 31

DBK16 – Specifications …… 31

Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics located near
the front of this manual.

Overview
The DBK16 will condition signals from most types of bridge circuit configuration transducers that havea signal output of less than 50 mV. Strain gages and load cells are common types of these transducers.
For half- and quarter-bridge strain gages, the DBK16 can accommodate user-supplied bridge completion
resistors that complete the bridge circuit.
The bridge circuit must be complete for the DBK16 to operate correctly.

Each channel of the DBK16 offers a selectable 3-pole, low-pass filter with a user-set cut-off frequency.
Up to 8 DBK16 boards can be connected to each of 16 analog LogBook or Daq device base channels fora maximum of 256 input signals. Remote-sense terminals are used with 6-wire Kelvin connections.
The DBK16 provides an amplifier gain range of ×100 to ×12,500 for use with strain gages having 0.4 to
10 mV/V sensitivities. Most strain gages are specified for a full-scale value of weight, force, tension,pressure, or deflection with an output of mV/V of excitation. For example, a strain gage with a full-scale
rating of 1000 lb of tension might output 2 mV/V of excitation at full load. With an excitation of 10 VDC,
1000 pounds of load would produce an output of 20 mV.
The card’s 0 to 5 VDC offset and output-scaling permit nulling of large quiescent (inactive or motionless)loads and expansion of the dynamic range for maximum resolution. Typically, the quiescent output is nonzero. Prior to a force being applied, a mounted strain gage can be in a state of partial deflection resulting inan output. In the case of a tension gage, this output may be due to the weight of a hook or empty container.
DBK Option Cards and Module

879895

DBK16, pg. 1

Lower Channel
Upper Channel

V0Adj(Note 1)
Source (+)
Source (-)
Excitation (+)

Excitation
Regulator

Sensing (+)
Bridge (+)

1

2

BCR

Bridge (-)
Sensing (-)
Excitation (-)

2

These indicated lines connect to
Source (+) and Source (-) lines of
the Lower Channel Circuit.
BCR stands for Bridge-Completion
Resistors.

P1
G1

Gain
Adjust Offset
Adjust

G0

MUX

+

2

a

LPF

Gain
AdjustScaling
AmplifierfAC
Jumper-Input Gain
Amplifier
5 mV

Low-Pass Filter

JumperOutputChannelSelectHeader(JP1)

MUX

Filter Bypass
DC Coupling

2 Address Lines

Unity Gain
BufferVRef

Address
Recog.

S1

DBK16 Block Diagram

A wide-range excitation regulator is adjustable from 1.5 to 10.5 VDC with a current limit of 50 mA. The
DBK16 requires a 12 to 15 VDC external excitation voltage that can be supplied from the DBK30A battery
module or other user-supplied source.

Hardware Setup
CAUTION
Each regulator has a maximum current of 50 mA. The maximum amount of
excitation that can be provided by the DBK16 excitation regulator is represented by
the following equation:
VEXC[MAX] = 0.05 × RGAGE
Where RGAGE = the resistance of 1 element in the bridge circuit.
Exceeding the maximum allowed excitation can cause the DBK16 to fail.

Card Connection
For DBK16s, the strain gage is configured as a 4-element bridge. There are 4 legs in a bridge circuit; thequarter, half or full designation refers to how many elements in the bridge are strain-variable. A quarter
bridge has 1 strain-variable element; a half bridge has 2; and a full bridge has 4. Each DBK16 channel has
locations for bridge completion resistors. These resistors of fixed values are necessary to fill out the bridge
configuration.
In the following diagram, a 4-element bridge-type strain gage is referenced to the upper and lower channel
bridge completion resistor designations for the DBK16.
Bridge resistors are used in either the DBK16 or the strain gage,
but not in both at the same time.

DBK16, pg. 2879895DBK Option Cards and Modules

Connections are provided for Kelvin-type excitation. The excitation regulators stabilize the voltage at the
points connected to the on-board sampling dividers. Unless you run separate sense leads to the excitation
terminals of the strain gage, the voltage regulation is most accurate at the terminal blocks on the DBK16.
In a Kelvin-type connection, six wires run to a 4-element strain gage, and the excitation regulation is
optimized at the strain gage rather than at the terminal blocks. For high accuracy, this can be a worthwhileconnection for as little as 10 feet of 22 gauge lead wire.

Kelvin Excitation Leads

Full Bridge, Resistor Configuration for DBK16
The full bridge configuration makes use of all four elements of the strain gage. Whenusing a full bridge external strain gage (all four elements), the following applies to the
DBK16 on board resistor configuration:
Upper Channel – R10, R11, R12, and R13 are not installed.
Lower Channel – R22, R23, R24, and R25 are not installed.

DBK Option Cards and Module

879895

DBK16, pg. 3

Half Bridge, ( ∆R1↓ and ∆R2↑) ⇒ ∆EOUT↑ )Resistor Configuration for DBK16
The half bridge configuration makes use of two elements of the strain gage. When using a half bridge external strain gage
(two of four elements), the following applies to the DBK16 on board resistor configuration:
Upper Channel – R10 and R13 are to be installed.
Lower Channel – R22 and R25 are to be installed.
Note that other Half Bridge scenarios exist. The one illustrated applies to the equation:∆R1↓ and ∆R2↑) ⇒ ∆EOUT↑

3-Wire, Quarter-Bridge, Negative ( ∆R↑⇒ ∆EOUT↑) for DBK16
The quarter-bridge configuration makes use of one element of the strain gage. The three-wire, quarter-bridge can be
configured as “positive” or “negative.” The above figure represents the negative (minus) configuration. In this setup, themagnitude of voltage out is directly proportional to the change in resistance ( ∆R↑⇒ ∆EOUT↑). When using a quarter-bridge
external strain gage in the “negative” configuration, the following applies:
Upper Channel – R10 and R11 are to be installed.
Lower Channel – R22 and R23 are to be installed.
An external BCR is to be placed in the –EXC to R1 line (see previous figure).

DBK16, pg. 4879895DBK Option Cards and Modules

3-Wire, Quarter-Bridge, Positive ( ∆R↓⇒ ∆EOUT↑) for DBK16
The quarter-bridge configuration makes use of one element of the strain gage. The three-wire, quarter-bridge can be
configured as “positive” or “negative.” The above figure represents the positive (plus) configuration. In this setup, themagnitude of voltage out is inversely proportional to the change in resistance ( ∆R↓⇒ ∆EOUT↑). When using a quarterbridge external strain gage in the “positive” configuration, the following applies:
Upper Channel – R12 and R13 are to be installed.
Lower Channel – R24 and R25 are to be installed.
An external BCR is to be placed in the +EXC to R1 line (see previous figure).

Excitation
To supply excitation voltage to a single DBK16:
Connect J1 (terminals SRC+ and SRC-) to a source of filtered (not necessarily regulated) DC between
12 and 15 V.
To supply excitation to multiple DBK16s:
1.

Connect J1 (terminals SRC+ and SRC-)
to a source of filtered (not necessarily
regulated) DC between 12 and 15 V.

2.

Connect J2 of the powered DBK16 to J1of the next DBK16 (see figure). The
excitation power terminals are wired inparallel to daisy-chain multiple DBK16s(in systems with more than 2transducers).

The user-supplied excitation source is attached to a voltage regulator in the DBK16 circuitry. This
regulator provides the excitation to the actual transducer (there is a separate regulator for each transducer,
hence two regulators per DBK16). Each regulator has a maximum current of 50 mA. The maximum
amount of excitation that can be provided by the DBK16 excitation regulator is represented by thefollowing equation:
VEXC[MAX] = 0.05 × RGAGE
Where RGAGE = the resistance of 1 element in the bridge circuit.

DBK Option Cards and Module

879895

DBK16, pg. 5

The user-supplied excitation source should provide adequate current levels for all the DBK16s that are
powered. The minimum current required for the user-supplied excitation source for each transducer(2 per DBK16) is:
IMIN = Excitation voltage/R + 5 mA (where R = the resistance of 1 element in the bridge
circuit)
The user-supplied excitation source must be 12 to 15 VDC and connected with the proper polarity.
Enhanced DBK16 cards contain two additional jumpers (JP6 and JP7). Their configuration determines
whether the channel excitation regulator’s power source is external (default) or internal. Review thefollowing note and CAUTION prior to selecting the internal power source.
 JP6 – Selects the upper channel’s source. Default is external.
 JP7 – Selects the lower channel’s source. Default is external.
It is possible to power excitation regulators from an internal +15 V on the LogBook’s
or Daq device’s P1 if no other DBKs are being used. On enhanced DBK16 cards, two
3-pin headers (JP6 for upper channel and JP7 for lower channel) are set by default touse an external power source. Moving the jumpers to the internal position connects theexcitation terminals to the +15 VDC rail from P1.

CAUTION
Avoid overloading LogBook’s , DaqBook’s or DaqBoard’s +15 VDC power supply. The
power supply can be overloaded if DBK16 jumpers JP6 and/or JP7 are set to “Internal”
and one or more of the following conditions exist:
 Additional DBKs are being used.
 120 Ω bridge-completion resistors are being used in the strain gageconfiguration.

Card Configuration
Factory Defaults:•

Bridge configuration – Full•

Coupling – DC•

Excitation source – External•

Low pass filter – Disabled (by-passed)
The cutoff frequency, if enabled, has a default of 3.7 Hz. This is obtained using 100kΩ
resistors for R17, R18, and R19 for the lower channel; and using 100kΩ resistors for R5,
R6, and R7 for the upper channel. See the following board layout for resistor locations.

The next few sections of this document module explain the following aspects of configuring DBK16.

DBK16, pg. 6•

AC Coupling and Low-Pass Filter Options•

Channel and Card Address Selection

879895DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK16 Board Layout
AC Coupling, DC Coupling, and Low-Pass Filter Options
Headers on the board accommodate the coupling and low-pass filter options and the output channel
selection (see above figure). Resistors can be removed to lower filter gain from ×2 to ×1. A filter
frequency determining resistor network can be inserted into an IC socket.
The AC or DC coupling choice (on each channel) is set by the presence or absence of a shunt jumper on
a two-pin header. If the shunt jumper is in place, the coupling is DC. If the shunt jumper is absent, thecoupling is AC. JP3 is used to configure the upper channel’s coupling; JP2 is used to configure the lower
channel.
The choice of using or bypassing the low-pass filter (for each channel) is made by the orientation of
shunt jumpers on a 2×2-pin header. When the shunt jumpers are oriented in the same way as the “bypass”
symbol (horizontal, parallel with labels on card), the filter is bypassed. When the shunt jumpers areoriented in the same way as the “filter” symbol (vertical), the filter is in the signal path. JP4 is used toconfigure the upper channel; JP5 is used to configure the lower channel.
The corner frequency of the low-pass filters is determined bythree resistor values in each filter circuit. Located in the centerof the card, the lower channel resistors are R17-R18-R19; andthe upper channel resistors are R5-R6-R7. These resistor
locations are arranged to allow the use of an 8-position DIP
network (as a convenient means of changing all 6 resistors atonce). The machined-pin socket allows you to insert
individual resistors (should the two filter sections havedifferent corner frequencies). The table to the right lists
common frequencies, nominal resistance values, and Bourns
part numbers.

Frequency
37Khz
19Khz
7Khz
3.7Khz1.9Khz
700Hz
370Hz
190Hz
70Hz
37Hz
19Hz
7Hz
3.7Hz

Resistance
(Ω)
10
20
50
100
200
500
1K
2K
5K
10K
20K
50K
100K

Bourns Part
Number
4116R-001-100
4116R-001-200
4116R-001-500
4116R-001-101
4116R-001-201
4116R-001-501
4116R-001-102
4116R-001-202
4116R-001-502
4116R-001-103
4116R-001-203
4116R-001-503
4116R-001-104

Note: Due to settling time, the filter should not be enabled during the DBK16 setup.
DBK16’s active low-pass filters have an inherent gain of ×2. You must factor this gain
into your setup calculations. To change the gain to ×1, remove the following 10 KΩ
resistors: R44 for the upper channel, R46 for the lower channel.

Reference Note: Methods of calibrating DBK16 are discussed in the calibration section.

DBK Option Cards and Module

879895

DBK16, pg. 7

Channel and Card Address Selection
The lower and upper channels on the DBK16 are multiplexed into one of
the channels (0 to 15). The base channel (that the DBK16 is multiplexedinto) is set by the shunt jumper on the16×2 header designated JP1 (seeprevious figure, DBK16 Board Layout).
Each base channel can have up to 16 expansion channels multiplexed into
it. Since the DBK16 represents two expansion channels, eight DBK16
cards can be multiplexed into each base channel. To distinguish channels,
there is a card address bank of three switches on each DBK16. These
switches are binary-weighted with eight possibilities (0-7).
DIP Switch Setting
C
B
A
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
ClosedOpen
Closed Open
Open
Closed Closed
ClosedOpen
Open
ClosedOpen
ClosedClosedClosed OpenClosedClosed Closed

Card Channels (n)
Upper
Lower
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
6
9
8
11
10
13
12
15
14

Base
Channel
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

First Expansion
ChannelNumber (N)
16
32
48
64
80
96
112
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
256

The switch settings are: open = 0, closed = 1 (enabled). The weights (when closed) are: A = 1, B = 2, C = 4.
The table above shows the switch settings. The table to the right lists card channels (n) with respect to the basechannel.
Since the LogBook or the Daq device has sixteen base channels, up to 128 DBK16s can be used, providing amaximum of 256 channels. To keep track of all base and expansion channels, the base channels are designated
0 to 15 and the expansion channels are designated 16 to 271. Channel 16 is the first channel on the first
expansion board (lower channel on card address 0 with JP1 set to CH0). Channel 271 is the last channel on thelast expansion board (upper channel on card address 7 with JP1 set to CH15).
To calculate the actual input channel, use the above tables and add the applicable “N” and “n.” The result is the
expansion channel number. This number is needed when writing a program to read from that particularchannel. For more information on multiplexing, refer to the Signal Management chapter.

DBK16, pg. 8879895DBK Option Cards and Modules

Calibrating DBK16 for Daq Devices
Reference Note:
This section covers calibrating a DBK16 that is being used in a Daq device application.
LogBook users: refer to Calibrating DBK16 and DBK43A for LogBook, which begins on page 15.

Bridge circuit transducers are used for many different applications, and the DBK16 is flexible enough to
support most of them. Each DBK16 channel circuit has an excitation regulator, a high gain (100-1250)
input amplifier with offset adjustment, a low-pass filter, a scaling (1-10) amplifier, and a calibration
multiplexer.
There are 4 trimpots to set up each channel circuit. The trimpots are labeled to represent the following
adjustments:
EXC
for adjusting the Excitation Voltage to the transducer
GAIN

for setting the gain of the input amplifier

OFFSET for adjusting the circuit offset for quiescent loads or bridge imbalance
SCALE for setting the gain of the scaling amplifier
Proper setup includes the use of software commands that control the calibration multiplexer in each circuit.
The calibration multiplexer is used to switch the bridge circuit out and apply reference voltages to the input
for use in the DBK16 setup. The calibration multiplexer also allows the Daq device to record theindividual adjustments. The next table shows the setup commands, their binary codes, and a description of
their function. These commands are accessible through DaqView and the Daq device driver as gain
settings and through most third party software support as well as GageCal.
Setup Command
Dbk16ReadBridge
Dbk16SetOffset

Code
00
01

Dbk16SetScalingGain

10

Dbk16SetInputGain

11

Description
Reads bridge circuit with all gains and offsets included (normal operation)
Applies a grounded input and allows the user to read the circuit offset voltage
multiplied by the input amplifier and the low-pass filter gain.
Applies 5 mV to the input and allows the user to read the voltage out of thecircuit through the input gain amplifier, the low-pass filter* and the scaling
gain amplifier.
Applies 5 mV to the input and allows the user to read the voltage out of thecircuit through the input gain amplifier and low-pass filter only.

The following equations represent the voltage recorded by the Daq device when the calibration mux is
set in 1 of 4 possible settings.
Code
00
01
10
11

Equation
Vout = (Scaling Gain)(Filter Gain*)[(InputGain)(bridge circuit voltage) - offset voltage]
Vout = (Filter Gain*)(Input Gain)(-offset voltage)
Vout = Filter Gain*(Scaling Gain[(Input Gain)(5 mV) - offset voltage])
Vout = (Filter Gain*)(Input Gain)(5 mV) - offset voltage
Asterisk (*) implies the filter is enabled.

A typical setup procedure is as follows:1.

Disable the low-pass filters (JP4 and/or JP5) and set DC coupling (install JP2 and/or JP3) for all thechannels that are being setup. If you plan on using the filter during your acquisition, take note of thegain in the filter stage (default ×2, or ×1 with resistor removed) and allow for it in your setup.

2.

Determine what the excitation for the transducer will be from the transducer specifications and thecurrent limitations of the DBK16 excitation regulator.

3.

Determine what the maximum voltage will be from the transducer at maximum load or strain, andcalculate what the DBK16 channel total gain should be based on a full-scale Daq device(-5 V to +5 V for DaqBook and DaqBoard [ISA type] in bipolar mode; 0 to +10 V for
DaqBook [/100 & /200], DaqBoard [ISA type] and DaqBoard/2000 in unipolar mode; -10 to +10 V
for DaqBoard/2000 in bipolar mode and Daq PC-Card). (See examples on page 12.)DBK Option Cards and Module

879895

DBK16, pg. 9

4.

Determine how the total gain will be distributed between input amplifier gain, filter gain and scaling
amplifier gain. (See examples on page 12.)5.

Hook up the transducer to the terminal strips labeled Lower or Upper according to the figures in theCard Connection section. Install the appropriate bridge completion resistors if applicable.

6.

Set the excitation voltage for the transducer by adjusting the trimpot labeled EXC and measuring thevoltage with a voltmeter across the +EXC and -EXC terminals on the DBK16.

7.

Send the DBK16SetOffset command (usually through a gain setting in the software support). Adjust
the OFFSET trimpot for a reading of 0.00 volts. This removes all offset from the DBK16 channel
circuit.

8.

Send the DBK16SetInputGain command (usually through a gain setting in the software support).
Adjust the GAIN trimpot for a voltage reading equal to (.005)(the desired input amplifier gain).

9.

Send the DBK16SetScalingGain command (usually through a gain setting in the software). Adjust
the SCALE trimpot for a voltage reading equal to (.005)(the desired input amplifier gain)(the desired
scaling amplifier gain).

10. Send the DBK16 ReadBridge command (default). With the quiescent (normal or inactive) load or
strain applied, adjust the OFFSET trimpot for a reading of 0.00 volts. This adds offset to the circuit
to compensate for the quiescent load and allows maximum resolution for the measurement.
11. Enable the low-pass filter and/or AC coupling if required for your application.
12. From the transducer specifications and the total gain of the DBK16 channel, calculate the Daq device
voltage/transducer units and apply it to your Daq device voltage readings through software.
13. Apply a known load or strain and verify the DBK16 and software settings.
Set-Up Notes:• The offset adjustment is unipolar 0 to 5 V on the input amplifier output. If the offset can not be
adjusted to 0.00 V at the end of the setup procedure, try swapping the +BRG and -BRG wire
connections or dropping the input gain and increasing the scaling gain.
• For very high system gains, the Scaling Gain might have to be set first with the Input Gain low andthen set the Input Gain (the Daq device can only measure up to 10 V).

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration
Use of the DBK16 requires setting jumpers in DaqBooks/100 Series & /200 Series device
and DaqBoards [ISA type].
1.

If not using auxiliary power, place the JP1 jumper in the expanded
analog mode.

Note: This default position is necessary to power the interface circuitryof the DBK16 via the internal ±15 VDC power supply. If using
auxiliary power (e.g., a DBK32A or DBK33), you must remove
both JP1 jumpers (refer to Power Management in the DBK Basics
section and to the DBK32A or DBK33 sections as applicable.
2.

For DaqBook/100, DaqBook /112 and DaqBook /120 only, place theJP4 jumper in single-ended mode.

Configuration Jumpers

DaqBook/2000 and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration
No jumper configurations are required for these 2000 series devices.

DBK16, pg. 10879895DBK Option Cards and Modules

Software Setup
Reference Notes:
o DaqView users - Refer to chapter 3, DBK Setup in DaqView.
o LogView users - Refer to chapter 4, DBK Setup in LogView.

GageCal Program
GageCal is not used for LogBook applications.

Note: GageCal is best suited for a load cell application
To install the GageCal program on your computer, close all other programs and run SETUP.EXE on Disk
1 (or CD-ROM, as applicable) from Windows 3.1, 3.11, or Windows 95/98/Me. Follow the installation
instructions from the setup program.
Execute GAGECAL.EXE from a Windows environment to start the program. The first screen that appears
will set up the Daq device interface. Input the correct Daq device interface information and click OK. If
the program does not detect the Daq device, please check connections and try again or refer to thetroubleshooting tips in the Troubleshooting Tips chapter.
Through GageCal, DBK16 channels can be configured and calibrated as needed. The typical procedure forusing GageCal with a DBK16 is as follows:1.

Highlight the expansion channel number you want to configure and calibrate. Notice the channel
numbers are listed 16 to 271 with respect to the Daq device (if necessary, see the section entitled,
Channel and Card Address Selection).

2.

Click on the CONFIGURE button. Setup and verify your hardware setting with the diagram on thescreen. Please note that the coupling must be set to DC and the filter must be disabled to calibrate
the DBK16. After the hardware is setup and verified, click on the ACCEPT button to configure thenext channel or ACCEPT CONFIGURATION AND EXIT to return the main GageCal screen.

3.

Highlight the first configured channel and click on the button labeled CALIBRATE. The
Application Parameters screen appears. There are 2 types of calibration that the DBK16 canaccommodate. Nameplate calibration allows you to enter specifications of your transducer andapplication;
Two-Point calibration allows you to enter two points of millivoltage out of the transducer vspounds or other physical units. From the parameters you enter, GageCal instructs you how to set up
the DBK16.

Note: All application parameters entered will be used in the DBK16 setup. Any inaccuracies will resultin the DBK16 being configured incorrectly.
4.

Click on the CONTINUE button, and follow the instructions from the GageCal program. GageCal
has a help file that will explain any questions on the different screens or menus. If you have trouble
in your setup, a DIAGNOSTIC window can show a DBK16 circuit to help you troubleshoot the
problem.

5.

After GageCal completion, go to DaqView and convert ±5 V to engineering units using mx+b.

DBK Option Cards and Module

879895

DBK16, pg. 11

Example
The following examples perform selected steps for a typical setup. There will be strain gage and load cell
examples. Referring to the typical setup procedure, step 3 says to determine the maximum voltage fromthe transducer at maximum load or strain.
A strain gage example:
Most strain gages come with Gage Factors (GF) used to calculate the approximate output of the bridge
circuit with a typical strain value. The formula is:( Excitation Voltage)(Gage Factor)(Strain in strain units)= *Bridge circuit output voltage
4*linear estimate, some strain gages are not linear, refer to strain gage theory for more information.
If we have a 120 ohm strain gage with a gage factor of 2.1 and excitation voltage of 5 V (due to the current
limitation of the excitation regulator on the DBK16, it must be less than 6 V) and we are measuring 4000
microstrain:-6

Bridge output voltage for 4000 microstrain =(5)(2.1)(4000 × 10 )= 10.5 mV

4

A load cell example:
Load cells come with a mV/V specification which means for each volt of excitation at maximum load, theload cell will output a specific millivolt level.
Consider a 3000 pound load cell rated at 2.05 mV/V using 10 V of excitation (assume it is a 350 ohm loadcell). When 3000 pounds are applied, the voltage out of the load cell is:(10)(2.05×10-3) = 20.5 mVFor 1000 pounds, it would be (1000/3000)(10)(2.05×10-3) = 6.833 mV
Now that we know what our full-scale voltage will be from our sensor, we can calculate what the voltage
gain should be on the DBK16 so the full-scale sensor output will correspond to the full-scale Daq device
input. Full-scale Daq device inputs are:-5 to +5 V for DaqBook and DaqBoard [ISA type] in bipolar mode
0 to +10 V for DaqBook, DaqBoard [ISA type], and DaqBoard/2000 in unipolar mode
-10 to +10 V for DaqBoard/2000 in bipolar mode and Daq PC-Card
To calculate the needed DBK16 gains, use the maximum voltage you want to represent the full-scale ofthe sensor (usually full-scale Daq device input with a little space to prevent saturation) divided by the fullscale sensor output.
Example: The strain gage above at 4000 microstrain will output 10.5 mV. If using a DaqBook in bipolarmode, full-scale is +5 V. Also, we will allow 0.5 V space on the full-scale input. The DBK16 gain shouldbe:

4.5 V/10.5 mV = 428.6
Now we must determine how to distribute the gain in the DBK16 (typical setup procedure step 4). There is
the input amplifier that has a gain range of ×100 to ×1250, the filter gain (×1 or ×2) and the scaling
amplifier that has a range of ×1 to ×10. If we round off our gain to ×420, any of these possible settings
will work.
Input Gain

×420

×100

×240

×300

Filter Gain (enabled)No

Yes (×2)

Yes (×1)

No

Scaling Gain

×1

×2.1

×1.75

×1.4

Total DBK16 Gain

×420

×420

×420

×420

After we determine how all our gains will be distributed, the sensor can be hooked up to the DBK16, thebridge completion resistors installed, and the excitation voltage set. Then we can proceed to set the gains.
We will use DaqView for this.
DBK16, pg. 12879895DBK Option Cards and Modules

Launch DaqView and set it up for the DBK16 at the correct Daq device input channel determined by thesetting of JP1 and S1. On return to the DaqView main spreadsheet screen, notice the type column in the
spreadsheet. All the DBK16 channels should say bridge. Changing the type will allow us to set the offset
and gains in the DBK16. When setting up the DBK16 gains, enable only the channel you are setting up.
Turn all the others off in DaqView. Also, set DC coupling and disable the on-board filter during the gain
and offset settings.
First, we want to remove all the offset adjustment from the circuit. Set the type to Offset Gain. Enable theinput reading column from the Acquire menu or the tool bar. While reading the spreadsheet, set thetrimpot labeled OFFSET to read a value of 0.00. Disable the input reading column.
Next, set the type to Input Gain. This allows us to set the input amplifier gain. The DBK16 has a 5 mV
signal on the input, so the reading that we want to set the trimpot labeled GAIN to is (.005)(Input Gain).
Enable the input reading column and set the Input Gain. Disable the input reading column.
Typical Input Gain settings:
Gain
DaqView Reading
Gain
DaqView Reading
100
0.5 volts
200
1.0 volts
300
1.5 volts
400
2.0 volts
500
2.5 volts
600
3.0 volts
700
3.5 volts
750
3.75 volts
800
4.0 volts
900
4.5 volts
1000
5.0 volts
1200
6 volts ** requires DaqBook/DaqBoard to be in unipolar mode.

Next set the type to Scaling Gain. This allows us to set the scaling amplifier gain. When setting thescaling gain, the input gain is also present and must be considered when making the adjustment. The
scaling gain reading you want to read is (.005)(input gain)(scaling gain). Enable the input reading column,
and set the Scaling Gain. Disable the input reading column.
For an input gain of 200, typical scaling gains are:Scaling Gain
DaqView reading2
2.0 volts
44.0 volts
6
6.0 volts*
8
8.0 volts*
1010.0 volts** requires DaqBook/DaqBoard to be in unipolar mode.

Now all the gains are set correctly, and we have to adjust the offset for any bridge circuit imbalance orquiescent loads. Enable the on-board filter. Set the type to Bridge. Make sure the quiescent load isapplied. Enable the input reading column and adjust the trimpot labeled OFFSET for a reading of 0.00. If
you can not adjust it to 0.00, try dropping your input gain and compensate for the drop by raising yourscaling gain. If it still does not adjust to 0.00, swap the +BRG and -BRG wires to reverse the polarity ofthe signal. The offset adjustment is unipolar and only affects the input gain. After the final offset ismade, the gain readings will be incorrect (if you want to go back and check them) unless the circuit
offset is removed. (Step 7 in typical setup procedure.)

Using the DBK16 with 3-Wire Strain Gages
Each single-element 3-wire strain gage has 1 wire connected to one side of the gage element and 2 wires
connected to the other. Follow these steps for using the DBK16 with the 3-wire single-element strain
gages.
1.

Install bridge completion resistors R12 and R13 (R24 and R25 for lower channel).

2.

Attach the 1-wire side of the gage element to the -EXC and -SEN terminals.

3.

Attach one wire on the 2-wire side of the gage to +BRG terminal.

4.

Attach one more bridge completion resistor to the end of the other wire on the 2-wire side of thegage element.

5.

Attach the other side of the 3rd bridge completion resistor to the +EXC terminal.

DBK Option Cards and Module

879895

DBK16, pg. 13

DBK16, pg. 14879895DBK Option Cards and Modules

Calibrating DBK16 and DBK43A for LogBooks
Reference Note:
This section covers calibrating a DBK16 that is being used in a LogBook application.
Daq users: Refer to Calibrating DBK16 and DBK43A for Daq Devices, which begins on page 9.
Overview …… 15
Calibration Methods …… 16
Procedures Common to All Calibration Steps (Required) …… 17
Nameplate Calibration and Manual Calibration …… 20
Channel Calibration Procedure …… 23
2-Point Calibration …… 26
Shunt Calibration …… 28
Creating a Units Conversion Transfer Function …… 30
Periodic Calibration Without Trimpots …… 31

Overview
Calibrating a strain gage channel includes:• One-time adjusting of the bridge excitation.
• One-time tuning of the electronic gains and offset via trimpots to maximize performance and dynamic
range.
• Applying a transfer function to the voltage output to convert it to engineering units, e.g., pounds,
kilograms.
• Executing a software scale and offset adjustment periodically to maintain accuracy.

Example of a Unit Conversion from Voltage to Pounds

The trimpots provide course tuning so large quiescent offsets can be nulled and the bridge signal can beamplified to match the A/D input range. Once these adjustments are made, the operator can periodicallyfine-tune the calibration via software using LogView’s 2-Point calibration feature. LogView’s scale andoffset features provide a simple means to apply a transfer function that converts the voltage to user units,
for example, pounds, as in the above block diagram.
Bridge circuit transducers are used for many different applications, and the strain gage signal conditioning
modules are flexible enough to support most of them. Each channel circuit has an excitation regulator, ahigh gain (x100 to x1250) input amplifier with offset adjustment, a low-pass filter, a scaling (x1 to x10)
amplifier, and a calibration multiplexer.

DBK Option Cards and Module

879895

DBK16, pg. 15

By using software-controlled multiplexers, on-board reference voltages can be read by the data acquisition
system so that precise gains and offsets can be set. LogView provides a means of easily controlling thecalibration multiplexers so that the reference voltages can be displayed while the trimpots are being
adjusted.
There are four trimpots to set up each channel circuit. The trimpots are labeled to represent the following
adjustments:•

EXC - for adjusting the excitation voltage to the transducer•

GAIN - for setting the gain of the input amplifier•

OFFSET - for adjusting the circuit offset for quiescent loads or bridge imbalance•

SCALE - for setting the gain of the scaling amplifier

Signal-FlowRelationship of Software Controlled Multiplexers and On-Board Reference Voltages

This calibration procedure can only be executed while
LogBook is attached to a PC that is running LogView.
To adjust trimpots, use one of the following calibration methods, as appropriate:
Nameplate, 2-Point, Shunt, or Manual.

Calibration Methods
Several different calibration techniques are supported by strain gage signal conditioning modules.
Calibration methods include; Nameplate, 2-Point, Shunt, and Manual. From the following discussion,
select the calibration method that is best for your application.

Nameplate –uses the transducer’s published specs.
Nameplate calibration is typically used with packaged load cells with millivolt-per-volt (mV/V) transfer
functions. Using the mV/V spec of the load cell or a strain gage’s Gage Factor (GF), the necessary system
gain can be calculated and applied to a channel.

2-Point – uses 2 known loads, one of which might be “no load.”
The 2-Point calibration method requires the operator to apply two known loads to the load cell or strain
gage, one at a time, while the data acquisition system takes measurements. Typically, the first point is withno load applied and the second point is close to the maximum load capacity of the gage. While measuring
the first point the offset is nulled, and while measuring the second point the gain is adjusted to span the
majority of the input range of the A/D. No gain calculations are required to perform this calibration
method.

DBK16, pg. 16

879895DBK Option Cards and Modules

Shunt – applies a shunt resistor to the bridge to simulate a load.
Shunt calibration is identical to 2-Point calibration except that the second point is simulated so that
applying a load near the gage’s maximum load is unnecessary. To simulate a bridge imbalance, a shunt
resistor is placed across one leg of the bridge. Once the shunt resistor value has been calculated, it isapplied to the bridge to provide the desired simulated load. No gain calculations are required to perform
this calibration method.

Manual – used to assign specific gains and offsets.
If a particular gain and offset are already known, these values can be used to setup a strain gage channel.

Procedures Common to All Calibration Steps (Required)
Set the Selected Channel(s) to DC Coupling

Since the applied calibration-signals are DC, set DC coupling for all the channels that are being adjusted.
If your application requires AC coupling, don’t forget to remove the jumpers when the adjustment
procedure has been completed.
Determine Channel Parameters

Before adjusting the trimpots, the excitation needs to be determined. Typically, the supplier of the gage ofload cell will recommend a suitable value, but make sure that the maximum output current of the excitation
regulator is not exceeded.
Initialize LogView

Launch LogView and use the LogBook Hardware Configuration window (hardware tree) to configure allof the DBK options that are to be used in the system. If needed, refer to the LogView chapter.

LogBook Hardware Configuration, Button and Screen

Open the Analog Input Channel Configuration Window. Click the User Scaling Tab and verify that all of
the strain gage channels that are to be adjusted have scale and offset values of 1 and 0, respectively.

DBK Option Cards and Module

879895

DBK16, pg. 17

Analog Input Channel Configuration Window, Button and Screen … “User Scaling” Tab Selected

For all of the strain gage channels that are to be adjusted, set their ranges to +5V.
Click the DBK Parameters tab to expose the strain gage signal conditioning programmable settings.

Click the Attach button to substantiate a connection between the PC and the LogBook.

Adjust the Excitation - DBK16

For DBK16, set the excitation voltage for the transducer by adjusting the trimpot labeled EXC andmeasuring the voltage with a voltmeter across the +EXC and -EXC on the bridge or at the terminals of thesignal conditioning module.
Adjust the Excitation-

DBK43ADBK43A is equipped with a switch that allows the excitation voltage to be read by the LogBook anddisplayed in LogView. For all DBK43A units to be adjusted, you must:
1.

Reposition the DBK43A’s “physical” calibration switch (located next to the Power LED) to the CAL
position.

2.

Select CAL in LogView. This is detailed in the following paragraph.
Open the LogBook Hardware Configuration window and select DBK43A (see following figure). In
the Configurations settings box, set the CAL/NORM Switch to CAL. If the DBK43A is not displayed
click the + to the left of the base channel (to which it is attached), this action expands the hardware
tree in the LogBook Hardware Configuration window. Repeat this process for all DBK43A units thatare to be adjusted. Click OK to lock in the changes.

Setting a DBK43A Cal/Norm Switch to “CAL”

DBK16, pg. 18

879895DBK Option Cards and Modules

3.

In the Param1 column (see next figure for location), select all of the DBK43A channels that are to be
adjusted.

4.

Set Mode equal to Excitation from the drop down list (located above the DBK Parameters tab).

5.

Turn off all the channels in the system except for those DBK43A channels that are to be adjusted.

Selecting “Mode = Excitation” for DBK Parameter 1

6.

Click the Download button to send the current configuration to the LogBook.

7.

Select Indictors \ Enable Input Reading Column from the menu bar to display the excitation values foreach channel.

Download
ButtonSelecting “Enable Input Reading Column”(from the Indicators Pull-Down Menu)

8.

Set the excitation voltage for each transducer by adjusting the trimpot labeled EXC for the associatedchannel while reading their values in LogView.

9.

Select Indictors \ Disable Input Reading Column from the menu bar.

Selecting “Disable Input Reading Column”(from the Indicators Pull-Down Menu)
DBK Option Cards and Module

879895

DBK16, pg. 19

10. Return the physical calibration switches (of the applicable DBK43As) to the NORM position.
11. In LogView, open the LogBook Hardware Configuration Window (hardware tree) and select NORM
for each DBK43A.

This completes the section entitled: “Procedures Common to All Calibration Steps (Required)”Nameplate Calibration and Manual Calibration
To properly calibrate a strain gage channel using the Nameplate method, the required gain must first be
calculated. If the desired gain and offset are already know [as in the Manual calibration method] skip to
the section, Determining the Gain of Each Amplification Stage.
The following examples outline the necessary steps for determining the required gain for
Nameplate calibration. Both strain gage and load cell examples are provided.
Calculating the Required Gain
Determining a Strain Gage’s Maximum Output Voltage
Most strain gages come with Gage Factors (GF) used to calculate the approximate output of the bridge
circuit with a typical strain value. The formula is:

VBR = (VEXC * G * S * B) / 4[See following important notice]

Where: VBR = Bridge output voltage
VEXC = Excitation Voltage
G = Gage Factor
S = Strain in user units (in uStrain)
B = Configuration factor (1 for ¼ bridge, 2 for ½ bridge, 4 for full bridge)

The equation, VBR = (VEXC * G * S * B) / 4 produces a linear estimate. If you areusing a non-linear strain gage you should refer to strain gage theory for additional
information as needed.

For a 120 ohm strain gage with a gage factor of 2.1 and excitation voltage of 5 V, applying
4000 microstrain would produce an bridge output of 10.5mV for a ¼ bridge configuration.
VBR = (5 * 2.1 * 4000x10-6) / 4 = 10.5mV
Determining a Load Cell’s Maximum Output Voltage
Load cells come with a mV/V specification—for each volt of excitation at maximum load, the load cell
will output a specific millivolt level.
VLC = R * VEXC

Where: VLC = Load cell output voltage
R = Load cell spec (mv/V)
VEXC = Excitation voltage

DBK16, pg. 20

879895DBK Option Cards and Modules

Consider a 3000 pound load cell rated at 2.05 mV/V using 10 V of excitation (assume a 350Ω load cell).
When 3000 pounds is applied, the voltage out of the load cell is 20.5mV.
VLC = (10 * 2.05×10-3) = 20.5 mV

If 1000 pounds were applied, we would see 6.833 mV. This is arrived at as follows:(1000/3000) * 10 * 2.05×10-3 = 6.833 mV
Using the Calculated Maximum Voltage to Determine the Necessary Gain
To maximize the resolution and dynamic performance of the system, the sensor’s output should be
amplified to correspond to the data acquisition system’s input range.

Using the LogBook’s +5V input range, the required gain is calculated by dividing 5V by the maximum
output voltage of the sensor. Before performing the calculation, it is typically a good idea to pad the
maximum sensor voltage by about 5% so that, once amplified, it won’t bump into the limit of the 5V range.

G = VLB / (VGO + VGO * 5%)

Where: G = Gain
VLB = LogBook input range
VGO = Maximum gage output

For the strain gage in the previous example with a maximum output of 10.5mV, the required gain is:
G = 5.0V / (0.0105V + 0.0105V * 0.05) = 453.5

For the above load cell with a maximum output of 20.5mV, the required gain is:
G = 5.0V / (0.0205V + 0.0205V * 0.05) = 232.3

Determining the Gain of Each Amplification Stage

The system’s total gain is:
GT = GI * GF * GS

Where: GT = Total gain
GI = Input amplifier gain
GF = Filter gain
GS = Scaling amplifier gain
Note: Maximum gain calibration is x1000 for +5V range.
DBK Option Cards and Module

879895

DBK16, pg. 21

The majority of the gain should be assigned to the Input Amplifier, with the Scaling Amplifier used forfine-tuning. If the filter is enabled, a gain of x2 is automatically introduced.
The input amplifier has a gain range of ×100 to ×1250; the filter gain ×1 or ×2; and the scaling amplifier
has a range of ×1 to ×10. For the strain gage example, if we round off our gain to ×420, any of these
possible settings will work.
OptionA

Option B

Option C

Option D

Input Gain

×420

×100

×240

×300

Filter Gain (enabled)No

Yes (×2)

Yes (×2) *See Note

No

Scaling Gain

×1

×2.1

×1.75

×1.4

Total Gain

×420

×420

×420

×420

For Option C, the LPF gain is typically x2.
For gains of x1 (if the filter is enabled), the following apply:

DBK16 - For a gain of x1 (if the filter is enabled),10KΩ resistors R44 and R46 must have been previously
removed (for the low and high channels, respectively).
DBK43A - For a gain of x1 (if the channel filters are enabled), removal of the following 10 KΩ resistors
applies: Ch0 – R144, Ch1 – R244, Ch3 – R444, Ch4 – R544, Ch5 – R644, Ch6 – R744, Ch7 – R844.

DBK16, pg. 22879895DBK Option Cards and Modules

Channel Calibration Procedure
Adjust the Offset

The following steps are used to adjust the offset.
1.

In the Param1 column (see page 19 for location), select all of the DBK43A channels that are to be
adjusted.

2.

Select Mode = SetOffset from the drop down list above the grid. This selection commands thecalibration multiplexer to route the 0.0V reference through the entire analog path (see following
figure).

“Mode = Offset” 0.0 Volt Reference is Routed

3.

Turn off all the channels in the system except for those DBK43A channels that are to be adjusted.

4.

Click the Download button. This sends the current configuration to the LogBook.

5.

Select Indictors \ Enable Input Reading Column from the menu bar. This displays the offset values forthe enabled channels.

6.

Set the offset voltage to 0.0V for each transducer by adjusting the trimpot labeled OFFSET for the
associated channel.

7.

Select Indictors \ Disable Input Reading Column from the menu bar.

Adjust the Input Amplifier Gain

Perform the following steps to adjust the Input Amplifier Gain.
1.

In the Param1 column (see page 17 for location), select all of the DBK43A channels that are to be
adjusted.

2.

Select Mode = SetInputGain from the drop down list above the grid. This selection commands thecalibration multiplexer to route a 5mV reference through the Input Amplifier and bypass the Scaling
amplifier (see following figure).
Note: If the filter is enabled (not bypassed) accommodate an additional x2 gain stage.

DBK Option Cards and Module

879895

DBK16, pg. 23

“Mode = SetInputGain,” 5 milli-Volt Reference Route3.

Turn off all the channels in the system except for those DBK43A channels that are to be adjusted.

4.

Click the Download button to send the current configuration to the LogBook.

5.

Select Indictors \ Enable Input Reading Column from the menu bar to display the values for eachchannel.

6.

For the associated channel, set the voltage to [GI * GF * 0.005] for each transducer by adjusting thetrimpot labeled GAIN. Use the Input Amplifier Gain (GI ) calculated earlier.

Note: If the filter is enabled, the filter gain (GF ) is 2; otherwise GF = 1.
Example 1: If GI = 250 and the filter is disabled;
the GAIN trimpot would be adjusted to obtain 1.25V.
Example 2: If GI = 250 and the filter is enable; the GAIN trimpot would
be adjusted to obtain 2.50V.

7.

Select Indictors \ Disable Input Reading Column from the menu bar.

Adjust the Scaling Amplifier Gain

Adjust the Scaling Amplifier Gain as follows:1.

In the Param1 column (see page 19 for location), select all of the DBK43A channels that are to be
adjusted.

2.

Select Mode = SetScalingGain from the drop down list above the grid. This selection commands thecalibration multiplexer to route a 5mV reference through all of the amplification stages as shown
below.

“Mode = ScalingGain,” 5 milli-Volt Reference Route

DBK16, pg. 24

879895DBK Option Cards and Modules

3.

Turn off all the channels in the system except for those DBK43A channels that are to be adjusted.

4.

Click the Download button to send the current configuration to the LogBook.

5.

Select Indictors \ Enable Input Reading Column from the menu bar to display the values for eachchannel.

6.

For the associated channel, set the voltage to [GT * 0.005] for each transducer by adjusting the trimpot
labeled SCALE. Use the total system gain (GT ) calculated earlier.
Example: If GT = 435.5, the SCALE trimpot would be adjusted to obtain 2.17 V.

7.

Select Indictors \ Disable Input Reading Column from the menu bar.

Trimming Bridge Quiescent Load

Most bridges have some level of offset, even if no quiescent load is present. In quarter and half bridge
situations, use of 1% bridge completion resistors can cause up to 1mV/V of offset. If the bridge has 4mVof offset and the Input Amplifier is set to x100, the Offset potentiometer would need to nullify 400mV.

DBK16 – For DBK16s, the Offset Potentiometer can adjust out 0 to +5V of offset amplified by the
Input Amplifier.

DBK43A – For DBK43As, the Offset Potentiometer can adjust out -1.25 to +5V of offset amplified by the
Input Amplifier.

Trimming Bridge Quiescent Load

If a significant amount of quiescent offset is present and the Input Amplifier gain is set too high, theOffset Potentiometer will not have enough range to adequately nullify the offset. In this case, the gain of
the Input Amplifier must be reduced while the gain of the Scaling Amplifier is increased proportionately.
Use the following steps to trim bridge quiescent load (unload the bridge).
1.

In the Param1 column (see page 19 for location), select all of the DBK43A channels that are to be
adjusted.

2.

Select Mode = Bridge from the drop down list above the grid. This selection commands thecalibration multiplexer to route the transducer output through the analog path as shown below.

DBK Option Cards and Module

879895

DBK16, pg. 25

“Mode = Bridge,” Reference Route3.

Turn off all the channels in the system except for those DBK43A channels that are to be adjusted.

4.

Click the Download button to send the current configuration to the LogBook.

5.

Select Indictors \ Enable Input Reading Column from the menu bar to display the offset values foreach channel.

6.

For the associated channel, set the offset voltage to 0.0V for each transducer by adjusting thetrimpot labeled OFFSET.

Note: If you are unable to nullify the quiescent offset of the bridge, your Input Amplifier gain may be toohigh. Information regarding gain redistribution can be found in the section entitled,
Determining the Gain of Each Amplification Stage.

7.

Select Indictors \ Disable Input Reading Column from the menu bar.

2-Point Calibration
This 2-point calibration method makes use of trimpot adjustments. It should not be
confused with the LogView software 2-Point Calibration (discussed in the LogView
chapter in the LogBook User’s Manual).

In the 2-Point calibration method, the user places two known loads on the gage, one at a time, then adjust
the trimpots until the expected value is reached. Typically, the first of loads is “no load.” In the case of aweight scale, the scale would first be unloaded to adjust the offset, then a known load (near maximum
expected) would be applied to adjust the gain.
Shunt calibration (discussed immediately after this 2-Point Calibration section) is the same as the 2-Point
method, except the second load is applied in a simulated fashion by shunting 1 leg of the bridge with ashunt resistor. Shunt calibration is preferred in cases where applying a real load (near the maximum
expected) is not practical.
Initialize the System

DBK16, pg. 26

1.

Download a single setup and continuously display data in LogView. The continuous display canremain throughout the procedure since the calibration multiplexers do not need reset between steps.

2.

In the Param1 column (see page 19 for location), select all of the DBK43A channels that are to be
adjusted.

3.

Select Mode = Bridge from the drop down list above the grid. This selection commands thecalibration multiplexer to route the transducer voltage through the analog path.

4.

Turn off all the channels in the system, except for those DBK43A channels that are to be adjusted.

5.

Click the Download button to send the current configuration to the LogBook.

6.

Select Indictors \ Enable Input Reading Column from the menu bar to display the offset values foreach channel.

879895DBK Option Cards and Modules

Adjust the Offset

For the associated channel, apply the first calibrated load to each gage (typically no-load) and set thevoltage to 0.0V for each transducer. This is accomplished by adjusting the trimpot labeled OFFSET. If thefirst point is actually a calibrated load, you will need to move the load to each gage, one at a time, to adjust
its associated offset.
Adjust the Input and Scale Amplifier Gain

Complete the following steps to adjust the channel gain.
1.

Apply the second load to each gage channel. The value of this load should approximate that of the
maximum expected load. For the best results, a gain should be selected so that the bridge’s maximum
output equals 90% of the A/D’s input range.

2.

Calculate the desired voltage for the second point using the following equation:
VD = (LA/LM) * VI * 90%

Where: VD = Desired voltage for 2nd point of calibration
LA = Applied load used in calibrating the 2nd point
LM = Maximum load expected during usage
VI = Input voltage range
Example: The load standard that will be applied to the gage as the 2nd point in the 2-Point calibration is
100lbs. The maximum expected load during usage is 150lbs. The programmable input range ofthe data acquisition system is set for +5V. The desired output voltage of the strain gage signal
conditioning electronics is:
VD = (100/150) * 5 * 0.90 = 3V

In this example, we should adjust the GAIN and SCALE trimpots until a value of 3V ismeasured.
If 150lbs is applied to the gage, a voltage of 4.5V will be measured.
VD = (150/150) * 5 * 0.90 = 4.5V

3.

Apply the second calibrated load to each gage and set the voltage to VD, as derived in step 2. Do thisfor each transducer by adjusting the trimpots labeled GAIN and SCALE for the associated channel.
Note that the GAIN trimpot provides most of the amplification (course adjustment), while the SCALE
trimpot allows for fine-tuning.

Repeating the Process
Since adjusting the gain for the first time will have an affect on the offset, it is recommended that
offset and gain adjustment be performed twice for each channel.

DBK Option Cards and Module

879895

DBK16, pg. 27

Shunt Calibration
Shunt calibration is virtually identical to the 2-Point method just discussed, except that the second point issimulated. The simulated load is achieved by shunting one leg of the bridge with a shunt resistor. Shuntcalibration is the preferred calibration method when applying a real load (of a value approximating the
maximum expected load) is not practical. To adjust the channel gain, the shunt must be applied to thebridge.
Calculate and install the necessary shunt resistor before continuing.

•

DBK43A has direct support for shunt calibration, accommodating theresistor in its enclosure and allowing the software to apply it when requested.

•

DBK16 does not have direct support, so the shunt resistor must be appliedexternally and switched in manually.

Adjust the Offset

Adjust the offset as follows.
1.

In the Param1 column, select all of the DBK43A channels that are to be adjusted.

2.

Select Mode = Bridge from the drop down list above the grid. This selection commands thecalibration multiplexer to route the transducer voltage through the analog path.

3.

Turn off all the channels in the system except for those DBK43A channels that are to be
adjusted.

4.

Click the Download button to send the current configuration to the LogBook.

5.

Select Indictors \ Enable Input Reading Column from the menu bar to display the offset
values for each channel.

6.

For the associated channel, apply the first calibrated load to each gage (typically no-load) andset the voltage to 0.0V for each transducer by adjusting the trimpot labeled OFFSET.

If the first point is an actual calibrated load, you must move the load to each gage, one at atime, to adjust its associated offset.

Adjust the Input and Scale Amplifier Gain

For the best results, a gain should be selected so that the bridge’s maximum output equals 90% of the
A/D’s input range.
1. Use the following equation to calculate the desired shunt voltage (VD).
VD = (Ls/LM) * VI * 90%
Where: VD = Desired voltage from the after amplification when the shunt isapplied
Ls = Simulated load produced by shunt
LM = Maximum load expected during usage
VI = Input voltage range
Example: The simulated load produced by the shunt 100lbs. The maximum expected load
during usage is 150lbs. The programmable input range of the data acquisition system is set for+5V. The desired output voltage of the strain gage signal conditioning electronics is:
VD = (100/150) * 5 * 0.90 = 3V

In this example, we would adjust the GAIN and SCALE trimpots until a value of 3V ismeasured.
If 150lbs is applied to the gage, a voltage of 4.5V will be measured.
DBK16, pg. 28

879895DBK Option Cards and Modules

VD = (150/150) * 5 * 0.90 = 4.5V

For DBK16, only … Externally apply the shunt resistor and set the voltage to VD, as derived above for eachtransducer. This is done by adjusting the trimpots labeled GAIN and SCALE for the associated channel.
The GAIN trimpot is used for course adjustment; and the SCALE trimpot for fine-tuning.
For DBK43A only … DBK43 is equipped with a physical switch that allows the shunt to be applied when
directed by the software. For each DBK43A to be adjusted, move this physical switch from NORM to CAL.
2.

In LogView, open the LogBook Hardware Configuration window and select the DBK43A.

LogBook Hardware Configuration, Button and Screen

3. Select the DBK43A from the LogBook Hardware Configuration window’s hardware tree.
4. Set the list box to the right to CAL. If the DBK43A is not displayed click the + to the left ofthe base channel to which it is attached to expand the hardware tree.

Setting a DBK43A Cal/Norm Switch to “CAL”

5.

Repeat this process for each DBK43A that is to be adjusted.

6.

Click OK to lock in the changes.

7.

Open the Analog Input Channel Grid. In the Param1 column (see page 19 for location), selectall of the DBK43A channels that are to be adjusted. Select Mode = Shunt from the drop down
list above the grid. Turn off all the channels in the system except for those DBK43A channels
that are to be adjusted.

8.

Click the Download button to send the current configuration to the LogBook.

9.

Select Indictors \ Enable Input Reading Column from the menu bar to display the excitation
values for each channel.

10. Set the voltage to VD, as derived above, for each transducer. This is accomplished by adjusting
the trimpots labeled GAIN and SCALE for the associated channel. The GAIN trimpot
provides for course adjustment. The SCALE trimpot provides for fine tuning.
DBK Option Cards and Module

879895

DBK16, pg. 29

11. Select Indictors \ Disable Input Reading Column from the menu bar.
12. Return the physical NORM/CAL switches (of the applicable DBK43As) to the NORM
position.
13. In LogView, open the LogBook Hardware Configuration window and return each DBK43A
back to NORM.
Repeating the Process
Since adjusting the gain for the first time will have an affect on the offset, it is recommended that
offset and gain adjustment be performed twice for each channel.

Creating a Units Conversion Transfer Function
To make the data from your gage more useful, it should be recorded in terms of units appropriate to yourapplication, such as pounds, kilograms, inches, mm, or Hg. A transfer function is needed to convert volts tothese more meaningful units.
For this purpose, LogView provides a means of assigning a mathematical scale and offset to each channel.
Scale and offset information from that chapter has been repeated below for convenience.

In User Scaling, you can create a transfer function. The function allows LogView to display units that could
be more useful to you than volts. For example, you could obtain readings with pounds as the designated Units.
The reading (in pounds) will be based on the raw input value, typically Volts, and the indicated Scale and Offset
adjustment.
To create the transfer function:
1.

Type the desired unit name in the Units column.

2.

Select an appropriate range (e.g. unipolar).

3.

Enter the linear scale relation to Volts (e.g. 25 pounds per Volt).

4.

Enter any offset from 0, for example, an empty basket used in an application reads 0.1 V.

The reading and range columns will automatically change to the adjusted values.

DBK16, pg. 30

879895DBK Option Cards and Modules

Periodic Calibration Without Trimpots
Once the trimpots have been adjusted during initial installation, periodic trimming can be performed
through LogView’s 2-Point software calibration. The LogView procedure does not require the use oftrimmpots and should not be confused with the 2-point method discussed in this section of the manual.
Refer to the LogView chapter in the LogBook User’s Manual for information regarding 2-point calibration
via software.

DBK16 – Specifications
Name/Function: 2-Channel Strain-Gage Input Card
Input Connectors: Screw terminals for signal connections
Output Connector: DB37 male, mates with P1 using CA-37-x cable
Number of Channels: 2
Excitation Voltage Range: 1.50 to 10.50 VDC @ 50 mA (on-board adjustment for external source)
Gain Range: ×100-1250
Types of Bridges Accommodated:
Full Bridge, Kelvin Excitation (6-wire)
Full Bridge (4-wire)
Half Bridge (3-wire)
Quarter Bridge (2-wire)
Bridge Resistors: On-board provisions for 4 bridge-completion resistors per channel.
Type Input: Differential DC
Input Impedance: 100 MΩ (in parallel with 150 pF)
CMRR: 115 dB
Excitation Voltage Source: External 13-18 VDC @ 50 mA/circuit
Excitation Current Output: 50 mA max, current limited at 60 mA
Excitation Sensing: Local or Remote
Excitation Regulation:Line Regulation: 0.025%
Load Regulation: 0.05%
Reference Voltages: 2.500 VDC
Reference Accuracy: 0.05%
Reference Drift: 3 ppm/ºC
Gain Calibration Reference: 5.00 mVDC
Reference Accuracy: 0.2%
Reference Drift: 20 ppm/ºC
Committed instrumentation amplifier [for each section], with a gain adjustfrom ×100 to ×1250 via externally accessed 15-turn trimpot.
Gain Accuracy: 0.5%
Gain Drift: 50 ppm/ºC
Input Offset: 100 µV max
Offset Drift: 4 µV/ºC
Output Offset: 20 µV
Offset Drift: 200 µV/ºC
Offset Adjustment: 0-100% of range, 0-5.00 VDC (15-Turn trimpot)
Full-Scale Sensitivity Range:@ 5.00 VDC Excitation: 0.8 to 10 mV/V
@ 10.00 VDC Excitation: 0.4 to 5 mV/V
Scaling Amplifier Gain Range: ×1 to ×10 (15-Turn trimpot)
Low-Pass Filter: 3 pole Butterworth, User By-Passable;-9dB @ User-set Corner Frequency

DBK Option Cards and Module

879895

DBK16, pg. 31

DBK16, pg. 32

879895DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK174-Channel Simultaneous Sample and Hold Card
Overview ...... 1
Simultaneous Sample and Hold ...... 2
Hardware Setup ...... 2

Card Connection ...... 2
Card Configuration ...... 2
CE Compliance ...... 3
DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration ...... 4
DaqBook/2000 Series and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration ...... 4

Software Setup ...... 4
DBK17 – Specifications ...... 5
Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics located near
the front of this manual.

Overview
Each DBK17 simultaneous sample-and-hold (SSH) card provides 4 channels of voltage input to a
LogBook or a Daq device system. Each of the 16 analog input channels can accept four DBK17 cards fora maximum of 256 analog input channels. The simultaneous sample-hold function is activated at the
beginning of each channel scan and freezes all signals present on DBK17 inputs for the duration of thescan, allowing for non-skewed readings of all channels.
A DBK17 channel should never be the first channel in a scan due to timing of the
SSH line.
DBK17 features an instrumentation amplifier for each channel, with switch-selected gains of
×1, ×10, ×100, ×200 and ×500. A socket is provided for a user-selected gain resistor for custom gain
selection instead of the unity gain (×1) setting.
Four separate sample-hold stages follow the 4 input stages. The outputs are connected to a 4-channel
multiplexer stage. The enabled-output MUX allows up to 4 DBK17s to share a common analog input
channel.
Input can be connected to a channel’s BNC connector or terminal block. The differential inputs areprovided with switchable100 KΩ bias resistors to analog common. User gain can be set to any value
between unity and ×500 by installing a resistor in the user-location of each channel.

DBK17 Block Diagram
DBK Option Cards and Modules

879895

DBK17, pg. 1

Simultaneous Sample and HoldSome applications require every channel in a scan group to be read at the same instant, as opposed to being
read with a delay, e.g., 10 µs between channels. Simultaneous Sample and Hold (SSH) is a means ofobtaining such instantaneous data on multiple channels while avoiding time-skew problems.
A sample case in which SSH is desirable:
A performance analysis of an engine is a classic example of a case in which SSH is desirable. In ourengine analysis example data is gathered on the following parameters:
•
•
•
•
•
•

•

cylinder pressure
cylinder temperature
piston strain
piston stroke position
valve positionengine rpm
vibration

For a more exact correlation of the data, it needs to be obtained at the same instant, without time-skew. By
using SSH each input signal continuously passes through an instrumentation amplifier and into a sampleand-hold stage. When the sample enable line goes high, each channel’s sample-and-hold stage will
“freeze” the current analog value. The values for all channels are separately “latched” within 50 ns of eachother. The signals are held [in a stable condition] while the multiplexer switches through all channels andsends the signals [one-by-one] to the acquisition device. At the device, the ADC digitizes each reading.
The resulting data is a snapshot of conditions at a selected instant although the multiplexing and analog-todigital conversions are spread out over a longer interval. The simultaneous sample and hold circuit allows
you to gather up to 256 simultaneous samples via sixty-four DBK17s.

Hardware Setup
Card Connection
The DBK17 is equipped with BNC connectors and terminal block connectors access to each of the four
differential analog inputs. Note that the terminal block is a connection-option to the BNC connector.

Card Configuration
Factory Defaults•

100K bias resistors – Enabled•

SSH — Enabled. No disable option.

•

Gain – x1

Input Termination

OPEN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Terminal
Block
+ _

SW5

DBK17 provides two 100 KΩ bias resistors foreach analog input. For balanced 200 KΩ input
impedance, both resistors should be switched in.
An 8-position DIP switch (SW5) can selectively
engage the bias resistors. The input circuit andswitch positions are shown in the figure. The
switches must be in the closed position to engage
the termination resistors. For unbalanced highinput, only the (-) resistor should be used. Ifneither resistor is used, some external bias current
path is required.

44+
33+
22+
11+

N

+
-

100 kΩ
A

A

Input Impedance/Termination

DBK17, pg. 2879895DBK Option Cards and Modules

Examples of Bias Resistor Selection Options

Gain Settings
On the card, each channel has a gain-set switch and holes for gain resistors labeled
RG1 to RG4. The figure at the right shows gain values for switch settings 0 to 4,
with 0 being equal to x1 and 4 being equal to x500. If a custom gain is desired,
the switch is set to position 0 and a gain resistor must be mounted and soldered
onto the card. The value of the gain resistor is determined by the formula:
RGAIN = [40,000 / (Gain -1)] - 50 Ω

Address Configuration
As many as four DBK17s can be connected to each analog channel. With sixteen
channels (and four inputs per DBK17) 256 inputs are possible. Since this is adaisy-chain interface, each card must have a unique address (channel and card
number). Note that the default setting for SW6 is Card 1.
To configure the card, locate the 16 × 2-pin header (labeled J1) near the front of
the board. The 16 jumper locations on this header are labeled CH0 throughCH15. Place the jumper on the channel you wish to use. Only one jumper isused on a single card. Four cards in the daisy-chain can have the same channel
number as long as their card number is unique.
Set switch SW6 for each of four DBK17s on a single channel. Verify that only
one card in the system is set to a particular channel and card number.

CE Compliance
Reference Notes:
Should your data acquisition system need to comply with CE standards, refer tothe CE Compliance section of the Signal Management chapter.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

879895

DBK17, pg. 3

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration
Use of the DBK17 requires setting jumpers in DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series devices and
ISA-Type DaqBoards.
1.

If not using auxiliary power, ensure that the JP1 jumper is in the expanded analog mode (see figure).
Note:
These jumpers do not
apply to /2000 Series
devices.

Jumpers on DaqBook/100 Series, /200 Series, & ISA-Type DaqBoards
Note: The JP1 default position (above figure) is necessary to power the interface circuitry of the DBK17
via the internal +15 VDC power supply. See the following CAUTION regarding JP1.

CAUTION
If using auxiliary power, for example a DBK32A or a DBK33, you must remove
both JP1 jumpers. Refer to Power Requirements in the DBK Basics section and to
the DBK32A and DBK33 sections as applicable.
2. Place the DaqBook/100 Series or DaqBook/200 Series device’s JP2 jumper in the SSH position.

CAUTION
Do not use an external voltage reference for DAC1. Applying an external voltage
reference for DAC1 when using SSH output will result in equipment damage due toa conflict on P1, pin #26.
3. For DaqBook/100, /112 and /120 only, ensure that the JP4 jumper is in single-ended mode.

DaqBook/2000 Series and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration
No hardware configurations are required for the DaqBook/2000 Series or DaqBoard/2000 Series devices.

Software Setup
Reference Notes:
o DaqView users - Refer to chapter 3, DBK Setup in DaqView.
o LogView users - Refer to chapter 4, DBK Setup in LogView.

DBK17, pg. 4879895DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK17 – Specifications
Name/Function: Simultaneous Sample-Hold Card
Number of Channels: 4
Input Connections: 4 BNC connectors, 4 screw-terminal sets
Output Connector: DB37 male, which mates with P1 using CA-37-x
cable
Number of Cards Addressable: 64
Input Type: Differential
Voltage Input Ranges:
0 to ±5000 mVDC
0 to ±500 mVDC
0 to ±50 mVDC
0 to ±25 mVDC
0 to ±10 mVDC
Input Amplifier Slew Rate: 12 V/µs minimum
Acquisition Time:
0.6 µs (10 V excursion to 0.1%)
0.7 µs (10 V excursion to 0.01%)
Channel-to-Channel Aperture Uncertainty: 50 ns
Output Droop Rate: 0.1 µV/µs
Input Gains: ×1, ×10, ×100, ×200, ×500 & User-Set
Input Offset Voltage: 500 µV + 5000/G maximum (nullable)
Input Offset Drift: ±5 + 100/G µV/°C maximum
Input Bias Current: 100 pA maximum
Input Offset Currents: 50 pA maximum
12
Input Impedance: 5 × 10 parallel with 6 pF
Switchable Bias Resistors: 100 KΩ (each to analog common)

DBK Option Cards and Modules

879895Gain Errors:
0.04% @ ×1
0.1% @ ×10
0.2% @ ×100
0.4% @ ×200
1.0% @ ×500
Gain vs Temperature:
×1 @ ±20 ppm/°C
×10 @ ±20 ppm/°C
×100 @ ±40 ppm/°C
×200 @ ±60 ppm/°C
×500 @ ±100 ppm/°C
Non-Linearity:
×1 to ±0.015% full-scale
×10 to ±0.015% full-scale
×100 to ±0.025% full-scale
×200 to ±0.025% full-scale
×500 to ±0.045% full-scale
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio(CMRR):
70 dB minimum @ ×1
87 dB minimum @ ×10
100 dB minimum @ ×100
100 dB minimum @ ×200
100 dB minimum @ ×500

DBK17, pg. 5

DBK17, pg. 6879895DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK184-Channel Low-Pass Filter Card
Overview ...... 1
Hardware Setup ...... 1

Card Connection ...... 1
Card Configuration ...... 2
CE Compliance ...... 3
DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration ...... 3
DaqBook/2000 Series and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration ...... 3
Configuring DBK18 Filter Sections ...... 3

Software Setup ...... 5
DBK18 – Specifications ...... 6

Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicableto your system, as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics locatednear the front of this manual.

Overview
Each DBK18 low-pass filter (LPF) card provides 4 input channels to a LogBook or a Daq device system.
Each of sixteen channels can accept four DBK18 cards for a maximum of 256 analog inputs. The input
connectors are BNC type connectors. The differential inputs are provided with switchable 100 KΩ bias
resistors to analog common.
The DBK18 features an instrumentation amplifier for each channel, with switch-selected gains of
×1, ×10, ×100, ×200 and ×500. A socket is provided for a gain resistor for custom gain selection insteadof unity gain (×1). Gain for any channel can be set to any value between unity and ×500 by installing anappropriate resistor. Four separate filter stages follow the 4 input stages. The outputs are connected to a
4-channel multiplexer stage. The enabled output MUX allows up to four DBK18s to share a common
analog base channel.

BNC

Terminal
Block+ _Gain-Select Switches
SW1-SW4aAmplifierSwitchable
bias resistors(per channel)
SW5Filter-Bypass/
Enable Jumpers
J3-J6
BY
LPF
EN
f

Low-Pass
Filter

CH 0 (1 of 4 identical channels)
CH 1
CH 2
CH 3

P1
J1 Output channel 16
selection header
MUX

Board-SelectSwitchSW6
Card Address
recognition stage

2

Channel address lines

2

DBK18 Block Diagram

Hardware Setup
Card Connection
The DBK18 is equipped with BNC connectors for easy access to all of the analog inputs. Connections areprovided for 4 differential inputs. The card also includes a terminal block as a connection-option to the
BNC connectors.
Note: New versions of the DBK18 have been enhanced by the addition of a terminal block. The BNC
connectors are still usable, and board functions have not been changed.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

918894

DBK18, pg. 1

Card Configuration
Factory Defaults•

100K bias resistors – Enabled•

Low-Pass Filter – Bypassed (Disabled)•

Gain – x1

Input Termination

OPEN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Terminal
Block
+ _

SW5

DBK18 provides two 100 KΩ bias resistors foreach analog input. For balanced 200 KΩ input
impedance, both resistors should be switched in.
An 8-position DIP switch (SW5) can selectively
engage the bias resistors. The input circuit andswitch positions are shown in the figure. The
switches must be in the closed position to engage
the termination resistors. For unbalanced highinput, only the (-) resistor should be used. Ifneither resistor is used, some external bias current
path is required.

44+
33+
22+
11+

N

+
-

100 kΩ
A

A

Input Impedance/Termination

Examples of Bias Resistor Selection Options

Gain Settings
On the card, each channel has a gain-set switch labeled GAIN 1 (SW1) to GAIN
4 (SW4) and holes for gain resistors labeled RG1 to RG4. The table in the figure
shows gain values for switch settings 0 to 4. If a custom gain is desired, theswitch is set to position 0; and a gain resistor must be mounted and soldered onto
the card. The value of the gain resistor is determined by the formula:
RGAIN = [40,000 / (Gain -1)] - 50 Ω
Address Configuration
Up to 4 DBK18s can be connected to each analog channel. Since this is adaisy-chain interface, each card must have a unique address (channel number
and card number). Note that the default setting of SW6 is Card 1.
To configure the card, locate the 16 × 2-pin header labeled JP1 near the front of
the board. The 16 jumper locations on this header are labeled CH0 throughCH15. Place the jumper on the channel you wish to use. Only one jumper isused on a single card. Four cards in the daisy-chain can have the same channel
number as long as each card number is unique.
Set switch SW6 for each of the 4 DBK18s on a single channel. Verify that only
one card in a system is set to a particular channel and card number.

DBK18, pg. 2918894

DBK Option Cards and Modules

CE Compliance
Reference Notes:
Should your data acquisition system need to comply with CE standards, refer tothe CE Compliance section of the Signal Management chapter.

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration
Use of the DBK18 requires setting jumpers in DaqBooks/100 Series & /200 Series devices and
DaqBoards [ISA type].
1.

If not using auxiliary power, place the JP1 jumper in the Analog Option Card mode.

Configuration Jumpers
Note: The default position is necessary to power the interface circuitry of the DBK18 via theinternal ±15 VDC power supply. If using auxiliary power (e.g., DBK32A, DBK33), youmust remove both JP1 jumpers. Refer to Power Requirements in the DBK Basics section andto the DBK32A and DBK33 sections, as applicable.
2.

For DaqBook/100, /112, and /120 only, place the JP4 jumper in single-ended mode.
Note: Analog expansion cards convert all input signals to single-ended voltages referenced
to analog common.

DaqBook/2000 Series and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration
No jumper configurations are required for these /2000 series devices.

Configuring DBK18 Filter Sections
There are 4 low-pass, 3-pole active filters on the DBK18. Each filter can be enabled (EN), or bypassed(BY) by placement of the jumper on J3 for channel 0, J4 for channel 1, J5 for channel 2, or J6 forchannel 3. The factory-default setting is bypassed (BY) for each channel.
Each filter can be configured as a Butterworth, Bessel, or Chebyshev filter with corner frequencies up to
50 kHz. Filter properties depend on the values of resistors and capacitors installed in several circuit
locations. Above 10 Hz, installing capacitors is unnecessary because capacitors in the ICs are sufficient.
In all cases, three resistors are required to complete the active filter circuits contained mostly within the
UAF42 ICs.
The following circuit diagram shows the active filter IC in a typical section of the DBK18. The resistors
and capacitors outside the IC have a physical location in a DIP-16 socket (dual in-line, 16 pins) with an
RCnn designator. The RC indicates the needed part is a resistor or capacitor; the 3rd character is thechannel number; and the 4th character corresponds to the socket position (A-H).

DBK Option Cards and Modules

918894

DBK18, pg. 3

Filter Circuit Diagram
A machined-pin IC socket in each filter RC location can accept resistors and capacitors that plug directly
into the socket; however, this is not recommended. Two much better approaches exist. The first is to use
pre-configured plug-in filter modules; the second is to configure your own plug-in module using a blank
CN-115. Both of these options are depicted in the following illustration.
The use of plug-in modules provides excellent “gold-to-gold” contact between the components of theplug-in module and the on-board header.

The following figure shows the DIP-16 component pattern typical of the 4 filter sections.

DIP-16 Component Pattern

Note: In the DIP-16 figure, “n” corresponds to “channel number.”Note: In the DIP-16 figure, pin 7 of the DIP-16 socket:• connects to pin 8 for low-pass filtering• connects to pin 6 for band-pass filtering
DBK18, pg. 4918894

DBK Option Cards and Modules

The following table lists values of components for common corner frequencies in Butterworth filters. If designing
your own filter, software from Burr-Brown provides the component values to create the desired filter. Note thatthe design math is beyond the scope of this manual.
3-Pole Butterworth Filter Components
3dB (Hz)
RCnA
RCnB
RCnC
RCnD
RCnE
RCnF
0.05
1 µF
none
1 µF
3.16 MΩ
3.16 MΩ
3.16 MΩ
0.10
1 µF
none
1 µF
1.58 MΩ
1.58 MΩ
1.58 MΩ
0.20
1 µF
none
1 µF
787 kΩ
787 kΩ
787 kΩ
0.50
0.1 µFnone
0.1 µF3.16 MΩ
3.16 MΩ
3.16 MΩ1
0.1 µFnone
0.1 µF1.58 MΩ
1.58 MΩ
1.58 MΩ2
0.1 µFnone
0.1 µF787 kΩ
787 kΩ
787 kΩ
5*
0.01 µF
none
0.01 µF
3.16 MΩ
3.16 MΩ
3.16 MΩ
10*
0.01 µF
none
0.01 µF1.58 MΩ
1.58 MΩ
1.58 MΩ
20
0.01 µF
none
0.01 µF
787 kΩ
787 kΩ
787 kΩ
50
0.001µFnone
none
3.16 MΩ
3.16 MΩ
3.16 MΩ100*
0.001µFnone
none
1.58 MΩ
1.58 MΩ
1.58 MΩ200
0.001µFnone
none
787 kΩ
787 kΩ
787 kΩ
500*
0.001µFnone
none
316 kΩ
316 kΩ
316 kΩ
1000*
0.001µFnone
none
158 kΩ
158 kΩ
158 kΩ
2000
0.001µFnone
none
78.7 kΩ78.7 kΩ78.7 kΩ
5000
0.001µFnone
none
31.6 kΩ31.6 kΩ31.6 kΩ
10000
0.001µFnone
none
15.8 kΩ15.8 kΩ15.8 kΩ*These pre-configured Butterworth frequency modules are available from the manufacturer.

RCnG
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none

RCnH
1 µF
1 µF
1 µF
0.1 µF0.1 µF0.1 µF0.01 µF
0.01 µF
0.01 µF
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none

You have the option to configure the filter sections as band-pass filters rather than low-pass filters. The
component selection program provides band-pass component values. The program also computes anddisplays phase and gain characteristics of the filter sections as a function of frequency.

Software Setup
Reference Notes:
o DaqView users - Refer to chapter 3, DBK Setup in DaqView.
o LogView users - Refer to chapter 4, DBK Setup in LogView.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

918894

DBK18, pg. 5

DBK18 – Specifications
Name/Function: Low-Pass Filter Card
Number of Channels: 4
Input Connections: 4 BNC connectors
Output Connector: DB37 male, connects to P1 with a CA-37-x cable
Number of Cards Addressable: 64
Input Type: Differential
Voltage Input Ranges:
0 to ±5000 mVDC
0 to ±500 mVDC
0 to ±50 mVDC
0 to ±25 mVDC
0 to ±10 mVDC
Input Amplifier Slew Rate: 12 V/µs minimum
Input Gains: ×1, ×10, ×100, ×200, x500 and user-set
Input Offset Voltage: 500 µV + 5000/G maximum (nullable)
Input Offset Drift: ±5 + 100/G µV/°C maximum
Input Bias Current: 100 pA maximum
Input Offset Currents: 50 pA maximum
12

Input Impedance: 5 × 10 parallel with 6 pF
Switchable Bias Resistors: 100 KΩ each to analog common
Gain Errors:
0.04% @ ×1
0.1% @ ×10
0.2% @ ×100
0.4% @ ×200
1.0% @ ×500
Gain vs Temperature:
×1 @ ±20 ppm/°C
×10 @ ±20 ppm/°C
×100 @ ±40 ppm/°C
×200 @ ±60 ppm/°C
×500 @ ±100 ppm/°C
Non-Linearity:
×1 to ±0.015 % full-scale
×10 to ±0.015 % full-scale
×100 to ±0.025 % full-scale
×200 to ±0.025 % full-scale
×500 to ±0.045 % full-scale
Common-Mode Rejection:
70 dB minimum @ ×1
87 dB minimum @ ×10
100 dB minimum @ ×100
100 dB minimum @ ×200
100 dB minimum @ ×500
Active Filter Device: UAF42 (Burr-Brown)
Number of Poles/Filter: 3
Types of Filters: Bessel, Butterworth, Chebyshev
Frequency Range:
0.1 Hz to 20 kHz
The frequency is set by the installation of
4-6 resistors, and/or capacitors, in sockets.
Default Frequency:
1 Hz
Other frequencies may be implemented bysoldering resistors, and/or capacitors, tolocations on the 4 blank plug-in headers.
Values for common frequencies and theircomponent values are provided with theblank headers.

DBK18, pg. 6918894

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK20 and DBK21

Digital I/O Cards
DBK20 – Provides Screw Terminals.
DBK21 – Provides DB37 male connectors.

Overview ...... 1
Hardware Setup ...... 2

Card Connection ...... 2
Card Configuration ...... 2
LogBook Connection ...... 2
DaqBook and DaqBoard Connection ...... 2
DBK21 DB37 Male P2 Connector Pinout ...... 3

Software Setup ...... 3
DBK20 - Specifications ...... 5
DBK21 - Specifications ...... 5
Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable toyour system, as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics locatednear
the front of this manual.

Overview
The DBK20 and DBK21 are general purpose digital I/O cards that can increase available digital I/O lines
by 48 per card. The DBK20 uses screw terminals; the DBK21 uses DB37 connectors. Both cards connect
to the P2 digital I/O port via the interface cable (CA-37-x).
Note: DBK20 and DBK21 require a P2 interface and therefore, can not be used with Daq PC-Cards.
Note: For DaqBoard/2000 Series and /2000c Series board applications, the P2 interface is derived via useof an appropriate P4 adapter. P4 adapters are discussed in the DBK200 Series document modules.
Up to four DBK20s or DBK21s can be attached for a maximum of 192 lines (4×48). The local I/O lines
cannot be used while expansion cards are attached. Thus, the first expansion card increases the number ofusable digital I/O lines from 24 to 48, and subsequent cards each add 48 additional lines of programmabledigital I/O.

See
Note 1

See
Note 1

Note 1: Page 3 of this document module includes a pinout of the DBK21’s male DB37 connectors.
DBK Option Cards and Modules

879795

DBK20 and DBK21, pg. 1

Hardware Setup
Card Connection
1.

Connect wire leads to terminal blocks (if using a DBK20) or ribbon cable(s) terminated in 37-pin
female connectors (if using a DBK21).

2.

Once all connections are in place, secure wires to the board at captive areas at the end of the card.
Nylon tie wraps (not included) work well for this purpose.

Card Configuration
The header shunt must be set on the proper JP1 position for
the intended address. The table shows the 4 choices
available.
Note: In multiple card systems, only 1 card at a time canhave any given setting.
Set JP1 header for the desired base address by placing theshunt jumper in one of the positions noted in the table(A to D). JP1 is labeled ADDRESS SELECT and is locatedat the card’s lower left side.

Address
Select
A
B
C
D

Hex
Value
0x63
0x67
0x6B
0x6F
0x73
0x77
0x7B
0x7F

Bank
0
1
2
3

LogBook Connection
The DBK20 or DBK21s attach to the LogBook’s P2 digital I/O connector.
P2 expansion cables must be kept short for proper operation.
Do not exceed 14” per attached DBK card.
A series of interface cables are available for connecting up to four DBK20 or DBK21
cards.
1.

If using the optional DBK10 enclosure, slide the DB37 end of the board into a rear opening, andsecure with hold-in screw-washer at rear panel.

2.

Connect an accessory ribbon cable (with -x indicating the number of cards to be connected) from thedigital I/O port (P2) of the LogBook to the DB37 connector at the end of the option card.

DaqBook and DaqBoard Connection
The DBK20 or DBK21s attach to the DaqBook, DaqBoard [ISA type] P2 digital I/O connector or, for a
DaqBoard/2000 Series or /2000/c Series board, to the P2 connector of an appropriate P4 adapter. P4
adapters are discussed in DBK200 Series document modules.
P2 expansion cables must be kept short for proper operation.
Do not exceed 14” per attached DBK card.
A series of interface cables are available for connecting up to four DBK20 or DBK21
cards.
1.

If using the optional DBK10 enclosure, slide the DB37 end of the board into a rear opening, andsecure with hold-in screw-washer at rear panel.

2.

Connect an accessory ribbon cable (with -x indicating the number of cards to be connected) from thedigital I/O port (P2) of the Daq devices or adapter to the DB37 connector at the end of the option
card.

DaqBook and DaqBoard Configuration
There are no hardware configuration setups internal to DaqBooks and DaqBoards to allow expanded TTL
I/O usage.

DBK20 and DBK21, pg. 2879795DBK Option Cards and Modules

Digital I/O+5V
PO GN 20
RT D 2PO C
1
7R
PO T C 22
RT 6
PO C 23
5
R
PO T C 24
R
4
PO T C 25
R
3
PO T C 26
RT 2 2PO C
7R
1
PO T C 28
RT 0 2PO A
9R
7PO T A 30
RT 6 3PO A
1
5R
PO T A 32
4
PO RT A 33
R
3
PO T A 34
2
R
PO T A 35
RT 1
A 0 36
37

1
IR
IN
2
IR PUTE
3
PO NAB
4R
PO T B LE
R
7
5
P TB
6 ORT 6
PO B
5
R
7
P T
8 ORT B 4
PO B
3
R
9
P TB
10 ORT 2
11 POR B 1
G T
12 ND B 0
N
13 /C
G
14 ND
N
15 /C
16 GND
17 N/C
G
18 ND
+
19 5
GN
D

DBK21 DB37 Male P2 Connector Pinout

Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

Signal Name
IR INPUTIR ENABLE
PORT B 7
PORT B 6
PORT B 5
PORT B 4
PORT B 3
PORT B 2
PORT B 1
PORT B 0
GND
N/C
GND
N/C
GND
N/C
GND
+5 V
GND
+5 V
GND
PORT C 7
PORT C 6
PORT C 5
PORT C 4
PORT C 3
PORT C 2
PORT C 1
PORT C 0
PORT A 7
PORT A 6
PORT A 5
PORT A 4
PORT A 3
PORT A 2
PORT A 1
PORT A 0

Note: There are two male DB37
connectors per DBK21 card.

Description for P2 Pin Use
Interrupt line input (no functions to access this)Interrupt line enable (no functions to access this)
Digital input/output - port B bit 7
Digital input/output - port B bit 6
Digital input/output - port B bit 5
Digital input/output - port B bit 4
Digital input/output - port B bit 3
Digital input/output - port B bit 2
Digital input/output - port B bit 1
Digital input/output - port B bit 0
Digital groundPin not connected/not used
Digital groundPin not connected/not used
Digital groundPin not connected/not used
Digital ground+5 V supply (Refer to Power Requirements, DBK Basics pg. 13)
Digital ground+5 V supply (Refer to Power Requirements, DBK Basics pg 13)
Digital ground
Digital input/output - port C bit 7
Digital input/output - port C bit 6
Digital input/output - port C bit 5
Digital input/output - port C bit 4
Digital input/output - port C bit 3
Digital input/output - port C bit 2
Digital input/output - port C bit 1
Digital input/output - port C bit 0
Digital input/output - port A bit 7
Digital input/output - port A bit 6
Digital input/output - port A bit 5
Digital input/output - port A bit 4
Digital input/output - port A bit 3
Digital input/output - port A bit 2
Digital input/output - port A bit 1
Digital input/output - port A bit 0

Software Setup
Reference Notes:
o DaqView users - Refer to chapter 3, DBK Setup in DaqView.
o LogView users - Refer to chapter 4, DBK Setup in LogView.

Note:

Refer to the full-page table on the next page for valid hex codes.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

879795

DBK20 and DBK21, pg. 3

DBK20 and DBK21, pg. 4879795DBK Option Cards and Modules

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
Binary01010000 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 50
01010001 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 51
01010010 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 52
01010011 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 53
01010100 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 54
01010101 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 55
01010110 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 56
01010111 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 57
01011000 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 58
01011001 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 59
01011010 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 5A
01011011 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 5B
01011100 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 5C
01011101 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 5D
01011110 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 5E
01011111 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON 5F
LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
Binary01100000 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 60
01100001 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 61
01100010 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 62
01100011 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON 63
01100100 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 64
01100101 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON 65
01100110 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF 66
01100111 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON 67
01101000 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 68
01101001 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON 69
01101010 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 6A
01101011 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON 6B
01101100 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 6C
01101101 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON 6D
01101110 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF 6E
01101111 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON 6F
LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 70
OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON 71
OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF 72
OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 73
OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF 74
OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON 75
OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF 76
OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON 77
OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 78
OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON 79
OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 7A
OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON 7B
OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 7C
OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON 7D
OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF 7E
OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 7F

BinaryLR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
00010000 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 10
00010001 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 1100010010 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 12
00010011 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 13
00010100 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 14
00010101 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 1500010110 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 16
00010111 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 1700011000 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 18
00011001 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 1900011010 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 1A
00011011 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 1B
00011100 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 1C
00011101 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 1D
00011110 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 1E
00011111 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON 1F

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
Binary00100000 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 20
00100001 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 2100100010 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 22
00100011 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON 2300100100 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 24
00100101 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON 25
00100110 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF 26
00100111 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON 27
00101000 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 28
00101001 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON 29
00101010 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 2A
00101011 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON 2B
00101100 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 2C
00101101 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON 2D
00101110 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF 2E
00101111 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON 2F

BinaryLR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
00110000 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 30
00110001 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON 31
00110010 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF 32
00110011 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 33
00110100 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF 34
00110101 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON 35
00110110 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF 36
00110111 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON 37
00111000 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 38
00111001 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON 39
00111010 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 3A
00111011 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON 3B
00111100 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 3C
00111101 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON 3D
00111110 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF 3E
00111111 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON 3F
Binary01110000
01110001
01110010
01110011
01110100
01110101
0111011001110111
01111000
01111001
01111010
01111011
01111100
01111101
0111111001111111

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
Binary01000000 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 40
01000001 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 41
01000010 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 42
01000011 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 43
01000100 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 44
01000101 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 45
01000110 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 46
01000111 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 47
01001000 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 48
01001001 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 49
01001010 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 4A
01001011 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 4B
01001100 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 4C
01001101 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 4D
01001110 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 4E
01001111 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 4F

BinaryLR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
00000000 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 00
00000001 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 01
00000010 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 02
00000011 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 03
00000100 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 04
00000101 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 05
00000110 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 06
00000111 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 07
00001000 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 08
00001001 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 09
00001010 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 0A
00001011 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 0B
00001100 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 0C
00001101 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 0D
00001110 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 0E
00001111 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 0F

Binary10110000
10110001
10110010
10110011
10110100
10110101
10110110
10110111
10111000
10111001
10111010
10111011
10111100
10111101
10111110
10111111

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF B0
ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON B1
ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF B2
ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON B3
ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF B4
ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON B5
ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF B6
ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON B7
ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF B8
ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON B9
ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF BA
ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON BB
ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF BC
ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON BD
ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF BE
ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON BF

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
Binary10100000 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF A0
10100001 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON A1
10100010 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF A2
10100011 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON A3
10100100 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF A4
10100101 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON A5
10100110 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF A6
10100111 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON A7
10101000 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF A810101001 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON A910101010 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF AA
10101011 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON AB
10101100 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF AC
10101101 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON AD
10101110 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF AE
10101111 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON AF

BinaryLR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
10010000 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 90
10010001 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 91
10010010 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 92
10010011 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 93
10010100 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 94
10010101 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 95
10010110 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 96
10010111 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 97
10011000 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 98
10011001 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 99
10011010 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 9A
10011011 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 9B
10011100 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 9C
10011101 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 9D
10011110 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 9E
10011111 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON 9F

BinaryLR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
10000000 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 80
10000001 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 81
10000010 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 82
10000011 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 83
10000100 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 84
10000101 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 85
10000110 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 86
10000111 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 87
10001000 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 88
10001001 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 89
10001010 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 8A
10001011 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 8B
10001100 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 8C
10001101 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 8D
10001110 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 8E
10001111 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 8F

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF E0
ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON E1
ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF E2
ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON E3
ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF E4
ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON E5
ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF E6
ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON E7
ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF E8
ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON E9
ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF EA
ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON EB
ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF EC
ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ED
ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF EE
ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON EF

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF D0
ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON D1
ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF D2
ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON D3
ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF D4
ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON D5
ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF D6
ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON D7
ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF D8
ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON D9
ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF DA
ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON DB
ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF DC
ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON DD
ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF DE
ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON DF

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF C0
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON C1
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF C2
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON C3
ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF C4
ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON C5
ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF C6
ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON C7
ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF C8
ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON C9
ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF CA
ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON CB
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF CC
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON CD
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF CE
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON CF

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
Binary11110000 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF F011110001 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON F111110010 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF F211110011 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON F311110100 ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF F411110101 ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON F511110110 ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF F611110111 ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON F711111000 ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF F811111001 ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON F911111010 ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF FA
11111011 ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON FB
11111100 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF FC
11111101 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON FD
11111110 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF FE
11111111 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON FF

Binary11100000
11100001
11100010
11100011
11100100
11100101
1110011011100111
11101000
11101001
11101010
11101011
1110110011101101
1110111011101111

Binary11010000
11010001
11010010
11010011
11010100
11010101
1101011011010111
11011000
11011001
11011010
11011011
11011100
11011101
1101111011011111

Binary11000000
11000001
11000010
11000011
11000100
11000101
11000110
11000111
11001000
11001001
11001010
11001011
11001100
11001101
11001110
11001111

DBK20 - Specifications
Name/Function: General Purpose Digital I/O Card
Number of Channels: 48 I/O channels
Connector: Screw terminals
Device: 82C55 x 2
Output Voltage Levels:
Minimum “1" Voltage: 3.0 @ 2.5 mA sourcing
Maximum “0" Voltage: 0.4 @ 2.5 mA sinking
Output Currents:
Maximum Source Current: 2.5 mA
Maximum Sink Current: -2.5 mA
Input Voltage Levels:
Minimum Required “1” Voltage Level: 2.0 V
Maximum Allowed “0” Voltage Level: 0.8 V
Output Float Leakage Current: 10 µA

DBK21 – Specifications
Name/Function: General Purpose Digital I/O Card
Number of Channels: 48 I/O channels
Connector: DB37 male, corresponds to P2 pinout
Device: 82C55 x 2
Output Voltage Levels:
Minimum “1” Voltage: 3.0 @ 2.5 mA sourcing
Maximum “0” Voltage: 0.4 @ 2.5 mA sinking
Output Currents:
Maximum Source Current: 2.5 mA
Maximum Sink Current: -2.5 mA
Input Voltage Levels:
Minimum Required “1” Voltage Level: 2.0 V
Maximum Allowed “0” Voltage Level: 0.8 V
Output Float Leakage Current: 10 µA

DBK Option Cards and Modules

879795

DBK20 and DBK21, pg. 5

DBK20 and DBK21, pg. 6879795DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK23Isolated Digital Input Chassis
Overview …… 1
Power Requirements …… 1
Hardware Setup …… 2

Card Connection …… 2
Card Configuration …… 3
DaqBook and DaqBoard Connection …… 3
DaqBoard/2000 Series Board Connection …… 3
DaqBook and DaqBoard Configuration …… 4
LogBook Connection …… 4

Software Setup …… 4
DBK23 – Specifications …… 6
Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics located near
the front of this manual.

Overview
The DBK23 is a 3-port by 8-bit digital input chassis that connects to the LogBook’s, DaqBook or
DaqBoard[ISA type] P2 Digital I/O Port or, for the DaqBoard/2000 Series boards [except
DaqBoard/2003], to an appropriate P4 adapter. These adapters are discussed in the DBK200 series
document modules.
The DBK23 provides 500 V isolation from the DaqBook/DaqBoard or LogBook system and from channelto-channel. Up to 8 DBK23s can attach to the LogBook or to the DaqBook/DaqBoard (not the Daq PCCard), offering up to 192 bits of isolated digital input.
The DBK23 provides screw terminal access to each of its 24 isolated inputs. A slide-out PCB allows easy
access to the controls and connectors. The input circuitry allows input voltages ranging from 0 to 30.0 V.
Note: The local digital I/O cannot be used while any DBK23s are attached.

Power Requirements
The DBK23 can be powered from a 9 to 24 VDC source such as an adapter, a standard 12 volt car battery,or an optional rechargeable nickel-cadmium battery module (DBK30A). This power flexibility makes the
DBK23 ideal for field and remote data acquisition applications.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

879795

DBK23, pg. 1

Power supplied to the DBK23 powers the on-board regulator. Connect the power supply (AC adapter) to
the 5-pin DIN (labeled POWER IN) located on the front panel of the DBK23 chassis. Note the two power
indicators on the rear panel of the DBK23. Check that both SYSTEM and LOCAL power LEDs are on at
all times during operation. The second 5-pin DIN connector (labeled POWER OUT) can be cascaded toanother accessory. A single power source can supply multiple DBK23 units.

CAUTION
Excessive power consumption can cause equipment damage. Calculate system power
requirements prior to daisy-chaining.

Hardware Setup
Card Connection
Open the DBK23 case by loosening the two retaining screws on the chassis front
panel. Slide out the DBK23 board in order to connect wires to terminal blocks.
Each input channel (or bit) is equipped with a discrete two-pole screw terminal
block for isolated HI and LOW termination. The terminals accept 12 AWG to
22 AWG wire. Insulated wire types selected should meet or exceed 500 V
isolation specifications.
Strip insulation from the ends of wires (no more than 1/4"). Insert wire into the screw terminal receptacle
so that only the bare portion of wire extends into the opening. Bare wire should not extend more than
1/16" beyond the receptacle. These steps are essential to maintaining proper voltage isolation. Once thewire ends are in place, turn the slot head screw at the top of the block until the receptacle grips the wire
firmly. Do not over tighten. Captive holes have been placed in appropriate locations to secure groups ofwires to the board. Nylon lock ties (not included) work well for this purpose.

DBK23, pg. 2879795DBK Option Cards and Modules

Card Configuration
The LogBook, DaqBook, and DaqBoard can each support up to eight DBK23s in a daisy-chain
configuration using an accessory cable (see figure). Each unit is then configured via the on-board DIP
switch (S1) for its unique base address. No more than one unit in a common chain may have the same S1
setting. The table shows possible switch settings and addresses. The XI/O addresses can be used byprogrammers to access specific ports on specific cards.
Software constants have been predefined in the API as follows: DdpExpnA; DdpExpnB;
DdpExpnC. Where “n” is replaced by the card number shown in the address table; andA, B, or C is the port for that card.

Bank

Card No.

0
1
2
3

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

S1
Configuration
C
B

A

0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

XI/O Address Value (Hex)Port CPortPort A
B
0x62
0x61
0x60
0x66
0x65
0x64
0x6A
0x69
0x68
0x6E
0x6D
0x6C
0x72
0x71
0x70
0x76
0x75
0x74
0x7A
0x79
0x78
0x7E
0x7D
0x7C

DaqBook and DaqBoard Connection
Connect the P2 digital I/O port of the DaqBook or DaqBoard [ISA type] or, for a DaqBoard/2000 Seriesboard [except DaqBoard/2003] to an appropriate P4 adapter, to the P2 connector of the DBK23 using anaccessory cable. Select up to 8 positions for a total of 192 programmable isolated inputs.
Note that P4 adapters are discussed in the DBK200 Series document modules.

DaqBoard/2000 Series Board Connection
Use a 37 pin accessory cable to connect the P2 digital I/O port of an appropriated DaqBoard/2000 Series
P4 adapter to DBK23’s P2. Note that you can select up to eight positions for a total of 192 programmableisolated inputs.

P4 adapters are discussed in the DBK200 Series document modules.

P2 expansion cables must be kept short for proper operation.
Do not exceed 14” per attached DBK card.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

879795

DBK23, pg. 3

DaqBook and DaqBoard Configuration
There are no hardware configuration setups internal to the DaqBook or DaqBoard required for the DBK23.

LogBook Connection
Connect the P2 digital I/O port of the LogBook to the P2 connector of the DBK23 using an accessory
cable. Select up to 8 positions for a total of 192 programmable isolated inputs.

Software Setup
Reference Notes:
o DaqView users - Refer to chapter 3, DBK Setup in DaqView.
o LogView users - Refer to chapter 4, DBK Setup in LogView.

Note:

DBK23, pg. 4

Refer to the full-page table on the next page for valid hex codes.

879795DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK Option Cards and Modules

879795

DBK23, pg. 5

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
Binary01010000 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 50
01010001 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 51
01010010 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 52
01010011 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 53
01010100 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 54
01010101 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 55
01010110 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 56
01010111 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 57
01011000 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 58
01011001 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 59
01011010 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 5A
01011011 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 5B
01011100 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 5C
01011101 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 5D
01011110 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 5E
01011111 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON 5F
LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
Binary01100000 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 60
01100001 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 61
01100010 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 62
01100011 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON 63
01100100 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 64
01100101 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON 65
01100110 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF 66
01100111 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON 67
01101000 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 68
01101001 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON 69
01101010 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 6A
01101011 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON 6B
01101100 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 6C
01101101 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON 6D
01101110 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF 6E
01101111 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON 6F
LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 70
OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON 71
OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF 72
OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 73
OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF 74
OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON 75
OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF 76
OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON 77
OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 78
OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON 79
OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 7A
OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON 7B
OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 7C
OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON 7D
OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF 7E
OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 7F

BinaryLR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
00010000 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 10
00010001 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 1100010010 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 12
00010011 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 13
00010100 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 14
00010101 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 1500010110 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 16
00010111 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 1700011000 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 18
00011001 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 1900011010 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 1A
00011011 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 1B
00011100 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 1C
00011101 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 1D
00011110 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 1E
00011111 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON 1F

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
Binary00100000 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 20
00100001 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 2100100010 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 22
00100011 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON 2300100100 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 24
00100101 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON 25
00100110 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF 26
00100111 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON 27
00101000 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 28
00101001 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON 29
00101010 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 2A
00101011 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON 2B
00101100 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 2C
00101101 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON 2D
00101110 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF 2E
00101111 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON 2F

BinaryLR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
00110000 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 30
00110001 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON 31
00110010 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF 32
00110011 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 33
00110100 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF 34
00110101 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON 35
00110110 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF 36
00110111 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON 37
00111000 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 38
00111001 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON 39
00111010 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 3A
00111011 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON 3B
00111100 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 3C
00111101 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON 3D
00111110 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF 3E
00111111 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON 3F
Binary01110000
01110001
01110010
01110011
01110100
01110101
0111011001110111
01111000
01111001
01111010
01111011
01111100
01111101
0111111001111111

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
Binary01000000 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 40
01000001 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 41
01000010 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 42
01000011 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 43
01000100 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 44
01000101 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 45
01000110 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 46
01000111 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 47
01001000 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 48
01001001 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 49
01001010 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 4A
01001011 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 4B
01001100 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 4C
01001101 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 4D
01001110 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 4E
01001111 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 4F

BinaryLR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
00000000 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 00
00000001 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 01
00000010 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 02
00000011 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 03
00000100 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 04
00000101 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 05
00000110 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 06
00000111 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 07
00001000 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 08
00001001 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 09
00001010 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 0A
00001011 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 0B
00001100 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 0C
00001101 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 0D
00001110 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 0E
00001111 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 0F

Binary10110000
10110001
10110010
10110011
10110100
10110101
10110110
10110111
10111000
10111001
10111010
10111011
10111100
10111101
10111110
10111111

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF B0
ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON B1
ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF B2
ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON B3
ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF B4
ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON B5
ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF B6
ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON B7
ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF B8
ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON B9
ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF BA
ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON BB
ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF BC
ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON BD
ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF BE
ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON BF

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
Binary10100000 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF A0
10100001 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON A1
10100010 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF A2
10100011 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON A3
10100100 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF A4
10100101 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON A5
10100110 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF A6
10100111 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON A7
10101000 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF A810101001 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON A910101010 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF AA
10101011 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON AB
10101100 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF AC
10101101 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON AD
10101110 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF AE
10101111 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON AF

BinaryLR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
10010000 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 90
10010001 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 91
10010010 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 92
10010011 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 93
10010100 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 94
10010101 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 95
10010110 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 96
10010111 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 97
10011000 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 98
10011001 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 99
10011010 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 9A
10011011 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 9B
10011100 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 9C
10011101 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 9D
10011110 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 9E
10011111 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON 9F

BinaryLR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
10000000 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 80
10000001 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 81
10000010 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 82
10000011 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 83
10000100 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 84
10000101 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 85
10000110 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 86
10000111 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 87
10001000 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 88
10001001 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 89
10001010 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 8A
10001011 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 8B
10001100 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 8C
10001101 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 8D
10001110 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 8E
10001111 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 8F

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF E0
ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON E1
ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF E2
ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON E3
ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF E4
ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON E5
ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF E6
ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON E7
ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF E8
ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON E9
ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF EA
ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON EB
ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF EC
ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ED
ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF EE
ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON EF

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF D0
ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON D1
ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF D2
ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON D3
ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF D4
ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON D5
ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF D6
ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON D7
ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF D8
ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON D9
ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF DA
ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON DB
ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF DC
ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON DD
ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF DE
ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON DF

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF C0
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON C1
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF C2
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON C3
ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF C4
ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON C5
ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF C6
ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON C7
ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF C8
ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON C9
ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF CA
ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON CB
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF CC
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON CD
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF CE
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON CF

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
Binary11110000 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF F011110001 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON F111110010 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF F211110011 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON F311110100 ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF F411110101 ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON F511110110 ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF F611110111 ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON F711111000 ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF F811111001 ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON F911111010 ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF FA
11111011 ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON FB
11111100 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF FC
11111101 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON FD
11111110 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF FE
11111111 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON FF

Binary11100000
11100001
11100010
11100011
11100100
11100101
1110011011100111
11101000
11101001
11101010
11101011
1110110011101101
1110111011101111

Binary11010000
11010001
11010010
11010011
11010100
11010101
1101011011010111
11011000
11011001
11011010
11011011
11011100
11011101
1101111011011111

Binary11000000
11000001
11000010
11000011
11000100
11000101
11000110
11000111
11001000
11001001
11001010
11001011
11001100
11001101
11001110
11001111

DBK23 – Specifications
Name/Function: General Purpose Optically Isolated Digital Input Module
Channels: 24 I/O channels
Connector: Screw terminals for signal outputs
Input Voltage Levels:
Range: 3 to 30 VDC
Input Current: 1.5 to 15 mA
Operating Voltage Range: 9 to 24 VDC
Module Power Requirements: 0.25 W; AC adapter included
120 VAC Adapter Supplied: 15 VDC @ 0.9 A
Isolation Voltage:
Channel-to-channel: 500 V
Channel-to-system: 500 V
Channel Address: Set by DIP switch

DBK23, pg. 6879795DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK24Isolated Digital Output Chassis
Overview …… 1
Power Requirements …… 2
Hardware Setup …… 2

Card Connection …… 2
Card Configuration …… 3
DaqBook and DaqBoard Connection …… 4
DaqBoard/2000 Series Board Connection …… 5
DaqBook and DaqBoard Configuration …… 5
LogBook Connection …… 5

Software Setup …… 5
DBK24 – Specifications …… 7
Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable toyour system, as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics located near
the front of this manual.

Overview
The DBK24 is a 3×8-channel digital output chassis that connects to the LogBook’s, DaqBook’s, or
DaqBoard’s [ISA type] P2 Digital I/O Port or, for a DaqBoard/2000 Series board [except DaqBoard/2003]
to an appropriate P4 adapter. These adapters are discussed in the DBK200 Series document modules.
The DBK24 provides 500 V isolation from the system and from channel-to-channel. Up to 8 DBK24s can
attach to the LogBook, DaqBook, or DaqBoard (not the Daq PC-Card), offering up to 192 bits of isolated
digital output.
The DBK24 provides screw-terminal access to each of its 24 isolated outputs. A slide-out PCB allows
easy access to the controls and connectors. The output circuitry allows output voltages as high as 60 V atcurrents up to 1 A.

The local digital I/O cannot be used while any DBK24s are attached.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

879795

DBK24, pg. 1

Power Requirements
The DBK24 can be powered by an included AC adapter, a standard 12-V car battery, or an optional
rechargeable nickel-cadmium battery module (DBK30A). This power flexibility makes the DBK24 ideal
for field and remote data acquisition applications.
Power supplied to the DBK24 powers the on-board regulator. Connect the power supply (AC adapter) to
the 5-pin DIN (labeled POWER IN) located on the front panel of the DBK24 chassis. Note the two power
indicators on the rear panel of the DBK24. Check that both SYSTEM and LOCAL power LEDs are on at
all times during operation. The second 5-pin DIN connector (labeled POWER OUT) can be cascaded toanother accessory. A single power source can supply multiple DBK24 units.

CAUTION
Excessive power consumption can cause equipment damage. Calculate system power
requirements prior to daisy-chaining. Refer to Power Requirements in the DBK Basics
section for calculation tables.

Hardware Setup
Card Connection
Open the DBK24 case by loosening the two retaining screws on the chassis front panel. Slide out the
DBK24 board in order to connect wires to terminal blocks. Each input channel (or bit) is equipped with adiscrete two-pole screw terminal block for isolated HI and LOW termination. The terminals accept 12 to
22 AWG wire. Insulated wire types selected should meet or exceed 500 V isolation specifications.

DBK24, pg. 2879795DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK24 simplified Component Layout

Strip some insulation from the ends of the wires (no more than 1/4"). Insert wire into the screw terminal
receptacle so that only the bare portion of wire extends into the opening. Bare wire should not extend
more than 1/16" beyond the receptacle. These steps are essential to maintaining proper voltage isolation.
After the wire ends are in place, turn the slot-head screw at the top of the block until the receptacle grips
the wire firmly. Do not over tighten. Captive holes have been placed in appropriate locations to securegroups of wires to the board. Nylon lock ties (not included) work well for this purpose.

Card Configuration
Factory Default:

Power-up output state – Hi (ON)

Presetting the Outputs
Each of the 24 outputs of the DBK24 can be configured to be ON or OFF at system power-on time. Eachport has an 8-pole DIP switch (Port A Preset, Port B Preset, and Port C Preset). Before applying power tothe LogBook, DaqBook/DaqBoard, or the DBK24:
1.

Locate the DIP switch (Port A Preset, Port B Preset, or Port C Preset) for the bit you wish to preset.

2.

Move the applicable micro-switch to the desired state [ON or OFF] for the output.

3.

First power on the DBK24, then the primnary acquisition device, i.e., the LogBook, DaqBook, or
DaqBoard. All outputs will be operating in accordance with their corresponding DIP switch.

Note: The first write command received by the DBK24 will override the switch settings until the unit isagain power-cycled. Subsequently, until the first write command is received, the switches may also
be used to control the outputs.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

879795

DBK24, pg. 3

User Output Configuration
The outputs of the DBK24 are designed to switch levels as high as 60 V at 1 A. The next figure shows atypical output hookup with a protective flyback diode in parallel with the load. When driving inductive
loads without built-in flyback protection, you must provide this diode.

CAUTION
Failure to provide adequate flyback protection may result in damage to
the DBK24’s output stage.

Each unit is configured via the on-board DIP switch (S1) for its unique base address. No more than one
unit in a common chain may have the same S1 setting. Below is a table of possible switch settings andaddresses.

Bank

Card
No.

0

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

1
2
3

S1 Configuration
C
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

B
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

Address Value (Hex)
A
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

Port C
0x62
0x66
0x6A
0x6E
0x72
0x76
0x7A
0x7E

Port B
0x61
0x65
0x69
0x6D
0x71
0x75
0x79
0x7D

Port A
0x60
0x64
0x68
0x6C
0x70
0x74
0x78
0x7C

Software constants have been predefined in the DaqBook/DaqBoard driver language
interface files for all languages as follows: DdpExpnA, DdpExpnB, DdpExpnC; where“n” is replaced by the card number in the address table; and A, B, or C is the port forthat card.

DaqBook and DaqBoard [ISA type] Connection
Connect the P2 digital I/O port of the DaqBook or
DaqBoard [ISA type] or, for a DaqBoard/2000
Series board [except DaqBoard/2003] to an
appropriate P4 adapter, to the P2 connector of the
DBK24 using an accessory cable (with -x
indicating the number of expansion units to beconnected). Select up to 8 positions for a total of
192 programmable isolated inputs.

DBK24, pg. 4879795DBK Option Cards and Modules

DaqBoard/2000 Series Board Connection
Use a 37 pin accessory cable to connect the P2 digital I/O port of the DaqBoard/2000 Series P4 adapter tothe P2 connector of the DBK24 using an accessory cable (with -x indicating the number of expansion units
to be connected). Select up to 8 positions for a total of 192 programmable isolated inputs.
P4 adapters are discussed in the DBK200 document modules.
P2 expansion cables must be kept short for proper operation.
Do not exceed 14” per attached DBK card.

DaqBook and DaqBoard Configuration
The DBK24 requires no hardware configuration setups internal to the DaqBook or DaqBoard.

LogBook Connection
Connect the P2 digital I/O port of
the LogBook to the P2 connectorof the DBK24 using an accessory
cable (with -x indicating thenumber of expansion units to beconnected). Select up to 8
positions for a total of 192
programmable isolated inputs.

Software Setup
Reference Notes:
o DaqView users - Refer to chapter 3, DBK Setup in DaqView.
o LogView users - Refer to chapter 4, DBK Setup in LogView.

Note: Refer to the full-page table on the next page for valid hex codes.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

879795

DBK24, pg. 5

DBK24, pg. 6879795DBK Option Cards and Modules

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
Binary01010000 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 50
01010001 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 51
01010010 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 52
01010011 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 53
01010100 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 54
01010101 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 55
01010110 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 56
01010111 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 57
01011000 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 58
01011001 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 59
01011010 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 5A
01011011 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 5B
01011100 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 5C
01011101 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 5D
01011110 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 5E
01011111 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON 5F
LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
Binary01100000 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 60
01100001 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 61
01100010 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 62
01100011 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON 63
01100100 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 64
01100101 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON 65
01100110 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF 66
01100111 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON 67
01101000 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 68
01101001 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON 69
01101010 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 6A
01101011 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON 6B
01101100 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 6C
01101101 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON 6D
01101110 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF 6E
01101111 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON 6F
LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 70
OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON 71
OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF 72
OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 73
OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF 74
OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON 75
OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF 76
OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON 77
OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 78
OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON 79
OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 7A
OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON 7B
OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 7C
OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON 7D
OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF 7E
OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 7F

BinaryLR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
00010000 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 10
00010001 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 1100010010 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 12
00010011 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 13
00010100 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 14
00010101 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 1500010110 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 16
00010111 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 1700011000 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 18
00011001 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 1900011010 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 1A
00011011 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 1B
00011100 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 1C
00011101 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 1D
00011110 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 1E
00011111 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON 1F

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
Binary00100000 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 20
00100001 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 2100100010 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 22
00100011 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON 2300100100 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 24
00100101 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON 25
00100110 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF 26
00100111 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON 27
00101000 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 28
00101001 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON 29
00101010 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 2A
00101011 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON 2B
00101100 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 2C
00101101 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON 2D
00101110 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF 2E
00101111 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON 2F

BinaryLR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
00110000 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 30
00110001 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON 31
00110010 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF 32
00110011 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 33
00110100 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF 34
00110101 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON 35
00110110 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF 36
00110111 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON 37
00111000 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 38
00111001 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON 39
00111010 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 3A
00111011 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON 3B
00111100 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 3C
00111101 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON 3D
00111110 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF 3E
00111111 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON 3F
Binary01110000
01110001
01110010
01110011
01110100
01110101
0111011001110111
01111000
01111001
01111010
01111011
01111100
01111101
0111111001111111

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
Binary01000000 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 40
01000001 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 41
01000010 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 42
01000011 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 43
01000100 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 44
01000101 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 45
01000110 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 46
01000111 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 47
01001000 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 48
01001001 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 49
01001010 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 4A
01001011 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 4B
01001100 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 4C
01001101 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 4D
01001110 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 4E
01001111 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 4F

BinaryLR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
00000000 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 00
00000001 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 01
00000010 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 02
00000011 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 03
00000100 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 04
00000101 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 05
00000110 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 06
00000111 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 07
00001000 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 08
00001001 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 09
00001010 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 0A
00001011 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 0B
00001100 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 0C
00001101 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 0D
00001110 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 0E
00001111 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 0F

Binary10110000
10110001
10110010
10110011
10110100
10110101
10110110
10110111
10111000
10111001
10111010
10111011
10111100
10111101
10111110
10111111

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF B0
ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON B1
ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF B2
ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON B3
ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF B4
ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON B5
ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF B6
ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON B7
ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF B8
ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON B9
ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF BA
ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON BB
ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF BC
ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON BD
ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF BE
ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON BF

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
Binary10100000 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF A0
10100001 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON A1
10100010 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF A2
10100011 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON A3
10100100 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF A4
10100101 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON A5
10100110 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF A6
10100111 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON A7
10101000 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF A810101001 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON A910101010 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF AA
10101011 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON AB
10101100 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF AC
10101101 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON AD
10101110 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF AE
10101111 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON AF

BinaryLR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
10010000 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 90
10010001 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 91
10010010 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 92
10010011 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 93
10010100 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 94
10010101 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 95
10010110 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 96
10010111 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 97
10011000 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 98
10011001 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 99
10011010 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 9A
10011011 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 9B
10011100 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 9C
10011101 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 9D
10011110 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 9E
10011111 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON 9F

BinaryLR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
10000000 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 80
10000001 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 81
10000010 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 82
10000011 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 83
10000100 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 84
10000101 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 85
10000110 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 86
10000111 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 87
10001000 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 88
10001001 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 89
10001010 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 8A
10001011 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 8B
10001100 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 8C
10001101 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 8D
10001110 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 8E
10001111 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 8F

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF E0
ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON E1
ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF E2
ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON E3
ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF E4
ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON E5
ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF E6
ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON E7
ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF E8
ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON E9
ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF EA
ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON EB
ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF EC
ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ED
ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF EE
ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON EF

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF D0
ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON D1
ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF D2
ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON D3
ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF D4
ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON D5
ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF D6
ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON D7
ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF D8
ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON D9
ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF DA
ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON DB
ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF DC
ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON DD
ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF DE
ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON DF

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF C0
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON C1
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF C2
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON C3
ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF C4
ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON C5
ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF C6
ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON C7
ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF C8
ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON C9
ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF CA
ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON CB
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF CC
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON CD
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF CE
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON CF

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
Binary11110000 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF F011110001 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON F111110010 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF F211110011 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON F311110100 ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF F411110101 ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON F511110110 ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF F611110111 ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON F711111000 ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF F811111001 ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON F911111010 ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF FA
11111011 ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON FB
11111100 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF FC
11111101 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON FD
11111110 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF FE
11111111 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON FF

Binary11100000
11100001
11100010
11100011
11100100
11100101
1110011011100111
11101000
11101001
11101010
11101011
1110110011101101
1110111011101111

Binary11010000
11010001
11010010
11010011
11010100
11010101
1101011011010111
11011000
11011001
11011010
11011011
11011100
11011101
1101111011011111

Binary11000000
11000001
11000010
11000011
11000100
11000101
11000110
11000111
11001000
11001001
11001010
11001011
11001100
11001101
11001110
11001111

DBK24 - Specifications
Name/Function: General Purpose Optically Isolated Digital Output Module
Channels: 24 I/O channels
Connector: Screw terminals for signal outputs
Output Channel Ratings:
Maximum current/channel: 1 A
Voltage drop @ 1 A and 25°C: 1 V
Maximum open circuit voltage: 60 VDC
Off-state leakage: 10 µA
Module Power Requirements: 1.5 W
120 VAC Adapter Supplied: 15 VDC @ 0.9 A
Isolation Voltage:
Channel-to-channel: 500 V
Channel-to-system: 500 V
Channel Address: Set by DIP switch
Maximum Module Power Dissipation:@ 25°C 12 W
@ 50°C 6 W

DBK Option Cards and Modules

879795

DBK24, pg. 7

DBK24, pg. 8879795DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK258-Channel Relay Output Card

Overview …… 1
Hardware Setup …… 2

Card Connection …… 2
Card Configuration …… 2
DaqBook and DaqBoard and DaqBoard/2000 Connection …… 4
DaqBook and DaqBoard Configuration …… 4

Software Setup …… 4
DBK25 – Specifications …… 4
Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics located near
the front of this manual.
o DBK25 users may be interested in the DBK208 module. DBK208 is a Carrier Board for Opto-22
Compatible Solid-State-Relays. Refer to the DBK208 section for additional information.

Overview
DBK25 provides 8 normally-open relay contacts for isolated switching of AC or DC loads or signals via
the LogBook’s P2 digital port or via the Daq device’s or adapter’s P2 digital port. The P2 port operating in
the expanded-I/O mode can address up to 32 DBK25s (256 relays max). The DigiBook/72 with 3 P2 ports
can address 96 DBK25s for up to 768 relay contacts. The relays are 2-coil sub-miniature latching relays
and do not require continuous current to stay closed. Such bi-stable relays can act as an 8-bit non-volatile
write-only memory byte.

The steady-state power drain of the DBK25 is very low, less than 1 mA at 5 VDC. It is practical, even
operating on a battery, to have hundreds of relay contacts. The stored-energy operation of the DBK25 does
limit the practical on/off speed (or the ability to generate 50% duty cycles) to about 10 Hz. The relay's
operating time is less than 15 ms.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

879795

DBK25, pg. 1

Hardware Setup
Card Connection
There are 16 screw terminals on the DBK25 to connect to 8 separate pairs of output contacts:- J1 for channels 5 through 8- J2 for channels 1 through 4
The board contains holes for use of wire ties.

Card Configuration
You must set DIP switch S1 to a 5-bit address to correspond to the desired card address. (S1 is locatednext to the DB37 connector.) The following table lists the switch settings for 32 system card numbers.
The XI/O addresses can be used in custom programming to access specific cards.

SystemCard #

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

XI/O
Address

H60
H61
H62
H63
H64
H65
H66
H67
H68
H69
H6A
H6B
H6C
H6D
H6E
H6F

1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON

S1 Position
OPEN = OFF
2
3
4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

5
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

SystemCard #

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

XI/O
Address

H70
H71
H72
H73
H74
H75
H76
H77
H78
H79
H7A
H7B
H7C
H7D
H7E
H7F

1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON

S1 Position
OPEN = OFF2
3
4
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFFON
OFF OFFON
OFF OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF OFFON
OFF OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

The full-page table on the following page shows all possible relay settings and their associated binary andhex values.

DBK25, pg. 2879795DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK Option Cards and Modules

879795

DBK25, pg. 3

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
Binary01010000 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 50
01010001 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 51
01010010 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 52
01010011 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 53
01010100 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 54
01010101 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 55
01010110 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 56
01010111 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 57
01011000 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 58
01011001 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 59
01011010 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 5A
01011011 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 5B
01011100 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 5C
01011101 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 5D
01011110 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 5E
01011111 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON 5F
LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
Binary01100000 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 60
01100001 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 61
01100010 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 62
01100011 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON 63
01100100 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 64
01100101 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON 65
01100110 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF 66
01100111 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON 67
01101000 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 68
01101001 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON 69
01101010 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 6A
01101011 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON 6B
01101100 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 6C
01101101 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON 6D
01101110 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF 6E
01101111 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON 6F
LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 70
OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON 71
OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF 72
OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 73
OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF 74
OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON 75
OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF 76
OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON 77
OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 78
OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON 79
OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 7A
OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON 7B
OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 7C
OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON 7D
OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF 7E
OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 7F

BinaryLR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
00010000 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 10
00010001 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 1100010010 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 12
00010011 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 13
00010100 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 14
00010101 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 1500010110 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 16
00010111 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 1700011000 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 18
00011001 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 1900011010 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 1A
00011011 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 1B
00011100 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 1C
00011101 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 1D
00011110 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 1E
00011111 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON 1F

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
Binary00100000 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 20
00100001 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 2100100010 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 22
00100011 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON 2300100100 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 24
00100101 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON 25
00100110 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF 26
00100111 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON 27
00101000 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 28
00101001 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON 29
00101010 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 2A
00101011 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON 2B
00101100 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 2C
00101101 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON 2D
00101110 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF 2E
00101111 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON 2F

BinaryLR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
00110000 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 30
00110001 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON 31
00110010 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF 32
00110011 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 33
00110100 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF 34
00110101 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON 35
00110110 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF 36
00110111 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON 37
00111000 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 38
00111001 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON 39
00111010 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 3A
00111011 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON 3B
00111100 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 3C
00111101 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON 3D
00111110 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF 3E
00111111 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON 3F
Binary01110000
01110001
01110010
01110011
01110100
01110101
0111011001110111
01111000
01111001
01111010
01111011
01111100
01111101
0111111001111111

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
Binary01000000 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 40
01000001 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 41
01000010 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 42
01000011 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 43
01000100 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 44
01000101 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 45
01000110 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 46
01000111 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 47
01001000 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 48
01001001 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 49
01001010 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 4A
01001011 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 4B
01001100 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 4C
01001101 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 4D
01001110 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 4E
01001111 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 4F

BinaryLR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
00000000 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 00
00000001 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 01
00000010 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 02
00000011 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 03
00000100 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 04
00000101 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 05
00000110 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 06
00000111 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 07
00001000 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 08
00001001 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 09
00001010 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 0A
00001011 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 0B
00001100 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 0C
00001101 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 0D
00001110 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 0E
00001111 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 0F

Binary10110000
10110001
10110010
10110011
10110100
10110101
10110110
10110111
10111000
10111001
10111010
10111011
10111100
10111101
10111110
10111111

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF B0
ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON B1
ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF B2
ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON B3
ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF B4
ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON B5
ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF B6
ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON B7
ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF B8
ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON B9
ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF BA
ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON BB
ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF BC
ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON BD
ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF BE
ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON BF

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
Binary10100000 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF A0
10100001 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON A1
10100010 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF A2
10100011 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON A3
10100100 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF A4
10100101 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON A5
10100110 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF A6
10100111 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON A7
10101000 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF A810101001 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON A910101010 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF AA
10101011 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON AB
10101100 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF AC
10101101 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON AD
10101110 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF AE
10101111 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON AF

BinaryLR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
10010000 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 90
10010001 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 91
10010010 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 92
10010011 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 93
10010100 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 94
10010101 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 95
10010110 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 96
10010111 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 97
10011000 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 98
10011001 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 99
10011010 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 9A
10011011 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 9B
10011100 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 9C
10011101 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 9D
10011110 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 9E
10011111 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON 9F

BinaryLR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
10000000 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 80
10000001 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 81
10000010 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 82
10000011 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 83
10000100 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 84
10000101 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 85
10000110 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 86
10000111 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 87
10001000 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 88
10001001 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 89
10001010 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 8A
10001011 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 8B
10001100 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 8C
10001101 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 8D
10001110 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 8E
10001111 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 8F

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF E0
ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON E1
ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF E2
ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON E3
ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF E4
ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON E5
ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF E6
ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON E7
ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF E8
ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON E9
ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF EA
ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON EB
ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF EC
ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ED
ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF EE
ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON EF

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF D0
ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON D1
ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF D2
ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON D3
ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF D4
ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON D5
ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF D6
ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON D7
ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF D8
ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON D9
ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF DA
ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON DB
ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF DC
ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON DD
ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF DE
ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON DF

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF C0
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON C1
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF C2
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON C3
ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF C4
ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON C5
ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF C6
ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON C7
ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF C8
ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON C9
ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF CA
ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON CB
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF CC
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON CD
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF CE
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON CF

LR8 LR7 LR6 LR5 LR4 LR3 LR2 LR1 HEX
Binary11110000 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF F011110001 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON F111110010 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF F211110011 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON F311110100 ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF F411110101 ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON F511110110 ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF F611110111 ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON F711111000 ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF F811111001 ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON F911111010 ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF FA
11111011 ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON FB
11111100 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF FC
11111101 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON FD
11111110 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF FE
11111111 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON FF

Binary11100000
11100001
11100010
11100011
11100100
11100101
1110011011100111
11101000
11101001
11101010
11101011
1110110011101101
1110111011101111

Binary11010000
11010001
11010010
11010011
11010100
11010101
1101011011010111
11011000
11011001
11011010
11011011
11011100
11011101
1101111011011111

Binary11000000
11000001
11000010
11000011
11000100
11000101
11000110
11000111
11001000
11001001
11001010
11001011
11001100
11001101
11001110
11001111

DaqBook and DaqBoard and DaqBoard/2000 Connection
Use a 37 pin accessory cable to connect DBK25 to the P2 connector of an appropriate P4 adapter.
These adapters are discussed in the DBK200 document modules.
P2 expansion cables must be kept short for proper operation.
Do not exceed 14” per attached DBK card.

DaqBook and DaqBoard Configuration
No hardware configuration setups internal to the DaqBook or DaqBoard are needed for expanded TTL I/O.

Software Setup
Reference Notes:
o DaqView Users - Refer to chapter 3, DBK Setup in DaqView.
o

LogView Users - Refer to chapter 4, DBK Setup in LogView.

DBK25 – Specifications
Name/Function: 8-Channel Relay Output Card
Connectors: Screw terminals for signal outputs
Max Number of Cards: 32
Contact Rating:
2 A @ 28 VDC; 0.6 A @ 120 VAC
Isolation:
Channel-to-System: 250 V
Channel-to-Channel: 150 V

DBK25, pg. 4879795DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK30A

Rechargeable Battery Module

Overview …… 1
Hardware Setup …… 3
Configuration …… 3
Power …… 3

Charging the Battery Module …… 5
DBK30A – Specifications …… 6

Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable toyour system, as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics locatednear the front of this manual.

Overview

DBK30A Front Panel
DBK30A contains two rechargeable nickel-cadmium batteries and shares the same base dimensions asother LogBook, DaqBook, and related DBK module products, allowing for convenient stacking withincluded splice plates and dual-lock tabs.
The included power adapter converts AC power to 24 VDC for charging DBK30A’s two battery packs.
Automatic charging circuits recharge the internal batteries quickly and safely when connected to the
supplied AC adapters. For trouble-free operation you must fully charge the batteries before use. The
charged battery runtime depends on the current load and mode of operation.
An internal slide switch (SW2) determines the unit’s mode. The two modes are:••

14 VDC Mode (default)
28 VDC ModeYou should check the power requirements of each component in your system, and thenverify that the power source can provide sufficient power to meet your runtime
requirements.

Fully charge DBK30A’s batteries before use.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

879795

DBK30A, pg. 1

14 VDC Mode (default)This mode provides 14 VDC for 3.4 A-hr. The typical battery runtime is from 3 to 6 hours depending on
the load. Unless 28 VDC is required, the 14 VDC mode should be used in your LogBook applications.

Unless you need 28 V, leave the unit in the 14 VDC mode. Use of the 28 VDC mode results ina lower runtime, as only one battery pack can be used for 14 VDC. When in the 14 VDC mode,both packs are used in parallel, resulting in a longer runtime for the same application.

28 VDC Mode
The 28 VDC mode actually provides both 14 VDC and 28 VDC. Loop currents for two-wire, 4-20 mA
transmitters (1.7 A-hr) require 28 VDC. The battery run-time typically ranges from 1 to 6 hours, dependingon system configuration. In this mode, 14 VDC is used for unregulated bridge excitation (for bridgeconfigured sensors, such as load cells), and power to DBK expansion products.

Unless you need 28 V, leave the unit in the 14 VDC mode. Use of the 28 VDC mode results
in a lower runtime, as only one battery pack can be used for 14 VDC. When in the 14 VDC
mode, both packs are used in parallel, resulting in a longer runtime for the same application.

DBK30A, pg. 2879795DBK Option Cards and Modules

Hardware Setup
Configuration
The only configuration option is the choice of modes (14 VDC, or 28 VDC). If you do not need 28 V,
leave SW2 in the default position.
If you are using a pre-owned DBK30A, or are unsure of the mode selected, use thefollowing steps to check SW2’s position. Note that new units are always shipped with SW2
selected to the 14 VDC mode.
Internal switch SW2 is located on the printed circuit board, near the front center of the unit. To change orverify the mode:
1.

Remove DBK30A’s cover by removing one screw and sliding the cover forward until it separates
from the module.

2.

Look near the front center of the circuit board and locate slide switch SW2.

3.

Check SW2’s selection. The silkscreen indicates the 14 and 28 VDC positions.

4.

Change the selection, if required. If you do not need 28 V, SW2 should be in the default position(14 VDC).

5.

Replace the top cover, and secure with screw.

Power
Connection. The figure shows the pinout for the POWER OUT DIN5 connector.
The 28 V pin is only active in the 28 VDC mode; however, the 14 V pin is active
regardless of the mode selected.
Cable CA-115 is included in the DBK30A package. The cable connects to
DBK30A’s POWER OUT connector and a LogBook, DaqBook, or WaveBook
DIN5 POWER IN connector. The cable can be used to daisy-chain a DBK30A
unit to a DBK or WBK expansion module.
The DBK30A package includes a short connecting cable (CA-115) to connect to the LogBook or Daq
device. This cable connects the POWER OUT connector on the DBK30A to the POWER IN connector on
the Daq device or LogBook (see next figure).

DBK Option Cards and Modules

879795

DBK30A, pg. 3

28 VDC Mode. The primary purpose of the 28 VDC mode is to provide power for external looptransmitters. The hookup is simple, as shown below.

Another use of the 28 VDC mode is to provide excitation for bridge-type sensors, such as load cells(strain gages).
The primary purpose of the 28 VDC mode is to power external user-supplied loop transmitters. The
hookup is simple, as shown below. A DIN5 connector allows easy connection of lead wires.

The 28 VDC mode can also be used to provide a 14 VDC excitation source for bridge-type sensors such asload cells (strain gages). The excitation voltage is not regulated by the DBK30A; so, this voltage must be
externally regulated to 10.00 V for most load cells.

Excitation voltage from DBK30A is not regulated by the unit, and must therefore be
regulated externally. For most load cells, excitation voltage should be regulated to 10 V.

DBK30A, pg. 4879795DBK Option Cards and Modules

Charging the Battery Module
To charge the DBK30A batteries:
1. Connect the adapter to DBK30A’s POWER IN connector.
2. Plug the adapter into the AC power receptacle.
Note: The charge cycle will begin automatically whenever AC power is applied after an interruption. The
charge cycle will automatically end when the batteries are fully charged.

Charging DBK30A’s Batteries
3. To manually initiate a charge cycle, press the START CHARGE momentary rocker-arm switch.
Note that subsequent charge cycles applied to a fully-charged DBK30A will have no ill effect. The
module will sense the fully-charged status and revert to the trickle-charge state within a few
minutes.
Three LEDs on the DBK30A provide status information on the charging process or the external load.
LED Indicators & Descriptions
POWER IN

Indicates the charger is connected to a source of AC power and to the battery module.

BATTERY CHARGING

Steady Light - Indicates the battery is in the high-current (2 A) charge mode.
Flashing - One or two flashes at a time indicates the batteries are fully charged.

POWER OUT

Indicates power is flowing out to an external device.

CAUTION
Periodically, fully discharge the DBK30A to inhibit “lazy chemistry” (memory) in thenickel-cadmium cells. To manually discharge a battery pack, connect the primaryacquisition device, e.g., WaveBook, DaqBook, or LogBook, to the DBK30A and leave
it powered-on until the indicator lights go out.

Use While Charging.
•

Both operating modes are capable of powering data acquisition devices while the DBK30A is being
charged; however, the charging current will be reduced, and the charging time will increase.

•

If AC power is interrupted, a new charge cycle will begin automatically when AC power returns.

CAUTION
Even with the AC adapter, the batteries will eventually discharge under an operatingload. Charging DOES NOT BEGIN AUTOMATICALLY (except on power-up). You
must manually initiate the next charge cycle. Do not expect a device powered by a
DBK30A to operate as if connected to an uninterruptable power supply.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

879795

DBK30A, pg. 5

DBK30A – Specifications
Name/Function: Rechargeable Battery Module
Battery Type: Nickel-cadmium
Number of Battery Packs: 2
Battery Pack Configuration: 12 series-connected sub-C cells
Output Voltage: 14.4 V or 28.8 V (depending on the selected mode)
Output Fuses: 2 A
Battery Amp-Hours: 3.4 A-hr (1.7 A-hr/pack)
Charge Termination: Peak detection
Charge Time: 2 hours
Charging Voltage from Supplied AC Adapter: 22 to 26 VDC @ 2 A
AC Adapter Input: 95 to 265 VAC @ 47 to 63 Hz
Size: 221 mm × 285 mm × 35 mm (11" × 8-1/2" × 1-3/8")
Weight: 2.4 kg (6 lb)

DBK30A, pg. 6879795DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK34A

UPS / Battery Module

Hardware Setup for 12 Volt (Default) or 24 Volt Operation …… 3
Indicators …… 4
Runtime …… 4
Charging …… 4
Fuse Replacement …… 5
Environmental Concerns …… 6
DBK34A – Specifications …… 6
DBK34A is similar to DBK34 in appearance and operation; but there are differences.
Before proceeding with this document module, verify that your device is a DBK34A. If
your device does not have the “A” suffix, use the DBK34 Document Module instead of thisone.
Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics located near
the front of this manual.

Overview
The DBK34A can power a data acquisition system in portable or in-vehicle UPS applications (both 12 V
and 24 V systems). Power storage capacity is 5 A-hr @ 12 VDC or 2.5 A-hr @ 24 VDC.
For reliable data acquisition in a vehicle, the DBK34A provides clean and consistent operating power:• Prior to engine/generator start• During engine start-up (battery sag due to the high-current demand of starter motor andsolenoid)• After engine turn off.
• Before and after connection to the vehicle

DBK34A Front Panel
The DBK34A contains two sealed-lead rechargeable batteries (Gel-Packs), associated charging circuits andcurrent indicators. Typically, these batteries can last more than 500 full cycles and up to 10 years standby
lifetime at room temperature. Recharging is fast, and extreme temperature performance is good. The
DBK34A can be used with the LogBook, DaqBook, WaveBook, and related DBKs and WBKs. The unit’s
rugged metal package has a compatible 8×11” footprint for convenient stacking with Velcro tabs andoptional splice plates and handles for carrying.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

879795

DBK34A, pg. 1

Main and auxiliary power input comes from 12 or 24 VDC via a terminal block on the unit’s front panel(12 or 24 V modes are set by front-panel jumpers). Automatic, temperature-compensated charging circuits
recharge the internal batteries quickly and safely. For trouble-free operation, you must fully charge thebatteries before use. The charged battery runtime will depend on the load and mode of operation.
During use of the internal batteries, the Charging LED blinks and a beeper sounds when battery life isalmost exhausted. Within a few minutes, internal cutoff circuits disconnect the load from the batteries toprevent the possibility of deep-cycle damage.
Note: Current protection is provided by four fuses: Two 7.5A fuses for the unit’s internal batteries,
one 7.5 A fuse for an auxiliary (external) battery, and a 15 A fuse for the power input.

You can use a CA-172 cable to connect a vehicle battery (via a cigarette lighter) to the DBK34A
terminal board. The cable is six feet long, contains a cigarette lighter adapter at one end, andstripped leads (for terminal connection) at the other.

For trouble-free operation, fully charge the batteries before use.

DBK34A Block Diagram

DBK34A, pg. 2879795DBK Option Cards and Modules

Hardware Setup for 12 Volt (Default) or 24 Volt Operation
The DBK34A is configured for 12 volt or 24 volt operation via placement of jumpers on the front panel’sscrew-terminal block (TB1). DBK34A’s screw-terminal numbers read as follows, when read from left toright: 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

DBK34A’s Screw Terminal Board, TB1
For 12 Volt Operation:
1. Remove jumper from terminals 8 and 7, if present.
2. Use a jumper to short terminals 9 and 8.
3. Use a jumper to short terminals 7 and 6.
For 24 Volt Operation:
1.

Remove jumpers from terminals 9 and 8, if present.

2.

Remove jumpers from terminals 7 and 6, if present.

3.

Use a jumper to short terminals 8 and 7.

Power In (12 or 24 VDC only).
1. Connect the MAIN POWER INPUT (+) positive to Terminal 3 of TB1.
2.

Connect MAIN POWER INPUT (-) negative to Terminal 5 of TB1.
TB1’s Terminal 4 is reserved for factory use and is not to be connected by the user.
The use of an optional auxiliary battery will extend run-time.

Auxiliary Batteries.
Auxiliary batteries for use with DBK34A, must be: (a) of lead-acid chemistry, (b) in the
2 to 3 A-Hr range, and (c) of the same voltage as that set by the Voltage Select Jumpers. Auxiliary
batteries charge and discharge in the same manner as the internal batteries.
If an auxiliary battery is to be used:1.

Connect AUX BATT (+) positive to Terminal 1 (of TB1).

2.

Connect AUX BATT (-) negative to Terminal 2 (of TB1).

Power Out.
The pinout at the right applies to the two POWER
OUT DIN5 connectors.

DIN5 Power Output Connector (2 per DBK34A)DBK Option Cards and Modules

879795

DBK34A, pg. 3

Indicators
Three front-panel LED indicators provide power and charging status information.
LED Indicators & Descriptions
MAIN POWER

Lights when the DBK34A power input is connected to a source of at least 12.25 VDC

CHARGING

Lights when the internal batteries are being fast-charged at a rate of 0.1 amp/cell or greater.

DISCHARGINGLights when internal batteries (or auxiliary batteries) are discharging at a rate of 0.25A or greater.

RuntimeFor trouble-free operation, you must fully charge the batteries before use.
Charged battery runtime depends on the load and on the mode of operation.

Approximate runtime under various loads can be computed from the storage capacity (5 A-hr in 12 V
mode; 2.5 A-hr in 24 V mode) and the load (main unit and other DBKs). See Power Requirements in the
DBK Basics section.
The following Load Wattage vs. Hours graph is for a typical new battery that is fully charged.

Charging
In general, lead-acid batteries [and related Gel-Packs] require charging at 120% of drain energy (e.g.,
the 5 A-hr DBK34A requires a charge equal to or greater than 6 A-hr). Charging times vary; but
4 to 5 hours at 14 V is typical for a completely discharged battery; after which, charging may continue
indefinitely.
Note that 16 to 18 VDC at the power input is required for optimal charging.

CAUTION
Voltage applied to a DBK34A must not exceed 30 VDC.

DBK34A, pg. 4879795DBK Option Cards and Modules

Fuse Replacement
DBK34A contains four MINI ATO fuses that can be replaced by the user. Note that you should always
check your unit for blown fuses prior to sending it back to the factory for repair. This could save you timeand money.
The following table indicates the probable reason that a particular fuse may have blown, and includes partnumbers and fuse rating.
Fuse

RatingProbable Cause of Blowing Fuse

Replacement Fuse

F1

7.5 A

Auxiliary Battery overload.

7.5A MINI ATO, LITTLEFUSE# 297-07.5

F2

7.5 A

Output overload.

7.5A MINI ATO, LITTLEFUSE# 297-07.5

F3

7.5 A

Output overload.

7.5A MINI ATO, LITTLEFUSE# 297-07.5

F4

15 A

Input overload.

15A MINI ATO, LITTLEFUSE# 297-015

DBK34A, Fuse Location Reference

To replace a fuse:

DBK Option Cards and Modules

1.

Disconnect the DBK34A from loads and from supply power.

2.

Remove the DBK34A’s cover plate. This requires the removal of 4
screws (2 per side).

3.

Examine the fuses (F1 through F4) to see which, if any, have blown.
Note that you can usually see the blown element through the fuse’stransparent casing.

4.

Replace the blown fuse with the appropriate replacement fuse (seepreceding table). Note that the fuse value is present on top of the fuse;also, the fuses are color coded as an aid to identification.

5.

Replace the DBK34A cover and secure with screws (removed in step 2).

879795

DBK34A, pg. 5

Environmental Concerns
CAUTION
DBK34A Gel-Pack batteries contain toxic materials (Pb and H2SO4). At the end of
the battery life cycle the Gel-Packs must be recycled or properly disposed of.

DBK34A – Specifications
Name/Function: UPS / Battery Module
Battery Type: sealed-lead gel-packNumber of Battery Packs: 2
Battery Pack Configuration: 6 series-connected D cells
Output Voltage: 12 V or 24 V (set by jumpers on TB1)
Output Fuses: F2 and F3; one 7.5 A fuse for each internal gel-pack battery
Input Fuses: F1: 7.5 A for auxiliary battery, F4: 15 A for input overload
Battery Capacity (Amp-Hours):
5 A-hr in 12 V mode (parallel)
2.5 A-hr in 24 V mode (series)
Operating Temperature: -20°F to 122°F (-29°C to 50°C)
Size: 8½ × 11 × 1¾ in. ( 216 × 279 × 44 mm)
Weight: 7.2 lb (3.27 kg)

DBK34A, pg. 6879795DBK Option Cards and Modules